Contents

tp-link TL-SG2218 V1 Reference Guide PDF

1 of 570
1 of 570

Summary of Content for tp-link TL-SG2218 V1 Reference Guide PDF

CLI Reference Guide

Jetstream Switches

1910012904 REV4.5.0

October 2020

I

COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS

Specifications are subject to change without notice. is a registered trademark of

TP-Link Corporation Limited. Other brands and product names are trademarks or registered

trademarks of their respective holders.

No part of the specifications may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make

any derivative such as translation, transformation, or adaptation without permission from

TP-Link Corporation Limited. Copyright 2020 TP-Link Corporation Limited. All rights

reserved.

https://www.tp-link.com

II

CONTENTS

Preface ............................................................................................................................ 1

Chapter 1 Using the CLI ................................................................................................... 6

1.1 Accessing the CLI ........................................................................................................................... 6

1.1.1 Logon by a console port ...................................................................................................... 6

1.1.2 Logon by Telnet ...................................................................................................................... 8

1.1.3 Logon by SSH ........................................................................................................................ 10

1.2 CLI Command Modes .................................................................................................................. 15

1.3 Privilege Restrictions ................................................................................................................... 18

1.4 Conventions ................................................................................................................................... 18

1.4.1 PoE Disclaimer ...................................................................................................................... 18

1.4.2 Format Conventions ........................................................................................................... 19

1.4.3 Special Characters .............................................................................................................. 19

1.4.4 Parameter Format ................................................................................................................ 19

Chapter 2 Line Commands (Only for Certain Devices) ......................................... 20

2.1 line ...................................................................................................................................................... 20

2.2 media-type rj45 ............................................................................................................................. 21

Chapter 3 User Interface .............................................................................................. 22

3.1 enable ............................................................................................................................................... 22

3.2 service password-encryption .................................................................................................. 22

3.3 enable password ........................................................................................................................... 23

3.4 enable secret ................................................................................................................................. 24

3.5 configure .......................................................................................................................................... 25

3.6 exit...................................................................................................................................................... 26

3.7 end ..................................................................................................................................................... 26

3.8 clipaging ........................................................................................................................................... 27

3.9 history ............................................................................................................................................... 27

3.10 history clear .................................................................................................................................... 28

Chapter 4 User Management Commands ................................................................ 29

4.1 user name (password) ................................................................................................................. 29

4.2 user name (secret) ........................................................................................................................ 30

4.3 service password-recovery ...................................................................................................... 31

4.4 show user account-list................................................................................................................ 32

4.5 show user configuration ............................................................................................................. 33

III

Chapter 5 System Configuration Commands ......................................................... 34

5.1 system-time manual .................................................................................................................... 34

5.2 system-time ntp ............................................................................................................................ 34

5.3 system-time dst predefined ..................................................................................................... 36

5.4 system-time dst date .................................................................................................................. 37

5.5 system-time dst recurring ......................................................................................................... 38

5.6 hostname ......................................................................................................................................... 39

5.7 location ............................................................................................................................................. 40

5.8 contact-info .................................................................................................................................... 40

5.9 led ....................................................................................................................................................... 41

5.10 ip address ........................................................................................................................................ 41

5.11 ip address-alloc ............................................................................................................................. 42

5.12 controller cloud-based (Only for Certain Devices)............................................................ 43

5.13 controller inform-url (Only for Certain Devices) ................................................................. 44

5.14 reset .................................................................................................................................................. 44

5.15 service reset-disable ................................................................................................................... 45

5.16 reboot ............................................................................................................................................... 46

5.17 reboot-schedule ........................................................................................................................... 46

5.18 copy running-config startup-config ....................................................................................... 47

5.19 copy startup-config tftp ............................................................................................................. 48

5.20 copy tftp startup-config ............................................................................................................. 48

5.21 copy backup-config tftp ............................................................................................................. 49

5.22 copy backup-config startup-config ....................................................................................... 50

5.23 copy running-config backup-config ...................................................................................... 50

5.24 copy tftp backup-config ............................................................................................................. 51

5.25 boot application ............................................................................................................................ 51

5.26 boot config ...................................................................................................................................... 52

5.27 remove backup-image ................................................................................................................ 53

5.28 firmware upgrade .......................................................................................................................... 53

5.29 boot autoinstall start .................................................................................................................... 54

5.30 boot autoinstall persistent-mode ........................................................................................... 55

5.31 boot autoinstall auto-save ......................................................................................................... 55

5.32 boot autoinstall auto-reboot ..................................................................................................... 56

5.33 boot autoinstall retry-count ...................................................................................................... 56

5.34 show boot autoinstall .................................................................................................................. 57

5.35 show boot autoinstall downloaded-config .......................................................................... 57

5.36 ping .................................................................................................................................................... 58

IV

5.37 tracert ............................................................................................................................................... 59

5.38 show system-info ......................................................................................................................... 60

5.39 show image-info ............................................................................................................................ 60

5.40 show boot ........................................................................................................................................ 61

5.41 show running-config .................................................................................................................... 61

5.42 show startup-config .................................................................................................................... 62

5.43 show system-time ........................................................................................................................ 63

5.44 show system-time dst ................................................................................................................. 63

5.45 show system-time ntp ................................................................................................................ 64

5.46 show cable-diagnostics interface........................................................................................... 64

5.47 show cpu-utilization ..................................................................................................................... 65

5.48 show memory-utilization ............................................................................................................ 65

5.49 show controller .............................................................................................................................. 66

5.50 show temperature ........................................................................................................................ 66

5.51 show voltage .................................................................................................................................. 67

Chapter 6 EEE Configuration Commands ................................................................ 68

6.1 eee ..................................................................................................................................................... 68

6.2 show interface eee ....................................................................................................................... 68

Chapter 7 SDM Template Commands ....................................................................... 70

7.1 sdm prefer ....................................................................................................................................... 70

7.2 show sdm prefer ........................................................................................................................... 71

Chapter 8 Time Range Commands ............................................................................ 72

8.1 time-range ....................................................................................................................................... 72

8.2 absolute ........................................................................................................................................... 72

8.3 periodic ............................................................................................................................................ 73

8.4 holiday (time-range mode) ......................................................................................................... 74

8.5 holiday .............................................................................................................................................. 75

8.6 show holiday ................................................................................................................................... 75

8.7 show time-range ........................................................................................................................... 76

Chapter 9 Port Configuration Commands ............................................................... 77

9.1 interface gigabitEthernet ........................................................................................................... 77

9.2 interface range gigabitEthernet............................................................................................... 77

9.3 description ...................................................................................................................................... 78

9.4 shutdown ......................................................................................................................................... 79

9.5 flow-control .................................................................................................................................... 80

V

9.6 duplex ............................................................................................................................................... 80

9.7 jumbo-size ....................................................................................................................................... 81

9.8 speed ................................................................................................................................................ 81

9.9 serdes-mode .................................................................................................................................. 82

9.10 clear counters ................................................................................................................................ 83

9.11 show fiber-ports ............................................................................................................................ 83

9.12 show interface status .................................................................................................................. 84

9.13 show interface counters ............................................................................................................ 84

9.14 show interface configuration .................................................................................................... 85

Chapter 10 Port Isolation Commands ......................................................................... 87

10.1 port isolation................................................................................................................................... 87

10.2 show port isolation interface .................................................................................................... 88

Chapter 11 Loopback Detection Commands ............................................................ 89

11.1 loopback-detection (global) ...................................................................................................... 89

11.2 loopback-detection interval ...................................................................................................... 89

11.3 loopback-detection recovery-time ........................................................................................ 90

11.4 loopback-detection (interface) ................................................................................................ 91

11.5 loopback-detection config process-mode ......................................................................... 91

11.6 loopback-detection recover ..................................................................................................... 92

11.7 show loopback-detection global............................................................................................. 93

11.8 show loopback-detection interface ....................................................................................... 93

Chapter 12 DDM Commands (Only for Certain Devices)........................................ 95

12.1 ddm state enable .......................................................................................................................... 95

12.2 ddm shutdown ............................................................................................................................... 96

12.3 ddm temperature_threshold ..................................................................................................... 96

12.4 ddm voltage_threshold ............................................................................................................... 97

12.5 ddm bias_current_threshold .................................................................................................... 98

12.6 ddm tx_power_threshold ........................................................................................................... 99

12.7 ddm rx_power_threshold ........................................................................................................ 100

12.8 show ddm configuration.......................................................................................................... 101

12.9 show ddm status ........................................................................................................................ 102

Chapter 13 Etherchannel Commands ....................................................................... 103

13.1 channel-group ............................................................................................................................ 103

13.2 port-channel load-balance ..................................................................................................... 104

13.3 lacp system-priority .................................................................................................................. 105

VI

13.4 lacp port-priority ........................................................................................................................ 106

13.5 show etherchannel .................................................................................................................... 106

13.6 show etherchannel load-balance ......................................................................................... 107

13.7 show lacp ...................................................................................................................................... 108

13.8 show lacp sys-id ......................................................................................................................... 108

Chapter 14 MAC Address Commands ....................................................................... 110

14.1 mac address-table static ........................................................................................................ 110

14.2 no mac address-table dynamic ............................................................................................ 111

14.3 mac address-table aging-time .............................................................................................. 111

14.4 mac address-table filtering .................................................................................................... 112

14.5 mac address-table notification ............................................................................................. 113

14.6 mac address-table max-mac-count ................................................................................... 113

14.7 mac address-table notification (interface) ........................................................................ 115

14.8 mac address-table security ................................................................................................... 116

14.9 mac address-table vlan-security ......................................................................................... 117

14.10 show mac address-table ......................................................................................................... 118

14.11 clear mac address-table ......................................................................................................... 118

14.12 show mac address-table aging-time .................................................................................. 119

14.13 show mac address-table max-mac-count ........................................................................ 119

14.14 show mac address-table interface ...................................................................................... 120

14.15 show mac address-table count ............................................................................................ 121

14.16 show mac address-table address ....................................................................................... 121

14.17 show mac address-table vlan ................................................................................................ 122

14.18 show mac address-table notification ................................................................................. 122

14.19 show mac address-table security ........................................................................................ 123

Chapter 15 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Commands .............................................................. 124

15.1 vlan .................................................................................................................................................. 124

15.2 name ............................................................................................................................................... 125

15.3 vlan_trunk (globally) .................................................................................................................. 125

15.4 vlan_trunk (interface) ................................................................................................................ 126

15.5 switchport general allowed vlan ........................................................................................... 126

15.6 switchport pvid ........................................................................................................................... 127

15.7 switchport check ingress ........................................................................................................ 128

15.8 switchport acceptable frame ................................................................................................ 129

15.9 show vlan summary................................................................................................................... 129

15.10 show vlan brief ............................................................................................................................ 130

VII

15.11 show vlan ...................................................................................................................................... 130

15.12 show interface switchport ...................................................................................................... 131

Chapter 16 MAC-based VLAN Commands ............................................................... 132

16.1 mac-vlan mac-address ............................................................................................................ 132

16.2 mac-vlan ....................................................................................................................................... 133

16.3 show mac-vlan ............................................................................................................................ 133

16.4 show mac-vlan interface ......................................................................................................... 134

Chapter 17 Protocol-based VLAN Commands ....................................................... 135

17.1 protocol-vlan template ............................................................................................................ 135

17.2 protocol-vlan vlan ...................................................................................................................... 136

17.3 protocol-vlan group .................................................................................................................. 137

17.4 show protocol-vlan template ................................................................................................. 137

17.5 show protocol-vlan vlan .......................................................................................................... 138

Chapter 18 Private VLAN Commands (Only for Certain Devices) ..................... 139

18.1 private-vlan primary .................................................................................................................. 139

18.2 private-vlan community ........................................................................................................... 139

18.3 private-vlan isolated ................................................................................................................. 140

18.4 private-vlan association .......................................................................................................... 141

18.5 switchport private-vlan ............................................................................................................ 141

18.6 switchport private-vlan host-association ......................................................................... 142

18.7 switchport private-vlan mapping ......................................................................................... 143

18.8 show vlan private-vlan ............................................................................................................. 144

18.9 show vlan private-vlan interface ........................................................................................... 144

Chapter 19 VLAN-VPN Commands (Only for Certain Devices) .......................... 146

19.1 dot1q-tunnel ................................................................................................................................ 146

19.2 switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid ................................................................................................. 146

19.3 dot1q-tunnel mapping ............................................................................................................. 147

19.4 switchport dot1q-tunnel mode ............................................................................................. 148

19.5 switchport dot1q-tunnel missdrop ...................................................................................... 149

19.6 switchport dot1q-tunnel use_inner_priority .................................................................... 149

19.7 switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping ....................................................................................... 150

19.8 switchport dot1q-tunnel replace ......................................................................................... 151

19.9 show dot1q-tunnel .................................................................................................................... 152

19.10 show dot1q-tunnel mapping .................................................................................................. 152

19.11 show dot1q-tunnel interface ................................................................................................. 153

VIII

Chapter 20 GVRP Commands ...................................................................................... 154

20.1 gvrp ................................................................................................................................................. 154

20.2 gvrp (interface)............................................................................................................................ 154

20.3 gvrp registration ......................................................................................................................... 155

20.4 gvrp timer ..................................................................................................................................... 156

20.5 show gvrp interface .................................................................................................................. 157

20.6 show gvrp global ........................................................................................................................ 158

Chapter 21 IGMP Snooping Commands.................................................................... 159

21.1 ip igmp snooping (global) ........................................................................................................ 159

21.2 ip igmp snooping version ........................................................................................................ 159

21.3 ip igmp snooping drop-unknown ......................................................................................... 160

21.4 ip igmp snooping header-validation .................................................................................... 161

21.5 ip igmp snooping vlan-config ................................................................................................ 161

21.6 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (immediate-leave)............................................................ 163

21.7 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (report-suppression) ...................................................... 163

21.8 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (router-ports-forbidden) ............................................... 164

21.9 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (rport interface) ................................................................ 165

21.10 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (static) .................................................................................. 166

21.11 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (querier) ............................................................................... 167

21.12 ip igmp snooping (interface) .................................................................................................. 168

21.13 ip igmp snooping max-groups .............................................................................................. 169

21.14 ip igmp snooping immediate-leave ..................................................................................... 170

21.15 ip igmp snooping authentication .......................................................................................... 170

21.16 ip igmp snooping accounting ................................................................................................ 171

21.17 ip igmp profile ............................................................................................................................. 172

21.18 deny ................................................................................................................................................ 172

21.19 permit ............................................................................................................................................. 173

21.20 range .............................................................................................................................................. 173

21.21 ip igmp filter ................................................................................................................................. 174

21.22 clear ip igmp snooping statistics ......................................................................................... 175

21.23 show ip igmp snooping ............................................................................................................ 175

21.24 show ip igmp snooping interface ......................................................................................... 176

21.25 show ip igmp snooping vlan ................................................................................................... 177

21.26 show ip igmp snooping groups ............................................................................................. 177

21.27 show ip igmp profile .................................................................................................................. 178

IX

Chapter 22 MLD Snooping Commands ..................................................................... 180

22.1 ipv6 mld snooping (global) ...................................................................................................... 180

22.2 ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown ....................................................................................... 180

22.3 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config .............................................................................................. 181

22.4 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (immediate-leave) ......................................................... 182

22.5 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (report-suppression) .................................................... 183

22.6 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (router-ports-forbidden) ............................................. 184

22.7 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (rport interface) .............................................................. 185

22.8 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (static) ............................................................................... 185

22.9 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (querier) ............................................................................ 186

22.10 ipv6 mld snooping (interface) ................................................................................................ 188

22.11 ipv6 mld snooping max-groups ............................................................................................ 188

22.12 ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave ................................................................................... 189

22.13 ipv6 mld profile ........................................................................................................................... 190

22.14 deny ................................................................................................................................................ 191

22.15 permit ............................................................................................................................................. 191

22.16 range .............................................................................................................................................. 192

22.17 ipv6 mld filter ............................................................................................................................... 192

22.18 clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics ....................................................................................... 193

22.19 show ipv6 mld snooping .......................................................................................................... 193

22.20 show ipv6 mld snooping interface ....................................................................................... 194

22.21 show ipv6 mld snooping vlan ................................................................................................. 195

22.22 show ipv6 mld snooping groups .......................................................................................... 195

22.23 show ipv6 mld profile ................................................................................................................ 196

Chapter 23 MVR Commands ........................................................................................ 197

23.1 mvr (global) ................................................................................................................................... 197

23.2 mvr group ..................................................................................................................................... 197

23.3 mvr mode ...................................................................................................................................... 198

23.4 mvr querytime ............................................................................................................................. 199

23.5 mvr vlan ......................................................................................................................................... 200

23.6 mvr (interface) ............................................................................................................................. 200

23.7 mvr type ........................................................................................................................................ 201

23.8 mvr immediate ............................................................................................................................ 202

23.9 mvr vlan (group) .......................................................................................................................... 202

23.10 show mvr ...................................................................................................................................... 203

23.11 show mvr interface .................................................................................................................... 204

23.12 show mvr members .................................................................................................................. 204

X

Chapter 24 MSTP Commands ...................................................................................... 206

24.1 debug spanning-tree ................................................................................................................ 206

24.2 spanning-tree (global) .............................................................................................................. 207

24.3 spanning-tree (interface) ........................................................................................................ 207

24.4 spanning-tree common-config ............................................................................................. 208

24.5 spanning-tree mode ................................................................................................................. 209

24.6 spanning-tree mst configuration ......................................................................................... 210

24.7 instance ......................................................................................................................................... 210

24.8 name ............................................................................................................................................... 211

24.9 revision .......................................................................................................................................... 212

24.10 spanning-tree mst instance ................................................................................................... 213

24.11 spanning-tree mst ..................................................................................................................... 213

24.12 spanning-tree priority .............................................................................................................. 214

24.13 spanning-tree timer .................................................................................................................. 215

24.14 spanning-tree hold-count ....................................................................................................... 216

24.15 spanning-tree max-hops ......................................................................................................... 216

24.16 spanning-tree bpdufilter ......................................................................................................... 217

24.17 spanning-tree bpduflood ........................................................................................................ 218

24.18 spanning-tree bpduguard ....................................................................................................... 218

24.19 spanning-tree guard loop ....................................................................................................... 219

24.20 spanning-tree guard root ........................................................................................................ 220

24.21 spanning-tree guard tc ............................................................................................................ 220

24.22 spanning-tree mcheck ............................................................................................................. 221

24.23 show spanning-tree active ..................................................................................................... 221

24.24 show spanning-tree bridge .................................................................................................... 222

24.25 show spanning-tree interface ............................................................................................... 222

24.26 show spanning-tree interface-security ............................................................................. 223

24.27 show spanning-tree mst ......................................................................................................... 224

Chapter 25 LLDP Commands ....................................................................................... 226

25.1 lldp................................................................................................................................................... 226

25.2 lldp forward_message .............................................................................................................. 226

25.3 lldp hold-multiplier ..................................................................................................................... 227

25.4 lldp timer ....................................................................................................................................... 228

25.5 lldp receive ................................................................................................................................... 229

25.6 lldp transmit ................................................................................................................................. 229

25.7 lldp snmp-trap ............................................................................................................................. 230

25.8 lldp tlv-select ............................................................................................................................... 231

XI

25.9 lldp management-address ..................................................................................................... 231

25.10 lldp med-fast-count .................................................................................................................. 232

25.11 lldp med-status ........................................................................................................................... 233

25.12 lldp med-tlv-select .................................................................................................................... 233

25.13 lldp med-location ....................................................................................................................... 234

25.14 show lldp ....................................................................................................................................... 235

25.15 show lldp interface .................................................................................................................... 235

25.16 show lldp local-information interface ................................................................................. 236

25.17 show lldp neighbor-information interface ......................................................................... 237

25.18 show lldp traffic interface ....................................................................................................... 237

Chapter 26 L2PT Commands (Only for Certain Devices) ..................................... 239

26.1 l2protocol-tunnel ..................................................................................................................... 239

26.2 l2protocol-tunnel type ........................................................................................................... 240

26.3 show l2protocol-tunnel global ........................................................................................... 241

26.4 show l2protocol-tunnel interface ..................................................................................... 242

Chapter 27 PPPoE ID-Insertion Commands (Only for Certain Devices) ........... 243

27.1 pppoe id-insertion (global) ................................................................................................... 243

27.2 pppoe circuit-id (interface) .................................................................................................. 244

27.3 pppoe circuit-id type .............................................................................................................. 244

27.4 pppoe remote-id....................................................................................................................... 245

27.5 show pppoe id-insertion global ......................................................................................... 246

27.6 show pppoe id-insertion interface ................................................................................... 246

Chapter 28 Static Routes Commands ....................................................................... 248

28.1 ip routing ....................................................................................................................................... 248

28.2 interface vlan ............................................................................................................................... 248

28.3 interface loopback .................................................................................................................... 249

28.4 switchport .................................................................................................................................... 249

28.5 interface range port-channel ................................................................................................. 250

28.6 description ................................................................................................................................... 251

28.7 shutdown ...................................................................................................................................... 251

28.8 interface port-channel ............................................................................................................. 252

28.9 ip route .......................................................................................................................................... 253

28.10 ipv6 routing .................................................................................................................................. 253

28.11 ipv6 route ...................................................................................................................................... 254

28.12 show interface vlan ................................................................................................................... 255

28.13 show ip interface ........................................................................................................................ 255

XII

28.14 show ip interface brief .............................................................................................................. 256

28.15 show ip route ............................................................................................................................... 256

28.16 show ip route specify ............................................................................................................... 257

28.17 show ip route summary ........................................................................................................... 258

28.18 show ipv6 interface ................................................................................................................... 258

28.19 show ipv6 route .......................................................................................................................... 259

28.20 show ipv6 route summary ...................................................................................................... 259

Chapter 29 IPv6 Address Configuration Commands ............................................ 261

29.1 ipv6 enable ................................................................................................................................... 261

29.2 ipv6 address autoconfig.......................................................................................................... 261

29.3 ipv6 address link-local ............................................................................................................. 262

29.4 ipv6 address dhcp ..................................................................................................................... 263

29.5 ipv6 address ra ........................................................................................................................... 263

29.6 ipv6 address eui-64 .................................................................................................................. 264

29.7 ipv6 address ................................................................................................................................ 265

29.8 show ipv6 interface ................................................................................................................... 266

Chapter 30 ARP Commands ......................................................................................... 267

30.1 arp ................................................................................................................................................... 267

30.2 clear arp-cache .......................................................................................................................... 268

30.3 arp dynamicrenew ..................................................................................................................... 268

30.4 arp timeout ................................................................................................................................... 269

30.5 gratuitous-arp intf-status-up enable .................................................................................. 269

30.6 gratuitous-arp dup-ip-detected enable ............................................................................. 270

30.7 gratuitous-arp learning enable .............................................................................................. 270

30.8 gratuitous-arp send-interval .................................................................................................. 271

30.9 ip proxy-arp.................................................................................................................................. 272

30.10 ip local-proxy-arp ...................................................................................................................... 272

30.11 show arp ........................................................................................................................................ 273

30.12 show ip arp (interface) .............................................................................................................. 274

30.13 show ip arp summary................................................................................................................ 274

30.14 show gratuitous-arp ................................................................................................................. 275

30.15 show ip proxy-arp ...................................................................................................................... 275

Chapter 31 DHCP Server Commands ........................................................................ 277

31.1 service dhcp server .................................................................................................................. 277

31.2 ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip.................................................................... 277

31.3 ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id ............................................................... 278

XIII

31.4 ip dhcp server exclude-address ........................................................................................... 279

31.5 ip dhcp server pool ................................................................................................................... 279

31.6 ip dhcp server ping timeout ................................................................................................... 280

31.7 ip dhcp server ping packets ................................................................................................... 281

31.8 network ......................................................................................................................................... 281

31.9 lease ............................................................................................................................................... 282

31.10 address hardware-address .................................................................................................... 283

31.11 address client-identifier .......................................................................................................... 284

31.12 default-gateway ......................................................................................................................... 284

31.13 dns-server .................................................................................................................................... 285

31.14 netbios-name-server ............................................................................................................... 286

31.15 netbios-node-type .................................................................................................................... 286

31.16 next-server ................................................................................................................................... 287

31.17 domain-name .............................................................................................................................. 288

31.18 bootfile .......................................................................................................................................... 288

31.19 show ip dhcp server status .................................................................................................... 289

31.20 show ip dhcp server statistics............................................................................................... 289

31.21 show ip dhcp server extend-option .................................................................................... 290

31.22 show ip dhcp server pool ........................................................................................................ 290

31.23 show ip dhcp server excluded-address ............................................................................ 291

31.24 show ip dhcp server manual-binding .................................................................................. 291

31.25 show ip dhcp server binding .................................................................................................. 292

31.26 clear ip dhcp server statistics ............................................................................................... 292

31.27 clear ip dhcp server binding ................................................................................................... 293

Chapter 32 DHCP Relay Commands .......................................................................... 294

32.1 service dhcp relay ..................................................................................................................... 294

32.2 ip dhcp relay hops ..................................................................................................................... 294

32.3 ip dhcp relay time ....................................................................................................................... 295

32.4 ip helper-address....................................................................................................................... 296

32.5 ip dhcp relay information ........................................................................................................ 296

32.6 ip dhcp relay information strategy ....................................................................................... 297

32.7 ip dhcp relay information format .......................................................................................... 298

32.8 ip dhcp relay information circuit-id ...................................................................................... 299

32.9 ip dhcp relay information remote-id .................................................................................... 299

32.10 ip dhcp relay default-interface .............................................................................................. 300

32.11 ip dhcp relay vlan ....................................................................................................................... 301

32.12 show ip dhcp relay ..................................................................................................................... 301

XIV

Chapter 33 DHCP L2 Relay Commands .................................................................... 303

33.1 ip dhcp l2relay ............................................................................................................................. 303

33.2 ip dhcp l2relay vlan .................................................................................................................... 303

33.3 ip dhcp l2relay information ..................................................................................................... 304

33.4 ip dhcp l2relay information strategy ................................................................................... 304

33.5 ip dhcp l2relay information format....................................................................................... 305

33.6 ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id .................................................................................. 306

33.7 ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id ................................................................................ 307

33.8 show ip dhcp l2relay ................................................................................................................. 307

33.9 show ip dhcp l2relay interface .............................................................................................. 308

Chapter 34 QoS Commands ......................................................................................... 309

34.1 qos trust mode ........................................................................................................................... 309

34.2 qos port-priority ......................................................................................................................... 310

34.3 qos cos-map ............................................................................................................................... 310

34.4 qos dot1p-remap ....................................................................................................................... 311

34.5 qos dscp-map ............................................................................................................................. 312

34.6 qos dscp-remap ......................................................................................................................... 313

34.7 qos queue bandwidth ............................................................................................................... 314

34.8 qos queue mode ........................................................................................................................ 315

34.9 show qos cos-map .................................................................................................................... 316

34.10 show qos dot1p-remap interface ........................................................................................ 317

34.11 show qos dot1p-remap ........................................................................................................... 317

34.12 show qos dscp-map interface .............................................................................................. 318

34.13 show qos dscp-map ................................................................................................................. 319

34.14 show qos dscp-remap interface .......................................................................................... 319

34.15 show qos dscp-remap ............................................................................................................. 320

34.16 show qos port-priority interface........................................................................................... 320

34.17 show qos trust interface ......................................................................................................... 321

34.18 show qos queue interface ...................................................................................................... 321

Chapter 35 Bandwidth Control Commands ............................................................. 323

35.1 storm-control rate-mode ........................................................................................................ 323

35.2 storm-control .............................................................................................................................. 324

35.3 storm-control exceed .............................................................................................................. 325

35.4 storm-control recover ............................................................................................................. 326

35.5 bandwidth ..................................................................................................................................... 326

35.6 show storm-control .................................................................................................................. 327

XV

35.7 show bandwidth ......................................................................................................................... 328

Chapter 36 Voice VLAN Commands .......................................................................... 329

36.1 voice vlan ...................................................................................................................................... 329

36.2 voice vlan (interface) ................................................................................................................. 329

36.3 voice vlan priority ....................................................................................................................... 330

36.4 voice vlan oui ............................................................................................................................... 331

36.5 show voice vlan .......................................................................................................................... 331

36.6 show voice vlan oui-table........................................................................................................ 332

36.7 show voice vlan interface ....................................................................................................... 332

Chapter 37 Auto VoIP Commands .............................................................................. 334

37.1 auto-voip ....................................................................................................................................... 334

37.2 auto-voip (interface) ................................................................................................................. 334

37.3 auto-voip dot1p .......................................................................................................................... 335

37.4 auto-voip untagged .................................................................................................................. 336

37.5 auto-voip none ........................................................................................................................... 336

37.6 no auto-voip (interface) ........................................................................................................... 337

37.7 auto-voip dscp ............................................................................................................................ 337

37.8 auto-voip data priority .............................................................................................................. 338

37.9 show auto-voip ........................................................................................................................... 338

Chapter 38 Access Control Commands ................................................................... 340

38.1 user access-control ip-based enable ................................................................................. 340

38.2 user access-control ip-based ............................................................................................... 340

38.3 user access-control mac-based enable ............................................................................ 341

38.4 user access-control mac-based .......................................................................................... 342

38.5 user access-control port-based enable ............................................................................ 343

38.6 user access-control port-based .......................................................................................... 343

Chapter 39 HTTP and HTTPS Commands ................................................................ 345

39.1 ip http server ............................................................................................................................... 345

39.2 ip http port .................................................................................................................................... 346

39.3 ip http max-users ....................................................................................................................... 346

39.4 ip http session timeout ............................................................................................................ 347

39.5 ip http secure-server ................................................................................................................ 348

39.6 ip http secure-port .................................................................................................................... 348

39.7 ip http secure-protocol............................................................................................................ 349

39.8 ip http secure-ciphersuite ...................................................................................................... 350

XVI

39.9 ip http secure-max-users ....................................................................................................... 351

39.10 ip http secure-session timeout ............................................................................................. 352

39.11 ip http secure-server download certificate ...................................................................... 352

39.12 ip http secure-server download key ................................................................................... 353

39.13 show ip http configuration ...................................................................................................... 354

39.14 show ip http secure-server .................................................................................................... 355

Chapter 40 SSH Commands ......................................................................................... 356

40.1 ip ssh server ................................................................................................................................ 356

40.2 ip ssh port ..................................................................................................................................... 356

40.3 ip ssh version .............................................................................................................................. 357

40.4 ip ssh algorithm .......................................................................................................................... 358

40.5 ip ssh timeout .............................................................................................................................. 358

40.6 ip ssh max-client ........................................................................................................................ 359

40.7 ip ssh download .......................................................................................................................... 360

40.8 remove public-key ..................................................................................................................... 360

40.9 show ip ssh................................................................................................................................... 361

Chapter 41 Telnet Commands ..................................................................................... 362

41.1 telnet .............................................................................................................................................. 362

41.2 telnet enable ................................................................................................................................ 362

41.3 telnet port ..................................................................................................................................... 363

41.4 show telnet-status..................................................................................................................... 363

Chapter 42 Serial Port Commands ............................................................................. 365

42.1 serial_port baud-rate ................................................................................................................ 365

Chapter 43 AAA Commands ........................................................................................ 366

43.1 tacacs-server host .................................................................................................................... 366

43.2 show tacacs-server .................................................................................................................. 367

43.3 radius-server host ..................................................................................................................... 368

43.4 show radius-server ................................................................................................................... 369

43.5 aaa group ...................................................................................................................................... 370

43.6 server ............................................................................................................................................. 370

43.7 show aaa group .......................................................................................................................... 371

43.8 aaa authentication login .......................................................................................................... 372

43.9 aaa authentication enable....................................................................................................... 373

43.10 aaa authentication dot1x default .......................................................................................... 374

43.11 aaa accounting dot1x default ................................................................................................ 374

XVII

43.12 show aaa authentication ......................................................................................................... 375

43.13 show aaa accounting ................................................................................................................ 376

43.14 line telnet ...................................................................................................................................... 376

43.15 login authentication (telnet) .................................................................................................... 377

43.16 line ssh ........................................................................................................................................... 377

43.17 login authentication (ssh) ........................................................................................................ 378

43.18 line console .................................................................................................................................. 379

43.19 login authentication (console) ............................................................................................... 379

43.20 enable authentication (telnet) ................................................................................................ 380

43.21 enable authentication (ssh) .................................................................................................... 381

43.22 enable authentication (console) ........................................................................................... 381

43.23 ip http login authentication ..................................................................................................... 382

43.24 ip http enable authentication ................................................................................................. 383

43.25 show aaa global .......................................................................................................................... 384

43.26 enable admin password ........................................................................................................... 384

43.27 enable admin secret ................................................................................................................. 385

43.28 enable-admin .............................................................................................................................. 386

Chapter 44 IEEE 802.1x Commands ........................................................................... 388

44.1 dot1x system-auth-control .................................................................................................... 388

44.2 dot1x handshake ....................................................................................................................... 389

44.3 dot1x auth-protocol .................................................................................................................. 389

44.4 dot1x vlan-assignment ............................................................................................................ 390

44.5 dot1x accounting ....................................................................................................................... 391

44.6 dot1x mab .................................................................................................................................... 392

44.7 dot1x guest-vlan ........................................................................................................................ 392

44.8 dot1x timeout quiet-period .................................................................................................... 393

44.9 dot1x timeout supp-timeout .................................................................................................. 394

44.10 dot1x max- req ........................................................................................................................... 395

44.11 dot1x .............................................................................................................................................. 395

44.12 dot1x port-control ..................................................................................................................... 396

44.13 dot1x port-method .................................................................................................................... 397

44.14 dot1x auth-init ............................................................................................................................. 398

44.15 dot1x auth-reauth ...................................................................................................................... 398

44.16 show dot1x global ..................................................................................................................... 399

44.17 show dot1x interface ................................................................................................................ 400

44.18 show dot1x auth-state interface .......................................................................................... 400

XVIII

Chapter 45 Port Security Commands ........................................................................ 402

45.1 mac address-table max-mac count .................................................................................... 402

45.2 show mac address-table max-mac-count ........................................................................ 402

Chapter 46 Port Mirroring Commands ...................................................................... 404

46.1 monitor session destination interface................................................................................ 404

46.2 monitor session source ........................................................................................................... 405

46.3 show monitor session .............................................................................................................. 406

Chapter 47 ACL Commands ......................................................................................... 408

47.1 access-list create ...................................................................................................................... 408

47.2 access-list packet-content profile ...................................................................................... 408

47.3 access-list resequence ........................................................................................................... 409

47.4 access-list mac .......................................................................................................................... 410

47.5 access-list ip ............................................................................................................................... 411

47.6 access-list combined ............................................................................................................... 413

47.7 access-list ipv6 .......................................................................................................................... 415

47.8 access-list packet-content config ...................................................................................... 417

47.9 access-list action....................................................................................................................... 418

47.10 redirect .......................................................................................................................................... 419

47.11 s-condition ................................................................................................................................... 420

47.12 s-mirror.......................................................................................................................................... 421

47.13 qos-remark .................................................................................................................................. 421

47.14 access bind .................................................................................................................................. 422

47.15 show access-list ........................................................................................................................ 423

47.16 show access-list bind ............................................................................................................... 423

47.17 show access-list status ........................................................................................................... 424

47.18 show access-list counter ........................................................................................................ 424

47.19 clear access-list ......................................................................................................................... 425

Chapter 48 IPv4 IMPB Commands .............................................................................. 426

48.1 ip source binding ....................................................................................................................... 426

48.2 ip dhcp snooping ....................................................................................................................... 427

48.3 ip dhcp snooping vlan .............................................................................................................. 428

48.4 ip dhcp snooping max-entries .............................................................................................. 428

48.5 show ip source binding ............................................................................................................ 429

48.6 show ip dhcp snooping ............................................................................................................ 430

48.7 show ip dhcp snooping interface ......................................................................................... 430

XIX

Chapter 49 IPv6 IMPB Commands .............................................................................. 432

49.1 Ipv6 source binding................................................................................................................... 432

49.2 ipv6 dhcp snooping .................................................................................................................. 433

49.3 ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan ......................................................................................................... 434

49.4 ipv6 dhcp snooping max-entries .......................................................................................... 434

49.5 ipv6 nd snooping ....................................................................................................................... 435

49.6 ipv6 nd snooping vlan .............................................................................................................. 436

49.7 ipv6 nd snooping max-entries ............................................................................................... 436

49.8 show ipv6 source binding ....................................................................................................... 437

49.9 show ipv6 dhcp snooping ....................................................................................................... 438

49.10 show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface .................................................................................... 438

49.11 show ipv6 nd snooping ............................................................................................................ 439

49.12 show ipv6 nd snooping interface ......................................................................................... 439

Chapter 50 IP Verify Source Commands .................................................................. 441

50.1 ip verify source ........................................................................................................................... 441

50.2 ip verify source logging ........................................................................................................... 442

50.3 show ip verify source ................................................................................................................ 442

50.4 show ip verify source interface ............................................................................................. 443

Chapter 51 IPv6 Verify Source Commands ............................................................. 444

51.1 ipv6 verify source ...................................................................................................................... 444

51.2 show ipv6 verify source ........................................................................................................... 445

51.3 show ipv6 verify source interface ........................................................................................ 445

Chapter 52 DHCPv4 Filter Commands ...................................................................... 447

52.1 ip dhcp filter ................................................................................................................................. 447

52.2 ip dhcp filter (interface) ............................................................................................................ 447

52.3 ip dhcp filter mac-verify ........................................................................................................... 448

52.4 ip dhcp filter limit rate ............................................................................................................... 449

52.5 ip dhcp filter decline rate ......................................................................................................... 450

52.6 ip dhcp filter server permit-entry ......................................................................................... 450

52.7 show ip dhcp filter ..................................................................................................................... 451

52.8 show ip dhcp filter interface ................................................................................................... 452

52.9 show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry .............................................................................. 452

Chapter 53 DHCPv6 Filter Commands ...................................................................... 454

53.1 ipv6 dhcp filter ............................................................................................................................ 454

53.2 ipv6 dhcp filter (interface) ....................................................................................................... 454

XX

53.3 ipv6 dhcp filter limit rate .......................................................................................................... 455

53.4 ipv6 dhcp filter decline rate .................................................................................................... 456

53.5 ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry .................................................................................... 457

53.6 show ipv6 dhcp filter................................................................................................................. 458

53.7 show ipv6 dhcp filter interface .............................................................................................. 458

53.8 show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry .............................................................................. 459

Chapter 54 DoS Defend Commands .......................................................................... 460

54.1 ip dos-prevent ............................................................................................................................ 460

54.2 ip dos-prevent type................................................................................................................... 460

54.3 show ip dos-prevent ................................................................................................................. 462

Chapter 55 sFlow Commands (Only for Certain Devices) .................................... 464

55.1 sflow address .............................................................................................................................. 464

55.2 sflow enable ................................................................................................................................. 465

55.3 sflow collector collector-ID .................................................................................................... 465

55.4 sflow sampler .............................................................................................................................. 466

55.5 show sflow global ...................................................................................................................... 467

55.6 show sflow collector ................................................................................................................. 468

55.7 show sflow sampler .................................................................................................................. 468

Chapter 56 Ethernet OAM Commands (Only for Certain Devices) .................... 469

56.1 ethernet-oam .............................................................................................................................. 469

56.2 ethernet-oam mode .................................................................................................................. 470

56.3 ethernet-oam link-monitor symbol-period ....................................................................... 470

56.4 ethernet-oam link-monitor frame ........................................................................................ 471

56.5 ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-period .......................................................................... 472

56.6 ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-seconds...................................................................... 473

56.7 ethernet-oam remote-failure ................................................................................................. 474

56.8 ethernet-oam remote-loopback received-remote- loopback ................................... 475

56.9 ethernet-oam remote-loopback .......................................................................................... 476

56.10 clear ethernet-oam statistics ................................................................................................ 477

56.11 clear ethernet-oam event-log ............................................................................................... 478

56.12 show ethernet-oam configuration ....................................................................................... 478

56.13 show ethernet-oam event-log .............................................................................................. 479

56.14 show ethernet-oam statistics ............................................................................................... 480

56.15 show ethernet-oam status ..................................................................................................... 480

XXI

Chapter 57 DLDP Commands (Only for Certain Devices) .................................... 482

57.1 dldp (global) ................................................................................................................................. 482

57.2 dldp interval ................................................................................................................................. 482

57.3 dldp shut-mode .......................................................................................................................... 483

57.4 dldp reset (global) ...................................................................................................................... 484

57.5 dldp(interface) ............................................................................................................................. 484

57.6 dldp reset (interface) ................................................................................................................ 485

57.7 show dldp ..................................................................................................................................... 485

57.8 show dldp interface................................................................................................................... 486

Chapter 58 SNMP Commands ..................................................................................... 487

58.1 snmp-server ................................................................................................................................ 487

58.2 snmp-server view ...................................................................................................................... 487

58.3 snmp-server group ................................................................................................................... 488

58.4 snmp-server user ...................................................................................................................... 490

58.5 snmp-server community ......................................................................................................... 491

58.6 snmp-server host ...................................................................................................................... 492

58.7 snmp-server engineID ............................................................................................................. 494

58.8 snmp-server traps snmp ......................................................................................................... 495

58.9 snmp-server traps ..................................................................................................................... 496

58.10 snmp-server traps ddm ........................................................................................................... 497

58.11 snmp-server traps vlan ............................................................................................................ 498

58.12 snmp-server traps security .................................................................................................... 499

58.13 snmp-server traps acl .............................................................................................................. 500

58.14 snmp-server traps ip ................................................................................................................ 500

58.15 snmp-server traps power (Only for Certain Devices) .................................................... 501

58.16 snmp-server traps link-status ............................................................................................... 502

58.17 rmon history ................................................................................................................................ 503

58.18 rmon event ................................................................................................................................... 504

58.19 rmon alarm ................................................................................................................................... 505

58.20 rmon statistics ............................................................................................................................ 506

58.21 show snmp-server..................................................................................................................... 507

58.22 show snmp-server view ........................................................................................................... 508

58.23 show snmp-server group ........................................................................................................ 508

58.24 show snmp-server user ........................................................................................................... 509

58.25 show snmp-server community ............................................................................................. 509

58.26 show snmp-server host ........................................................................................................... 509

58.27 show snmp-server engineID .................................................................................................. 510

XXII

58.28 show rmon history ..................................................................................................................... 510

58.29 show rmon event ....................................................................................................................... 511

58.30 show rmon alarm ........................................................................................................................ 512

58.31 show rmon statistics ................................................................................................................ 512

Chapter 59 PoE Commands (Only for Certain Devices) ....................................... 514

59.1 power inline consumption (global) ....................................................................................... 514

59.2 power profile ............................................................................................................................... 514

59.3 power inline consumption (interface) ................................................................................. 515

59.4 power inline priority ................................................................................................................... 516

59.5 power inline supply .................................................................................................................... 517

59.6 power inline profile .................................................................................................................... 517

59.7 power inline time-range ........................................................................................................... 518

59.8 show power inline ...................................................................................................................... 519

59.9 show power inline configuration interface ........................................................................ 519

59.10 show power inline information interface ........................................................................... 520

59.11 show power profile .................................................................................................................... 520

Chapter 60 ARP Inspection Commands .................................................................... 522

60.1 ip arp inspection ......................................................................................................................... 522

60.2 ip arp inspection validate ........................................................................................................ 522

60.3 ip arp inspection vlan ................................................................................................................ 523

60.4 ip arp inspection vlan logging ................................................................................................ 524

60.5 ip arp inspection trust .............................................................................................................. 525

60.6 ip arp inspection limit-rate ...................................................................................................... 525

60.7 ip arp inspection burst-interval ............................................................................................. 526

60.8 ip arp inspection recover ........................................................................................................ 527

60.9 show ip arp inspection ............................................................................................................. 527

60.10 show ip arp inspection interface .......................................................................................... 528

60.11 show ip arp inspection vlan .................................................................................................... 529

60.12 show ip arp inspection statistics .......................................................................................... 529

60.13 clear ip arp inspection statistics ........................................................................................... 530

Chapter 61 ND Detection Commands ....................................................................... 531

61.1 ipv6 nd detection ....................................................................................................................... 531

61.2 ipv6 nd detection vlan .............................................................................................................. 531

61.3 ipv6 nd detection vlan logging .............................................................................................. 532

61.4 ipv6 nd detection trust ............................................................................................................. 532

61.5 show ipv6 nd detection ........................................................................................................... 533

XXIII

61.6 show ipv6 nd detection interface ......................................................................................... 533

61.7 show ipv6 nd detection statistics ........................................................................................ 534

61.8 show ipv6 nd detection vlan .................................................................................................. 535

Chapter 62 System Log Commands .......................................................................... 536

62.1 logging buffer .............................................................................................................................. 536

62.2 logging buffer level .................................................................................................................... 536

62.3 logging file flash ......................................................................................................................... 537

62.4 logging file flash frequency .................................................................................................... 538

62.5 logging file flash level ............................................................................................................... 539

62.6 logging host index ..................................................................................................................... 539

62.7 logging console .......................................................................................................................... 540

62.8 logging console level ................................................................................................................ 541

62.9 logging monitor .......................................................................................................................... 542

62.10 logging monitor level ................................................................................................................ 542

62.11 clear logging ................................................................................................................................ 543

62.12 show logging local-config....................................................................................................... 544

62.13 show logging loghost ............................................................................................................... 544

62.14 show logging buffer .................................................................................................................. 545

62.15 show logging flash ..................................................................................................................... 545

1

Preface

This Guide is intended for network administrator to provide referenced information about CLI (Command Line Interface). The device mentioned in this Guide stands for JetStream Switch without any explanation. Some models featured in this guide may be unavailable in your country or region. For local sales information, visit https://www.tp-link.com.

Overview of this Guide Chapter 1: Using the CLI

Provide information about how to use the CLI, CLI Command Modes, Security Levels and some Conventions.

Chapter 2: Line Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Provide information about the commands used to make related configurations for the desired users and set the priority of the console media type.

Chapter 3: User Interface

Provide information about the commands used to switch between five CLI Command Modes.

Chapter 4: User Management Commands

Provide information about the commands used for user management.

Chapter 5: System Configuration Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the System information and System IP, reboot and reset the switch, upgrade the switch system and commands used for cable test.

Chapter 6: EEE Configuration Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring EEE.

Chapter 7: SDM Template Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the SDM templates.

Chapter 8: Time Range Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the time range.

Chapter 9: Port Configuration Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Speed, Negotiation Mode, and Flow Control for Ethernet ports.

Chapter 10: Port Isolation Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring Port Isolation function.

2

Chapter 11: Loopback Detection Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Loopback Detection function.

Chapter 12: DDM Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Provide information about the commands used for DDM (Digital Diagnostic Monitoring) function.

Chapter 13: Etherchannel Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring LAG (Link Aggregation Group) and LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol).

Chapter 14: MAC Address Commands

Provide information about the commands used for Address configuration.

Chapter 15: IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring IEEE 802.1Q VLAN.

Chapter 16: MAC-based VLAN Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring MAC-based VLAN.

Chapter 17: Protocol-based VLAN Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring Protocol VLAN.

Chapter 18: Private VLAN Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Provide information about the commands used for configuring Private VLAN.

Chapter 19: VLAN-VPN Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Provide information about the commands used for configuring VLAN-VPN (Virtual Private Network) function.

Chapter 20: GVRP Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring GVRP (GARP VLAN registration protocol).

Chapter 21: IGMP Snooping Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the IGMP Snooping (Internet Group Management Protocol Snooping).

Chapter 22: MLD Snooping Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the MLD Snooping (Multicast Listener Discovery Snooping).

Chapter 23: MVR Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the MVR.

3

Chapter 24: MSTP Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol).

Chapter 25: LLDP Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring LLDP function.

Chapter 26: L2PT Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Provide information about the commands used for configuring L2PT (Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling).

Chapter 27: PPPoE ID-Insertion Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Provide information about the commands used for configuring PPPoE ID-Insertion.

Chapter 28: Static Routes Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Static Route function.

Chapter 29: IPv6 Address Configuration Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the System IPv6 addresses.

Chapter 30: ARP Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) functions.

Chapter 31: DHCP Server Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DHCP Server function.

Chapter 32: DHCP Relay Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DHCP Relay function.

Chapter 33: DHCP L2 Relay Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DHCP L2 Relay function.

Chapter 34: QoS Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the QoS function.

Chapter 35: Bandwidth Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Bandwidth Control.

Chapter 36: Voice VLAN Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring Voice VLAN.

Chapter 37 Auto VoIP Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring Auto VoIP.

Chapter 38: Access Control Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring Access Control.

4

Chapter 39: HTTP and HTTPS Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the HTTP and HTTPS logon.

Chapter 40: SSH Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring and managing SSH (Security Shell).

Chapter 41: Telnet Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring and managing SSH (Security Shell).

Chapter 42: Serial Port Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Provide information about the commands used for configuring and managing SSH (Security Shell).

Chapter 43: AAA Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring AAA (authentication, authorization and accounting).

Chapter 44: IEEE 802.1X Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring IEEE 802.1X function.

Chapter 45: Port Security Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring Port Security.

Chapter 46: Port Mirroring Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Port Mirror function.

Chapter 47: ACL Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the ACL (Access Control List).

Chapter 48: IPv4 IMPB Commands

Provide information about the commands used for binding the IP address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host together.

Chapter 49: IPv6 IMPB Commands

Provide information about the commands used for binding the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host together.

Chapter 50: IP Verify Source Commands

Provide information about the commands used for guarding the IP Source by filtering the IP packets based on the IP-MAC Binding entries.

Chapter 51: IPv6 Verify Source Commands

Provide information about the commands used for guarding the IPv6 Source by filtering the IP packets based on the IP-MAC Binding entries.

5

Chapter 52: DHCPv4 Filter Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DHCPv4 Filter.

Chapter 53: DHCPv6 Filter Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DHCPv6 Filter.

Chapter 54: DoS Defend Command

Provide information about the commands used for DoS defend and detecting the DoS attack.

Chapter 55: sFlow Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Sampled Flow function.

Chapter 56: Ethernet OAM Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Ethernet OAM (Operation, Administration, and Maintenance) function.

Chapter 57: DLDP Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DLDP (Device Link Detection Protocol).

Chapter 58: SNMP Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) functions.

Chapter 59: PoE Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Provide information about the commands used for configuring PoE function.

Chapter 60: ARP Inspection Commands

Provide information about the commands used for protecting the switch from the ARP cheating or ARP Attack.

Chapter 61: ND Detection Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring ND detection.

Chapter 62: System Log Commands

Provide information about the commands used for configuring system log.

6

Chapter 1 Using the CLI

1.1 Accessing the CLI

You can log on to the switch and access the CLI by the following three methods:

1. Log on to the switch by the console port on the switch.

2. Log on to the switch remotely by a Telnet connection through an Ethernet port.

3. Log on to the switch remotely by an SSH connection through an Ethernet port.

1.1.1 Logon by a console port

Note: Console port is only available on certain devices.

Console Port The switch has two console ports: an RJ-45 console port and a Micro-USB console port. Console output is active on devices connected to both console ports, but console input is only active on one console port at a time.

The Micro-USB connector takes precedence over the RJ-45 connector. When the switch detects a valid connection on the Micro-USB console port, input from the RJ-45 console port is immediately disabled, and input from the Micro-USB console port is enabled. Removing the Micro-USB connection immediately reenables input from the RJ-45 console connection.

USB Console Driver

If you are using the USB port on the MAC OS X or Linux OS for console connection, there is no need to run a USB driver.

If you are using the switchs Micro-USB console port with the USB port of a Windows PC, a driver for the USB port is required. The USB driver is provided on the resource CD. Follow the InstallSheild Wizard to accomplish the installation.

The TP-Link USB Console Driver supports the following Windows operating systems:

32-bit Windows XP SP3

64-bit Windows XP

32-bit Windows Vista

64-bit Windows Vista

32-bit Windows 7

7

64-bit Windows 7

32-bit Windows 8

64-bit Windows 8

32-bit Windows 8.1

64-bit Windows 8.1

After the TP-Link USB Console Driver is installed, the PCs USB port will act as RS-232 serial port when the PCs USB port is connected to the switchs Micro-USB console port. And the PCs USB port will act as standard USB port when the PCs USB port is unplugged from the switch.

Logon

Take the following steps to log on to the switch by the console port.

1. Connect the PCs or Terminals to the console port on the switch by the provided cable.

2. Start the terminal emulation program (such as the HyperTerminal) on the PC.

3. Specify the connection COM port in the terminal emulation program. If the Micro-USB Console port is used, you can view which port is assigned to the USB serial port in the following path:

Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Device Manager -> Ports ->USB Serial Port. Figure 1-1 USB Serial Port Number

4. Configure the terminal emulation program or the terminal to use the following settings:

8

Baud rate: 38400 bps

Data bits: 8

Parity: none

Stop bits: 1

Flow control: none

5. Type the Username and Password in the Hyper Terminal window. The default value for both of them are admin. Press Enter in the main window and Switch> will appear indicating that you have successfully logged in to the switch and you can use the CLI now.

Figure 1-2 Log in to the Switch

Note: The first time you log in, change the password to better protect your network and

devices.

1.1.2 Logon by Telnet

To log on to the switch by a Telnet connection, please take the following steps:

1. Click Start and type in cmd in the Search programs and files window and press the Enter button.

9

Figure 1-1 Run Window

2. Type in telnet 192.168.0.1 in the cmd window and press Enter.

Figure 1-2 Type in the telnet command

3. Type in the login username and password (both admin by default). Press Enter and you will enter User EXEC Mode.

Figure 1-2 Log in the Switch

Note: The first time you log in, change the password to better protect your network and

devices.

10

4. Type in enable command and you will enter Privileged EXEC Mode. By default, no password is needed. Later you can set a password for users who want to access the Privileged EXEC Mode.

Figure 1-3 Enter into Priviledged EXEC Mode

1.1.3 Logon by SSH

To log on by SSH, a Putty client software is recommended. There are two authentication modes to set up an SSH connection:

Password Authentication Mode:It requires username and password, which are both admin by default.

Key Authentication Mode:It requires a public key for the switch and a private key for the SSH client software. You can generate the public key and the private key through Putty Key Generator.

Note:

1. Before SSH login, please follow the steps shown in Figure 1-7 to enable the SSH function through Telnet connection.

2. The first time you log in, change the password to better protect your network and devices.

Figure 1-4 Enable SSH function

11

Password Authentication Mode

1. Open the software to log on to the interface of PuTTY. Enter the IP address of the switch into Host Name field; keep the default value 22 in the Port field; select SSH as the Connection type.

Figure 1-5 SSH Connection Config

2. Click the Open button in the above figure to log on to the switch. Enter the login user name and password to log on the switch, and then enter enable to enter Privileged EXEC Mode, so you can continue to configure the switch.

Figure 1-6 Log on the Switch

12

Key Authentication Mode

2. Select the key type and key length, and generate SSH key.

Figure 1-7 Generate SSH Key

Note:

1. The key length is in the range of 512 to 3072 bits. 2. During the key generation, randomly moving the mouse quickly can accelerate the key

generation.

13

3. After the key is successfully generated, please save the public key and private key to a TFTP server.

Figure 1-8 Save the Generated Key

4. Log on to the switch by Telnet and download the public key file from the TFTP server to the switch, as the following figure shows:

Figure 1-9 Download the Public Key

14

Note:

1. The key type should accord with the type of the key file. 2. The SSH key downloading can not be interrupted.

5. After the public key is downloaded, please log on to the interface of PuTTY and enter the IP address for login.

Figure 1-10 SSH Connection Config

15

6. Click Browse to download the private key file to SSH client software and click Open.

Figure 1-11 Download the Private Key

7. After successful authentication, please enter the login user name. If you log on to the switch without entering password, it indicates that the key has been successfully downloaded.

Figure 1-12 Log on the Switch

1.2 CLI Command Modes

The CLI is divided into different command modes: User EXEC Mode, Privileged EXEC Mode, Global Configuration Mode, Interface Configuration Mode and VLAN Configuration Mode.

16

Interface Configuration Mode can also be divided into Interface Ethernet, Interface link-aggregation and some other modes, which is shown as the following diagram.

The following table gives detailed information about the Accessing path, Prompt of each mode and how to exit the current mode and access the next mode.

Mode Accessing Path Prompt Logout or Access the next

mode

User EXEC Mode

Primary mode once it

is connected with the

switch.

Switch>

Use the exit command to

disconnect the switch.

Use the enable command to

access Privileged EXEC mode.

Privileged EXEC Mode

Use the enable

command to enter

this mode from User

EXEC mode.

Switch#

Enter the disable or the exit

command to return to User EXEC

mode.

Enter configure command to

access Global Configuration

mode.

Global Configuration Mode

Use the configure

command to enter

this mode from

Privileged EXEC

mode.

Switch(config)#

Use the exit or the end

command or press Ctrl+Z to

return to Privileged EXEC mode.

Use the interface

gigabitEthernet port or

interface range gigabitEthernet

port-list command to access

interface Configuration mode.

Use the vlan vlan-list to access

VLAN Configuration mode.

Interface Configuration Mode

Layer 2 Interface:

Use the interface

gigabitEthernet port, interface

port-channel

port-channel-id or

interface range

gigabitEthernet

port-list command to

enter this mode from

Global Configuration

mode.

Switch(config-if)#

or

Switch(config-if-range)#

Use the end command or press Ctrl+Z to return to Privileged EXEC mode.

Enter the exit orthe # command to return to Global Configuration mode.

A port number must be specified

in the interface command.

17

Mode Accessing Path Prompt Logout or Access the next

mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Layer 3 Interface:

Use the no switchport command to enter Routed Port mode from Interface Configuration mode.

Use the interface vlan vlan-id command to enter VLAN Interface mode from Global Configuration mode.

Use the interface

loopback id command to enter

Loopback Interface

mode from Global

Configuration mode.

Switch (config-if)#

or

Switch(config-if-range)#

Use the switchport command to switch to the Layer 2 interface mode.

Use the end command or press Ctrl+Z to return to Privileged EXEC mode.

Enter the exit orthe # command

to return to Global Configuration

mode.

VLAN Configuration Mode

Use the vlan vlan-list command to enter

this mode from

Global Configuration

mode.

Switch (config-vlan)#

Use the end command or press

Ctrl+Z to return to Privileged

EXEC mode.

Enter the exit command or the #

command to return to Global

configuration mode.

Note:

1. The user is automatically in User EXEC Mode after the connection between the PC and the switch is established by a Telnet/SSH connection.

2. Each command mode has its own set of specific commands. To configure some commands, you should access the corresponding command mode firstly.

Global Configuration Mode: In this mode, global commands are provided, such as the Spanning Tree, Schedule Mode and so on.

Interface Configuration Mode: In this mode, users can configure one or several ports, different ports corresponds to different commands

a). Interface gigabitEthernet: Configure parameters for an Ethernet port, such as

18

Duplex-mode, flow control status.

b). Interface range gigabitEthernet: Configure parameters for several Ethernet ports.

c). Interface link-aggregation: Configure parameters for a link-aggregation, such as broadcast storm.

d). Interface range link-aggregation: Configure parameters for multi-trunks.

e). Interface vlan: Configure parameters for the vlan-port.

VLAN Configuration Mode: In this mode, users can create a VLAN and add a specified port to the VLAN.

3. Some commands are global, that means they can be performed in all modes:

show: Display all information of switch, for example: statistic information, port information, VLAN information.

history: Display the commands history.

1.3 Privilege Restrictions

This switchs security is divided into four privilege levels: User level, Power User level, Operator level and Admin level. You can define username and password pairs, and assign a specific privilege level to each pair. Different privilege levels have access to specified commands, which is illustrated in the Privilege Requirement in each command. For details about how to configure usename and password pairs, please refer to user name (password) and user name (secret).

Users can enter Privileged EXEC mode from User EXEC mode by using the enable command. In default case, no password is needed. In Global Configuration Mode, you can configure password for Admin level by enable password command. Once password is configured, you are required to enter it to access Privileged EXEC mode.

1.4 Conventions

1.4.1 PoE Disclaimer

PoE budget calculations are based on laboratory testing. Actual PoE power budget is not guaranteed and will vary as a result of client limitations and environmental factors.

19

1.4.2 Format Conventions

The following conventions are used in this Guide:

Items in square brackets [ ] are optional

Items in braces { } are required

Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. For example: speed {10 | 100 | 1000}

Bold indicates an unalterable keyword. For example: show logging

Normal Font indicates a constant (several options are enumerated and only one can be selected). For example: mode {dynamic | static | permanent}

Italic Font indicates a variable (an actual value must be assigned). For example: bridge aging-time aging-time

1.4.3 Special Characters

You should pay attentions to the description below if the variable is a character string:

These six characters < > , \ & cannot be input.

If a blank is contained in a character string, single or double quotation marks should be used, for example hello world, hello world, and the words in the quotation marks will be identified as a string. Otherwise, the words will be identified as several strings.

1.4.4 Parameter Format

Some parameters must be entered in special formats which are shown as follows:

MAC address must be enter in the format of xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.

One or several values can be typed for a port-list or a vlan-list using comma to separate. Use a hyphen to designate a range of values, for instance, 1/0/1, 1/0/3-5, 1/0/7 indicates choosing port 1/0/1, 1/0/3, 1/0/4, 1/0/5, 1/0/7.

20

Chapter 2 Line Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Note: Line Commands are only available on certain devices.

2.1 line Description

The line command is used to enter the Line Configuration Mode and make related configurations for the desired user(s).

Syntax

line { console linenum | vty startlinenum endlinenum }

Parameter

linenum The number of users allowed to login through console port. Its value is 0 in general, for the reason that console input is only active on one console port at a time.

startlinenum The start serial number of the login user selected to configure the login mode and password, ranging from 0 to 15. 0 means the first login user number, 1 means the second, and the rest can be done on the same manner.

endlinenum The end serial number of the login user selected to configure the login mode and password, ranging from 0 to 15. 0 means the first login user number, 1 means the second, and the rest can be done on the same manner.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enter the Console port configuration mode and configure the console port 0:

T2600G-28TS(config)#line console 0

21

Enter the Virtual Terminal configuration mode so as to prepare further configurations such as password and login mode for virtual terminal 0 to 5:

T2600G-28TS(config)#line vty 0 5

2.2 media-type rj45 Description

The media-type rj45 command is used to configure the console media type as RJ-45 for input. The switch has two console ports available an RJ-45 console port and a micro-USB console port. Console input is active on only one console port at a time. By default, the micro-USB connector takes precedence over the RJ-45 connector, which means that, when both the RJ-45 console connection and micro-USB console connection are valid, input from the RJ-45 console is disabled, and input from the micro-USB console is enabled. To return to the default configuration, please use no media-type rj45 command.

Syntax

media-type rj45

no media-type rj45

Command Mode

Line Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the RJ-45 console input:

T2600G-28TS(config)# line console 0

T2600G-28TS(config-line)# media-type rj45

Receive the micro-USB console input prior to the RJ-45 console input:

T2600G-28TS(config)# line console 0

T2600G-28TS(config-line)# no media-type rj45

22

Chapter 3 User Interface

3.1 enable Description

The enable command is used to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode.

Syntax

enable

Command Mode

User EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

If you have set the password to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode:

Switch>enable Enter password:

Switch#

3.2 service password-encryption Description

The service password-encryption command is used to encrypt the password when the password is defined or when the configuration is written, using the symmetric encryption algorithm. Encryption prevents the password from being readable in the configuration file. To disable the global encryption function, please use no service password-encryption command.

Syntax

service password-encryption no service password-encryption

23

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the global encryption function:

Switch(config)# service password-encryption

3.3 enable password Description

The enable password command is used to set or change the password for users to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode. To remove the password, please use no enable password command. This command uses the symmetric encryption.

Syntax

enable password { [ 0 ] password | 7 encrypted-password} no enable password

Parameter

0 Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0.

password A string with 31 characters at most, which can contain only English letters (case-sensitive), digits and 17 kinds of special characters. The special characters are !$%()*,-./[]_{|}. By default, it is empty.

7 Indicates a symmetric encrypted password with fixed length will follow.

encrypted-password A symmetric encrypted password with fixed length, which you can copy from another switchs configuration file. After the encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

24

User Guidelines If the password you configured here is unencrypted and the global encryption function is enabled in service password-encryption, the password in the configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric encrypted form.

If both the enable password and enable secret are defined, only the latest configured password will take effect.

Example

Set the super password as admin and unencrypted to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode:

Switch(config)#enable password 0 admin

3.4 enable secret Description

The enable secret command is used to set a secret password, which is using an MD5 encryption algorithm, for users to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode. To return to the default configuration, please use no enable secret command. This command uses the MD5 encryption.

Syntax

enable secret { [ 0 ] password | 5 encrypted-password} no enable secret

Parameter

0 Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0.

password A string with 31 characters at most, which can contain only English letters (case-sensitive), digits and 17 kinds of special characters. The special characters are !$%()*,-./[]_{|}. By default, it is empty. The password in the configuration file will be displayed in the MD5 encrypted form.

5 Indicates an MD5 encrypted password with fixed length will follow.

encrypted-password An MD5 encrypted password with fixed length, which you can copy from another switchs configuration file. After the encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode.

25

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines If both the enable password and enable secret are defined, only the latest configured password will take effect.

Example

Set the secret password as admin and unencrypted to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode. The password will be displayed in the encrypted form.

Switch(config)#enable secret 0admin

3.5 configure Description

The configure command is used to access Global Configuration Mode from Privileged EXEC Mode.

Syntax

configure

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Access Global Configuration Mode from Privileged EXEC Mode: Switch# configure Switch (config)#

26

3.6 exit Description

The exit command is used to return to the previous Mode from the current Mode.

Syntax

exit

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Return to Global Configuration Mode from Interface Configuration Mode, and then return to Privileged EXEC Mode: Switch (config-if)# exit Switch (config)#exit Switch#

3.7 end Description

The end command is used to return to Privileged EXEC Mode.

Syntax

end

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Return to Privileged EXEC Mode from Interface Configuration Mode: Switch (config-if)#end Switch #

27

3.8 clipaging Description

The clipaging command is used to enable the pause function for the screen display. If you want to display all the related information of the switch at once when using the show command, please use no clipaging command.

Syntax

clipaging no clipaging

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Disable the pause function for the screen display: Switch (config)#no clipaging

3.9 history Description

The history command is used to show the latest 20 commands you entered in the current mode since the switch is powered.

Syntax

history

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Show the commands you have entered in the current mode:

Switch (config)# history

1 history

28

3.10 history clear Description

The history clear command is used to clear the commands you have entered in the current mode; therefore, these commands will not be shown next time you use the history command.

Syntax

history clear

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Clear the commands you have entered in the current mode:

Switch (config)#history clear

29

Chapter 4 User Management Commands

User Management commands are used to manage the users logging information by Web, Telnet or SSH, so as to protect the settings of the switch from being randomly changed.

4.1 user name (password) Description

The user name command is used to add a new user or modify the existed users information. To delete the existed users, please use no user name command. This command uses the symmetric encryption.

Syntax

user name name [ privilege admin | operator | power_user | user ] password { [ 0 ] password | 7 encrypted-password}

no user name name

Parameter

name Type a name for users' login. It contains 16 characters at most, composed of digits, English letters and symbols. No spaces, question marks and double quotation marks are allowed.

admin | operator | power_user | user Access level. admin means that you can edit, modify and view all the settings of different functions. operator means that you can edit, modify and view most of the settings of different functions. power-user means that you can edit, modify and view some of the settings of different functions. user means that you can only view some of the settings of different functions without the right to edit or modify. It is admin by default. For more details about privilege restrictions, please refer to the Privilege Requirement part in each command.

0 Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0.

password Users login password, a string with 631 alphanumeric characters (case-sensitive) and symbols. No spaces are allowed.

7 Indicates a symmetric encrypted password with fixed length will follow.

encrypted-password A symmetric encrypted password with fixed length, which you can copy from another switchs configuration file. After the

30

encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines If the password you configured here is unencrypted and the global encryption function is enabled in service password-encryption, the password in the configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric encrypted form.

If both the user name (password) and user name (secret) are defined, only the latest configured password will take effect.

Example

Add and enable a new admin user named tplink, of which the password is admin and unencrypted:

Switch(config)#user name tplink privilege admin password 0 admin

4.2 user name (secret) Description

The user name command is used to add a new user or modify the existed users information. To delete the existed users, please use no user name command. This command uses the MD5 encryption.

Syntax

user name name [ privilege admin | operator | power_user | user ] secret { [ 0 ] password | 5 encrypted-password}

no user name name

Parameter

name Type a name for users' login. It contains 16 characters at most, composed of digits, English letters and symbols. No spaces, question marks and double quotation marks are allowed.

admin | operator | power_user | user Access level. admin means that you can edit, modify and view all the settings of different functions. operator

31

means that you can edit, modify and view most of the settings of different functions. power-user means that you can edit, modify and view some of the settings of different functions. user means that you can only view some of the settings of different functions without the right to edit or modify. It is admin by default.

0 Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0.

password Users login password, a string with 631 alphanumeric characters (case-sensitive) and symbols. No spaces are allowed.

5 Indicates an MD5 encrypted password with fixed length will follow.

encrypted-password An MD5 encrypted password with fixed length, which you can copy from another switchs configuration file.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines If both the user name (password) and user name (secret) are defined, only the latest configured password will take effect.

Example

Add and enable a new admin user named tplink, of which the password is admin. The password will be displayed in the encrypted form.

Switch (config)#user name tplink privilege admin secret 0 admin

4.3 service password-recovery

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description

The service password-recovery command is used to enable the password-recovery feature. To disable the password-recovery feature, please use no service password-recovery command.

With password-recovery enabled, you can connect to the switchs console port and delete all your previous set accounts. You can use the default

32

username and password (which are both admin) to login the switch after its startup.

Syntax

service password-recovery

no service password-recovery

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the switchs password-recovery feature:

T2600G-28TS(config)# service password-recovery

4.4 show user account-list Description

The show user account-list command is used to display the information of the current users.

Syntax

show user account-list

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Display the information of the current users:

Switch (config)# show user account-list

33

4.5 show user configuration Description

The show user configuration command is used to display the security configuration information of the users, including access-control, max-number and the idle-timeout, etc.

Syntax

show user configuration

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the security configuration information of the users:

Switch (config)# show user configuration

34

Chapter 5 System Configuration Commands

System Commands can be used to configure the System information and System IP, reboot and reset the switch, upgrade the switch system and other operations.

5.1 system-time manual Description

The system-time manual command is used to configure the system time manually.

Syntax system-time manual time

Parameter time Set the date and time manually, MM/DD/YYYY-HH:MM:SS. The valid value of the year ranges from 2000 to 2037.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the system mode as manual, and the time is 12/20/2010 17:30:35

Switch (config)# system-time manual 12/20/2010-17:30:35

5.2 system-time ntp Description

The system-time ntp command is used to configure the time zone and the IP address for the NTP Server. The switch will get UTC automatically if it has connected to an NTP Server.

Syntax system-time ntp { timezone } { ntp-server } { backup-ntp-server } { fetching-rate }

Parameter timezone Your local time-zone, and it ranges from UTC-12:00 to UTC+13:00.

35

The detailed information that each time-zone means are displayed as follow: UTC-12:00 TimeZone for International Date Line West. UTC-11:00 TimeZone for Coordinated Universal Time-11. UTC-10:00 TimeZone for Hawaii. UTC-09:00 TimeZone for Alaska. UTC-08:00 TimeZone for Pacific Time(US Canada). UTC-07:00 TimeZone for Mountain Time(US Canada). UTC-06:00 TimeZone for Central Time(US Canada). UTC-05:00 TimeZone for Eastern Time(US Canada). UTC-04:30 TimeZone for Caracas. UTC-04:00 TimeZone for Atlantic Time(Canada). UTC-03:30 TimeZone for Newfoundland. UTC-03:00 TimeZone for Buenos Aires, Salvador, Brasilia. UTC-02:00 TimeZone for Mid-Atlantic. UTC-01:00 TimeZone for Azores, Cape Verde Is. UTC TimeZone for Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London. UTC+01:00 TimeZone for Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern, Rome, Stockholm,

Vienna. UTC+02:00 TimeZone for Cairo, Athens, Bucharest, Amman, Beirut,

Jerusalem. UTC+03:00 TimeZone for Kuwait, Riyadh, Baghdad. UTC+03:30 TimeZone for Tehran. UTC+04:00 TimeZone for Moscow, St.Petersburg, Volgograd, Tbilisi,

Port Louis. UTC+04:30 TimeZone for Kabul. UTC+05:00 TimeZone for Islamabad, Karachi, Tashkent. UTC+05:30 TimeZone for Chennai, Kolkata, Mumbai, New Delhi. UTC+05:45 TimeZone for Kathmandu. UTC+06:00 TimeZone for Dhaka,Astana, Ekaterinburg. UTC+06:30 TimeZone for Yangon (Rangoon). UTC+07:00 TimeZone for Novosibrisk, Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta. UTC+08:00 TimeZone for Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi,

Singapore. UTC+09:00 TimeZone for Seoul, Irkutsk, Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo. UTC+09:30 TimeZone for Darwin, Adelaide. UTC+10:00 TimeZone for Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney, Brisbane. UTC+11:00 TimeZone for Solomon Is., New Caledonia, Vladivostok. UTC+12:00 TimeZone for Fiji, Magadan, Auckland, Welington. UTC+13:00 TimeZone for Nuku'alofa, Samoa.

ntp-server The IP address for the Primary NTP Server.

36

backup-ntp-server The IP address for the Secondary NTP Server. fetching-rate Specify the rate fetching time from NTP server.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the system time mode as NTP, the time zone is UTC-12:00, the primary NTP server is 133.100.9.2 and the secondary NTP server is 139.78.100.163, the fetching-rate is 11 hours:

Switch(config)# system-time ntp UTC-12:00 133.100.9.2 139.79.100.163 11

5.3 system-time dst predefined Description

The system-time dst predefined command is used to select a daylight saving time configuration from the predefined mode. The configuration can be used recurrently. To disable DST function, please use no system-time dst command.

Syntax system-time dst predefined [ USA | Australia | Europe | New-Zealand ]

no system-time dst

Parameter USA | Australia | Europe | New-Zealand The mode of daylight saving time. There are 4 options which are USA, Australia, Europe and New-Zealand respectively. The default value is Europe.

Following are the time ranges of each option:

USA Second Sunday in March, 02:00 First Sunday in November, 02:00. Australia First Sunday in October, 02:00 First Sunday in April, 03:00. Europe Last Sunday in March, 01:00 Last Sunday in October, 01:00. New Zealand Last Sunday in September, 02:00 First Sunday in April, 03:00.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

37

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the daylight saving time as USA standard:

Switch(config)#system-time dst predefined USA

5.4 system-time dst date Description

The system-time dst date command is used to configure the one-off daylight saving time. The start date is in the current year by default. The time range of the daylight saving time must shorter than one year, but you can configure it spanning years. To disable DST function, please use no system-time dst command.

Syntax system-time dst date {smonth } {sday } {stime } {syear } {emonth } {eday } {etime } {eyear }[offset ]

no system-time dst

Parameter smonth The start month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values showing as follows: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec.

sday The start day of the daylight saving time, ranging from 1 to 31. Here you should show special attention to February and the differences between a solar month and a lunar month.

stime The start moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM.

syear The start year of the daylight saving time.

emonth The end month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values showing as follows: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec.

eday The end day of the daylight saving time, ranging from q to 31. Here you should show special attention to February and the differences between a solar month and a lunar month.

etime The end moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM.

eyear The end year of the daylight saving time.

offset The number of minutes to add during the daylight saving time. It is 60 minutes by default.

38

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the daylight saving time from zero clock, Apr 1st to zero clock Oct 1st and the offset is 30 minutes in 2015:

Switch(config)# system-time dst date Apr 1 00:00 2015 Oct 1 00:00 2015

30

5.5 system-time dst recurring Description

The system-time dst recurring command is used to configure the recurring daylight saving time. It can be configured spanning years. To disable DST function, please use no system-time dst command.

Syntax system-time dst recurring {sweek} {sday} {smonth} {stime} {eweek} {eday} {emonth} {etime} [offset]

no system-time dst

Parameter sweekThe start week of the daylight saving time. There are 5 values showing as follows: first, second, third, fourth, last.

sday The start day of the daylight saving time. There are 7 values showing as follows: Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat.

smonth The start month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values showing as follows: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec.

stime The start moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM.

eweek The end week of the daylight saving time. There are 5 values showing as follows: first, second, third, fourth, last.

eday The end day of the daylight saving time. There are 5 values showing as follows: Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat.

emonth The end month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values showing as following: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec.

39

etime The end moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM.

offset The number of minutes to add during the daylight saving time. It is 60 minutes by default.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the daylight saving time from 2:00am, the first Sunday of May to 2:00am, the last Sunday of Oct and the offset is 45 minutes:

Switch(config)# system-time dst recurring first Sun May 02:00 last Sun Oct

02:00 45

5.6 hostname Description

The hostname command is used to configure the system name. To clear the system name information, please use no hostname command.

Syntax hostname [ hostname ]

no hostname

Parameter hostname System Name. The length of the name ranges from 1 to 32 characters. By default, it is the device name, for example T1600G-28TS.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the system name as TPLINK:

Switch(config)# hostname TPLINK

40

5.7 location Description

The location command is used to configure the system location. To clear the system location information, please use no location command.

Syntax location [ location ]

no location

Parameter

location Device Location. It consists of 32 characters at most. It is SHENZHEN by default.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the system location as SHENZHEN:

Switch(config)# location SHENZHEN

5.8 contact-info Description

The contact-info command is used to configure the system contact information. To clear the system contact information, please use no contact-info command.

Syntax contact-info [ contact_info ]

no contact-info

Parameter contact_info Contact Information. It consists of 32 characters at most. It is www.tp-link.com by default.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

41

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the system contact information as www.tp-link.com:

Switch(config)# contact-info www.tp-link.com

5.9 led

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The led command is used to control the LEDs.

Syntax led {on | off}

Parameter on | off The LEDs are configured as on or off. By default, they are on.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the LED as off:

Switch(config)# led off

5.10 ip address Description

This ip address command is used to configure the IP address and IP subnet mask for the specified interface manually. The interface type includes: routed port, port-channel interface, loopback interface and VLAN interface.

Syntax

ip address { ip-addr } { mask } [ secondary ]

no ip address [ ip-addr ] [ mask ]

42

Parameter

ip-addr The IP address of the Layer 3 interface.

mask The subnet mask of the Layer 3 interface.

secondary Specify the interfaces secondary IP address. If this parameter is omitted here, the configured IP address is the interfaces primary address.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create the VLAN interface 2 with the primary IP address as 192.168.1.1/24 and secondary IP address as 192.168.2.1/24:

Switch (config)# interface vlan 2 Switch (config-if)# ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 Switch (config-if)# ip address 192.168.2.1 255.255.255.0 secondary

5.11 ip address-alloc Description

The IP address-alloc command is used to enable the DHCP Client function or the BOOTP Protocol. When this function is enabled, the specified interface will obtain IP from DHCP Server or BOOTP server. To disable the IP obtaining function on the specified interface, please use the no ip address command. This command applies to the routed port, the port-channel interface and the VLAN interface.

Syntax

ip address-alloc { dhcp | bootp }

no ip address

Parameter

dhcp Specify the Layer 3 interface to obtain IP address from the DHCP Server.

43

bootp Specify the Layer 3 interface to obtain IP address from the BOOTP Server.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the DHCP Client function on the Lay 3 routed port 1/0/1:

Switch (config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch (config-if)# no switchport

Switch (config-if)# ip address-alloc dhcp

Disable the IP address obtaining function on the VLAN interface 2:

Switch (config)# interface vlan 2

Switch (config-if)# no ip address

5.12 controller cloud-based (Only for Certain Devices)

Note: This command is only available on certain devices

Description

The controller cloud-based command is used to enable Cloud-Based Controller managment. When this feature is enabled, you can further add your devices to your Omada Cloud-Based Controller. To disable the feature, use the no controller cloud-based command.

Syntax

controller cloud-based

no controller cloud-based

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

44

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

5.13 controller inform-url (Only for Certain Devices)

Note: This command is only available on certain devices

Description

If your switch and Omada SDN Controller are not located on the same subnet, the controller inform-url command is used to inform the switch of the controllers URL/IP address. To disable the feature, use the no controller inform-url command.

Syntax

controller inform-url { controller-url | controller-ip }

no controller inform-url

Parameter

controller-url Specify the URL of Omada SDN Controller.

controller-ip Specify the IP address of Omada SDN Controller.

Command Mode

Gloabal Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Inform the switch of the controller whose IP address is 192.168.1.1:

Switch (config)# controller inform-url 192.168.1.1

5.14 reset Description

The reset command is used to reset the switchs software. After resetting, all configuration of the switch will restore to the factory defaults and your current settings will be lost.

45

Syntax reset [ except-ip ]

Parameter

except-ip Maintain the IP address when resetting the switch.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Reset all settings of the switch except its IP address:

Switch # reset except-ip

5.15 service reset-disable Description

The service reset-disable command is used to disable the reset function of the console port or reset button. To enable the reset function, use no service reset-disable command. By default, the reset function is enabled.

Syntax service reset-disable

no service reset-disable

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Disable the reset function of console port or reset button:

Switch (config)# service reset-disable

46

5.16 reboot Description

The reboot command is used to reboot the Switch. To avoid damage, please dont turn off the device while rebooting.

Syntax reboot

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Reboot the switch:

Switch # reboot

5.17 reboot-schedule Description

This reboot-schedule command is used to configure the switch to reboot at a certain time point. To delete the reboot schedule settings, please use the reboot-schedule cancel command.

Syntax

reboot-schedule at time [ date ] [ save_before_reboot ]

reboot-schedule in interval [ save_before_reboot ]

reboot-schedule cancel

Parameter

time Specify the time point for the switch to reboot, in the format of hh:mm.

date Specify the date for the switch to reboot, in the format of DD:MM:YYYY. The date should be within 30 days.

save_before_reboot Save the configuration file before the switch reboots.

47

interval Specify a time period after which the switch reboots. It ranges from 1 to 43200 minutes.

cancel Delete the reboot schedule settings.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines In the command reboot-schedule at time [ date ] [ save_before_reboot ], if no date is specified and the time you set here is later than the time that this command is executed, the switch will reboot later that day; otherwise the switch will reboot at the time point the next day.

Example

Specify the switch to save the configuration files and reboot in 200 minutes:

Switch (config)# reboot-schedule in 200 save_before_reboot

5.18 copy running-config startup-config Description

The copy running-config startup-config command is used to save the current settings.

Syntax copy running-config startup-config

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Save current settings:

Switch # copy running-config startup-config

48

5.19 copy startup-config tftp Description

The copy startup-config tftp command is used to backup the configuration file to TFTP server.

Syntax copy startup-config tftp ip-address ip-addr filename name

Parameter ip-addr IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.

name Specify the name for the configuration file which would be backup.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Backup the configuration files to TFTP server with the IP 192.168.0.148 and name this file config.cfg:

Switch # copy startup-config tftp ip-address 192.168.0.148 filename config

Backup the configuration files to TFTP server with the IP fe80::1234 and name this file config.cfg:

Switch # copy startup-config tftp ip-address fe80::1234 filename config

5.20 copy tftp startup-config Description

The copy tftp startup-config command is used to download the configuration file to the switch from TFTP server.

Syntax copy tftp startup-config ip-address ip-addr filename name

Parameter ip-addr IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.

49

name Specify the name for the configuration file which would be downloaded.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Download the configuration file named as config.cfg to the switch from TFTP server with the IP 192.168.0.148:

Switch # copy tftp startup-config ip-address 192.168.0.148 filename config

Download the configuration file named as config.cfg to the switch from TFTP server with the IP fe80::1234

Switch # copy tftp startup-config ip-address fe80::1234 filename config

5.21 copy backup-config tftp Description

The copy backup-config tftp command is used to export the backup configuration file of the switch to TFTP server.

Syntax copy backup-config tftp ip-address ip-addr filename name

Parameter ip-addr IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.

name Specify the name for the configuration file which would be exported.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Export the backup configuration file of the switch to the TFTP server with the IP 192.168.0.148 and name the file config.cfg:

Switch # copy backup-config tftp ip-address 192.168.0.148 filename config

50

5.22 copy backup-config startup-config Description

The copy backup-config startup-config command is used to replace the startup configuration file using the backup configuration file.

Syntax copy backup-config startup-config

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Replace the startup configuration file using the backup configuration file.:

Switch # copy backup-config startup-config

5.23 copy running-config backup-config Description

The copy running-config backup-config tftp command is used to save the current running configuration as the backup configuration file.

Syntax copy running-config backup-config

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Save the current running configuration as the backup configuration file.

Switch # copy running-config backup-config

51

5.24 copy tftp backup-config Description

The copy tftp backup-config command is used to download the backup configuration file from a TFTP server.

Syntax Copy tftp backup-config ip-address ip-addr filename name

Parameter ip-addr IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.

name Specify the name for the configuration file which would be downloaded.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Download the configuration file named config.cfg from the TFTP server with the IP 192.168.0.148:

Switch # copy tftp backup-config ip-address 192.168.0.148 filename config

5.25 boot application Description

The boot application command is used to configure the image file as startup image or backup image.

Syntax

boot application filename { image1 | image 2 } { startup | backup }

no boot application

Parameter

image1 | image2 Specify the image file to be configured. By default, the image1.bin is the startup image and the image2.bin is the backup image.

52

startup | backup Specify the property of the image, either startup image or backup image.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the image2.bin as the startup image:

Switch (config)# boot application filename image2 startup

5.26 boot config Description

The boot config command is used to configure the configuration file as startup configuration or backup configuration.

Syntax

boot config filename { config1 | config 2 } { startup | backup }

no boot application

Parameter

config1 | config2 Specify the configuration file to be configured. By default, the config1.cfg is the startup image and the config2.cfg is the backup image.

startup | backup Specify the property of the configuration.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the config2.cfg as the startup image:

Switch (config)# boot config filename config2 startup

53

5.27 remove backup-image Description

The remove backup-image command is used to delete the backup-image.

Syntax

remove backup-image

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Delete the backup image file:

Switch # remove backup-image

5.28 firmware upgrade Description

The firmware upgrade command is used to upgrade the switchs backup iamge file via the TFTP server. The uploaded firmware file will take place of the Backup Image, and user can choose whether to reboot the switch with the Backup Image.

Syntax firmware upgrade tftp ip-address ip-addr filename name

Parameter ip-addr IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.

name Specify the name for the firmware file.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

54

Example Upgrade the switchs backup iamge file with the file firmware.bin in the TFTP server with the IP address 192.168.0.148, and reboot the switch with this firmware:

Switch # firmware upgrade tftp ip-address 192.168.0.148 filename

firmware.bin

It will only upgrade the backup image. Continue? (Y/N):y

Operation OK!

Reboot with the backup image? (Y/N): y

Upgrade the switchs backup iamge file with the file firmware.bin in the TFTP server with the IP address fe80::1234, but do not reboot the switch:

Switch # firmware upgrade tftp ip-address fe80::1234 filename

firmware.bin

It will only upgrade the backup image. Continue? (Y/N):y

Operation OK!

Reboot with the backup image? (Y/N): n

5.29 boot autoinstall start

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The boot autoinstall start command is used to start Auto Install function. To stop the Auto Install function, use no boot autoinstall start.

Syntax boot autoinstall start

no boot autoinstall start

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Start Auto Install function:

55

T2600-28TS(config)# boot autoinstall start

5.30 boot autoinstall persistent-mode

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The boot autoinstall persistent-mode command is used to start Auto Install function to next reboot cycle. To disable persistent mode, use no boot autoinstall persistent-mode.

Syntax boot autoinstall persistent-mode

no boot autoinstall persistent-mode

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Start Auto Install function:

T2600-28TS(config)# boot autoinstall persistent-mode

5.31 boot autoinstall auto-save

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The boot autoinstall auto-save command is used to automatically save the new configuration file that was downloaded by Auto Install function to start-up configuration file Auto Install. To disable auto-save configuration feature use no boot autoinstall auto-save.

Syntax boot autoinstall auto-save

no boot autoinstall auto-save

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

56

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure Auto Install function to auto-save new configuration file to start-up configuration file:

T2600-28TS(config)# boot autoinstall auto-save

5.32 boot autoinstall auto-reboot

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The boot autoinstall auto-reboot command is used to automatically reboot the switch after Auto Install function is completed successfully. To disable auto-reboot feature use no boot autoinstall auto-reboot.

Syntax boot autoinstall auto-reboot

no boot autoinstall auto-reboot

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the switch to auto reboot after Auto Install function completed successfully:

T2600-28TS(config)# boot autoinstall auto-reboot

5.33 boot autoinstall retry-count

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The boot autoinstall retry-count command is used to configure retry count when Auto Install function uses TFTP to download configuration files in a cycle of Auto Install process. To set retry count to default value use no boot autoinstall retry-count.

57

Syntax boot autoinstall retry-count count

no boot autoinstall retry-count

Parameter count The count of retrying auto install. The value ranges from 1 to 3.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure TFTP retry 2 times when download files failed:

T2600- 28TS(config)# boot autoinstall retry-count 2

5.34 show boot autoinstall

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The show boot autoinstall command is used to display the configuration of Auto Install function.

Syntax show boot autoinstall

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the configuration of Auto Install function:

T2600-28TS# show boot autoinstall

5.35 show boot autoinstall downloaded-config

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

58

Description The show boot autoinstall downloaded-config command is used to display the configuration file which downloaded by Auto Install.

Syntax show boot autoinstall downloaded-config

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the configuration file which downloaded by Auto Install:

T2600-28TS# show boot autoinstall downloaded-config

5.36 ping Description

The ping command is used to test the connectivity between the switch and one node of the network.

Syntax ping [ ip | ipv6 ] { ip_addr } [ -n count ] [ -l size ] [ -i interval ]

Parameter ip The type of the IP address for ping test should be IPv4.

ipv6 The type of the IP address for ping test should be IPv6.

ip_addr The IP address of the destination node for ping test. If the parameter ip/ipv6 is not selected, both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.100 or fe80::1234.

-n count The amount of times to send test data during Ping testing. It ranges from 1 to 10. By default, this value is 4.

-l size The size of the sending data during ping testing. It ranges from 1 to 1500 bytes. By default, this value is 64.

-i interval The interval to send ICMP request packets. It ranges from 100 to 1000 milliseconds. By default, this value is 1000.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode

59

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example To test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the IP 192.168.0.131, please specify the count (-l) as 512 bytes and count (-i) as 1000 milliseconds. If there is not any response after 8 times Ping test, the connection between the switch and the network device is failed to establish:

Switch # ping 192.168.0.131 n 8 l 512

To test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the IP fe80::1234, please specify the count (-l) as 512 bytes and count (-i) as 1000 milliseconds. If there is not any response after 8 times Ping test, the connection between the switch and the network device is failed to establish:

Switch # ping fe80::1234 n 8 l 512

5.37 tracert Description

The tracert command is used to test the connectivity of the gateways during its journey from the source to destination of the test data.

Syntax tracert [ ip | ipv6 ] ip_addr [ maxHops ]

Parameter

ip The type of the IP address for tracert test should be IPv4.

ipv6 The type of the IP address for tracert test should be IPv6.

ip_addr The IP address of the destination device. If the parameter ip/ipv6 is not selected, both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.100 or fe80::1234.

maxHops The maximum number of the route hops the test data can pass though. It ranges from 1 to 30. By default, this value is 4.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

60

Example

Test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the IP 192.168.0.131. If the destination device has not been found after 20 maxHops, the connection between the switch and the destination device is failed to establish:

Switch # tracert 192.168.0.131 20

Test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the IP fe80::1234. If the destination device has not been found after 20 maxHops, the connection between the switch and the destination device is failed to establish:

Switch # tracert fe80::1234 20

5.38 show system-info Description

The show system-info command is used to display System Description, Device Name, Device Location, System Contact, Hardware Version, Firmware Version, System Time, Run Time and so on.

Syntax show system-info

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the system information:

Switch # show system-info

5.39 show image-info

Description

The show image-info command is used to display the information of image files in the system.

61

Syntax

show image-info

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display the system image files information:

Switch# show image-info

5.40 show boot

Description

The show boot command is used to display the boot configuration of the system.

Syntax

show boot

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display the system boot configuration information:

Switch# show boot

5.41 show running-config Description

The show running-config command is used to display the current operating configurations of the whole system, a specified unit, or a specified port.

62

Syntax show running-config [unit {all | | [exclude keyword ] [include keyword ] | interface {fastEthernet |gigabitEthernet | ten-gigabitEthernet} port} ]

show running-config [all | | [exclude keyword] [include keyword ] | interface {fastEthernet |gigabitEthernet | ten-gigabitEthernet} port ]

Parameter unit Specify the unit number of a switch to show the units operating configurations. By default, it is 1.

all Display all the operating configurations of the whole system or a specified unit.

| Enable filter to filtrate the configurations. You can use exclude and include to set the filter rule.

keyword The filter conditions, such as interface, vlan, and user.

port Specify the number of the port to show the ports operating configurations.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Display the current operating configurations only related to the user:

Switch# show running-config | include user

5.42 show startup-config Description

The show startup-config command is used to display the current configuration saved in the switch. These configuration settings will not be lost the next time you reboot the switch.

Syntax show startup-config

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

63

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Display the saved configuration:

Switch# show startup-config

5.43 show system-time Description

The show system-time command is used to display the time information of the switch.

Syntax show system-time

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the time information of the switch

Switch# show system-time

5.44 show system-time dst Description

The show system-time dst command is used to display the DST information of the switch.

Syntax show system-time dst

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the DST information of the switch

64

Switch# show system-time dst

5.45 show system-time ntp Description

The show system-time ntp command is used to display the NTP mode configuration information.

Syntax show system-time ntp

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the NTP mode configuration information of the switch:

Switch# show system-time ntp

5.46 show cable-diagnostics interface Description

The show cable-diagnostics interface command is used to display the cable diagnostics of the connected Ethernet Port., which facilitates you to check the connection status of the cable connected to the switch, locate and diagnose the trouble spot of the network.

Syntax show cable-diagnostics interface { fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port }

Parameter port The number of the port which is selected for Cable test.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

65

Example Show the cable-diagnostics of port 3:

Switch# show cable-diagnostics interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

5.47 show cpu-utilization

Description

The show cpu-utilization command is used to display the systems CPU utilization in the last 5 seconds/1minute/5minutes.

Syntax

show cpu-utilization

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the CPU utilization information of the switch:

Switch# show cpu-utilization

5.48 show memory-utilization Description

The show memory-utilization command is used to display the current systems memory utilization in the last 5 seconds/1minute/5minutes.

Syntax

show memory-utilization

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

66

Example

Display the memory utilization information of the switch:

Switch# show memory-utilization

5.49 show controller

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The show controller command is used to display the current controller settings and status.

Syntax

show controller

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the current controller settings and status:

Switch# show controller

5.50 show temperature

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The show temperature command is used to display the temperature of switch.

Syntax

show temperature

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

67

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the temperature information of the switch:

T2600G-28TS-DC# show temperature

5.51 show voltage

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The show voltage command is used to display the voltage of DC power board.

Syntax

show voltage

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the voltage information of the switch:

T2600G-28TS-DC# show voltage

68

Chapter 6 EEE Configuration Commands

EEE (Energy Efficient Ethernet) is used to save power consumption of the switch during periods of low data activity. You can simply enable this feature on ports to allow power reduction.

6.1 eee Description

The eee command is used to enable EEE on the port. To disable EEE on the port, please use no eee command.

Syntax eee

no eee

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable EEE on port 1/0/1:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)#eee

6.2 show interface eee Description

The show interface eee command is used to display the EEE configuration on each port.

Syntax show interface eee [ fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port ]

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

69

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the EEE configuration of each port

Switch# show interface eee

70

Chapter 7 SDM Template Commands

This chapter describes how to configure the Switch Database Management (SDM) templates to allocate hardware resources on the switch for different uses.

7.1 sdm prefer Description

The sdm prefer command is used to configure the SDM template. The SDM template is used to allocate system resources to best support the features being used in your application. To return to use the default template, please use the sdm prefer default command. The template change will take effect after a reboot.

Syntax

sdm prefer { default | enterpriseV4 | enterpriseV6 }

Parameter default Specify the SDM template used in the switch as default.

enterpriseV4 Specify the SDM template used in the switch as enterpriseV4.

enterpriseV6 Specify the SDM template used in the switch as enterpriseV6.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the SDM template as enterpriseV4:

Switch(config)# sdm prefer enterpriseV4

71

7.2 show sdm prefer Description

The show sdm prefer command is used to display resource allocation of the current SDM template in use, or the SDM templates that can be used.

Syntax

show sdm prefer { used | default | enterpriseV4 | enterpriseV6 }

Parameter used Display the resource allocation of the template currently in use, and the template that will become active after a reboot.

default Display the resource allocation of the default template.

enterpriseV4 Display the resource allocation of the enterpriseV4 template.

enterpriseV6 Display the resource allocation of the enterpriseV6 template.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display the resource allocation of the template currently in use, and the template that will become active after a reboot:

Switch(config)#show sdm prefer used

72

Chapter 8 Time Range Commands

With this feature, you can configure a time range and bind it to a PoE port or an ACL rule.

8.1 time-range Description

The time-range command is used to create time-range entry for the switch and enter Time-range Create Configuration Mode. After a time-range entry is created, you need to specify the date and time. A time-range can implement multiple time-ranges simultaneously as long as they do not conflict with each other. To delete the corresponding time-range configuration, please use no time-range command.

Syntax time-range name

no time-range name

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Parameter name The time-range name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Create a time-range named tRange1 for the switch:

Switch(config)# time-range tRange1

8.2 absolute Description

The absolute command is used to create an absolute time-range for the time-range of the switch. To delete the corresponding absolute time-range configuration, please use no absolute command.

73

Syntax absolute from start-date to end-date

no absolute [index ]

Parameter start-date The start date in Absoluteness Mode, in the format of MM/DD/YYYY.

end-date The end date in Absoluteness Mode, in the format of MM/DD/YYYY.

Command Mode Time-Range Create Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Create an absolute time-range for the switch and specify the date extending from May 5th, 2017 through Oct. 5th, 2017:

Switch(config)#time-range tRange1

Switch(config-time-range)#absolute from 05/05/2017 to 10/05/2017

8.3 periodic Description

The periodic command is used to create a periodic mode time-range for the time-range of the switch. To delete the corresponding periodic mode time-range configuration, please use no periodic command.

Syntax periodic start start-time end end-time day-of-the-week week-day

no periodic [ index ]

Parameter start-timeSpecify the start time in the format of HH:MM

end-timeSpecify the end time in the format of HH:MM

week-day In the format of 1-3, 6, daily, off-day, or working-day. For example, 1-3,6 represents Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday and Saturday; daily represents every day; off-day represents the weekends; working-day represents the working days.

74

Command Mode Time-Range Create Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the time-range tSeg1 with time from 8:30 to 12:00 at weekends:

Switch(config)#time-range tSeg1

Switch(config -time-range)#periodic start 08:30 end 12:00

day-of-the-week 6-7

8.4 holiday (time-range mode) Description

The holiday command is used to create holiday mode time-range for the time-range of the switch. When the holiday which is excluded from time-range occurs, the switch will not supply power.

Syntax holiday { exclude | include }

Parameter exclude The time range will not take effect on holiday.

include The time range will take effect on holiday.

Command Mode Time-Range Create Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Create a time-range entry named tRange3 and configure time-range to exclude the holiday:

Switch(config)#time-range tRange3

Switch(config-time-range)#holiday exclude

75

8.5 holiday Description

The holiday command is used to create holiday for the switch. To delete the corresponding holiday configuration, please use no holiday command.

Syntax holiday name start-date start-date end-date end-date

no holiday name

Parameter name The holiday name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.

start-date The start date of the holiday, in the format of MM/DD, for instance, 05/01.

end-date The end date of the holiday, in the format of MM/DD, for instance, 05/01.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Create a holiday named holiday1 and configure the start date as October 1st and the end date as October 3rd:

Switch(config)# holiday holiday1 start-date 10/01 end-date 10/03

8.6 show holiday Description

The show holiday command is used to display the defined holiday.

Syntax show holiday

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

76

Example Display the defined holiday:

Switch# show holiday

8.7 show time-range Description

The show time-range command is used to display the defined time-range.

Syntax show time-range [ time-range-name ]

Parameter time-range-name Specify the time range name with 1 to 16 characters.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the defined time-range:

Switch# show time-range

77

Chapter 9 Port Configuration Commands

Ethernet Configuration Commands can be used to configure the Bandwidth Control, Negotiation Mode and Storm Control for Ethernet ports.

9.1 interface gigabitEthernet Description

The interface gigabitEthernet command is used to enter the Interface gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode and configure the corresponding Gigabit Ethernet port.

Syntax

interface gigabitEthernet port

Parameter

port The Ethernet port number.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

To enter the Interface gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode and configure port 2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

9.2 interface range gigabitEthernet Description

The interface range gigabitEthernet command is used to enter the interface range gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode and configure multiple Gigabit Ethernet ports at the same time.

78

Syntax

interface range gigabitEthernet port-list

Parameter

port-list The list of Ethernet ports.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines Command in the Interface Range gigabitEthernet Mode is executed independently on all ports in the range. It does not affect the execution on the other ports at all if the command results in an error on one port.

Example

To enter the Interface range gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode, and configure ports 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 and 9 at the same time by adding them to one port-list:

Switch(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3,1/0/6-7,1/0/9

9.3 description Description

The description command is used to add a description to the Ethernet port. To clear the description of the corresponding port, please use no description command.

Syntax

description string

no description

Parameter

string Content of a port description, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.

79

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Add a description Port_5 to port 1/0/5:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

Switch(config-if)# description Port_5

9.4 shutdown Description

The shutdown command is used to disable an Ethernet port. To enable this port again, please use no shutdown command.

Syntax shutdown

no shutdown

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Disable port 1/0/3:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# shutdown

80

9.5 flow-control Description

The flow-control command is used to enable the flow-control function for a port. To disable the flow-control function for this corresponding port, please use no flow-control command. With the flow-control function enabled, the Ingress Rate and Egress Rate can be synchronized to avoid packet loss in the network.

Syntax flow-control

no flow-control

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the flow-control function for port 1/0/3:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# flow-control

9.6 duplex Description

The duplex command is used to configure the Duplex Mode for an Ethernet port. To return to the default configuration, please use no duplex command.

Syntax

duplex { auto | full | half }

no duplex

Parameter

auto | full | half The duplex mode of the Ethernet port. There are three options: auto-negotiation mode, full-duplex mode and half-duplex mode. By default, the Gigabit Ethernet port is auto-negotiation mode.

81

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the Duplex Mode as full-duplex for port 1/0/3:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# duplex full

9.7 jumbo-size Description

The jumbo-size command is used to specify the size of jumbo frames.

Syntax jumbo-size size

Parameter size The value of jumbo frames. It ranges from 1518 to 9216 bytes, and the default is 1518 bytes.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Globally configure the size of jumbo frames as 9216:

Switch(config)# jumbo-size 9216

9.8 speed Description

The speed command is used to configure the Speed Mode for an Ethernet port. To return to the default configuration, please use no speed command.

82

Syntax speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 | auto }

no speed

Parameter 10 | 100 | 1000 | auto The speed mode of the Ethernet port. There are four options: 10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1000Mbps and Auto negotiation mode (default).

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the Speed Mode as 100Mbps for port 1/0/3:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# speed 100

9.9 serdes-mode

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The serdes-mode command is used to configure the SFP ports to collocate with two kinds of fiber module.

Syntax serdes-mode {1000bx | sgmii }

Parameter 1000bx The SFP port can collocate with normal optical module. sgmii The SFP port can collocate with electrical interface module.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

83

Example Configure port 1/0/26 to collocate with electrical interface modules:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/26

Switch(config-if)# serdes-mode sgmii

9.10 clear counters Description

The clear counters command is used to clear the statistics information of all the Ethernet ports and port channels.

Syntax clear counters

clear counters interface [ gigabitEthernet port ] [ port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameter port The Ethernet port number.

port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Clear the statistic information of all ports and port channels:

Switch(config)# clear counters

9.11 show fiber-ports

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The show fiber ports command is used to display the information of all fiber ports.

Syntax show fiber ports

84

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the information of all fiber ports:

T2600G-28TS(config)# show fiber ports

9.12 show interface status Description

The show interface status command is used to display the connection status of the Ethernet port/port channel.

Syntax show interface status [ fastEthernet port ] [ gigabitEthernet port ] [ ten-gigabitEthernet port ] [ port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameter port The Ethernet port number.

port-channel-id The ID of the port channel..

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the connection status of all ports and port channels:

Switch(config)# show interface status

Display the connection status of port 1/0/1:

Switch(config)# show interface status gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

9.13 show interface counters Description

The show interface counters command is used to display the statistics information of all ports/port channels.

85

Syntax show interface counters [ gigabitEthernet port ] [ port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameter port The Ethernet port number.

port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the statistics information of all Ethernet ports and port channels:

Switch(config)# show interface counters

Display the statistics information of port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# show interface counters gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

9.14 show interface configuration Description

The show interface configuration command is used to display the configurations of all ports and port channels, including Port-status, Flow Control, Negotiation Mode and Port-description.

Syntax show interface configuration [ gigabitEthernet port ] [ port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameter port The Ethernet port number.

port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the configurations of all Ethernet ports and port channels:

86

Switch(config)# show interface configuration

Display the configurations of port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# show interface configuration gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

87

Chapter 10 Port Isolation Commands

Port Isolation provides a method of restricting traffic flow to improve the network security by forbidding the port to forward packets to the ports that are not on its forwarding port list.

10.1 port isolation Description

The port isolation command is used to configure the forward port/port channel list of a port/port channel, so that this port/port channel can only communicate with the ports/port channels on its list. To delete the corresponding configuration, please use no port isolation command.

Syntax port isolation { [ fa-forward-list fa-forward-list ] [ gi-forward-list gi-forward-list ] [ po-forward-list po-forward-list ] [ te-forward-list te-forward-list ] }

no port isolation

Parameter fa-forward-list / gi-forward-list / te-forward-list The list of Ethernet ports.

po-forward-list The list of port channels.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Set port 1, 2, 4 and port channel 2 to the forward list of port 1/0/5:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

Switch(config-if)# port isolation gi-forward-list 1/0/1-2,1/0/4

po-forward-list 2

Set all Ethernet ports and port channels to forward list of port 1/0/2, namely restore to the default setting:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

88

Switch(config-if)# no port isolation

10.2 show port isolation interface Description

The show port isolation interface command is used to display the forward port list of a port/port channel.

Syntax show port isolation interface [fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameter port The number of Ethernet port you want to show its forward port list, in the format of 1/0/2.

port-channel-id The ID of port channel you want to show its forward port list, ranging from 1 to 6.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the forward-list of port 1/0/2:

Switch# show port isolation interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Display the forward-list of all Ethernet ports and port channels:

Switch# show port isolation interface

89

Chapter 11 Loopback Detection Commands

With loopback detection feature enabled, the switch can detect loops using loopback detection packets. When a loop is detected, the switch will display an alert or further block the corresponding port according to the configuration.

11.1 loopback-detection (global) Description

The loopback-detection command is used to enable the loopback detection function globally. To disable it, please use no loopback detection command.

Syntax loopback-detection

no loopback-detection

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the loopback detection function globally:

Switch(config)# loopback-detection

11.2 loopback-detection interval Description

The loopback-detection interval command is used to define the interval of sending loopback detection packets from switch ports to network, aiming at detecting network loops periodically.

Syntax loopback-detection interval interval-time

Parameter interval-time The interval of sending loopback detection packets. It ranges from 1 to 1000 seconds. By default, this value is 30.

90

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Specify the interval-time as 50 seconds:

Switch(config)# loopback-detection interval 50

11.3 loopback-detection recovery-time Description

The loopback-detection recovery-time command is used to configure the time after which the blocked port would automatically recover to normal status.

Syntax loopback-detection recovery-time recovery-time

Parameter recovery-time The time after which the blocked port would automatically recover to normal status, and the loopback detection would restart. It ranges from 2 to 1000000 seconds. By default, this value is 90.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the recovery-time as 70 seconds:

Switch(config)# loopback-detection recovery-time 70

91

11.4 loopback-detection (interface) Description

The loopback-detection command is used to enable the loopback detection function of the specified port. To disable it, please use no loopback-detection command.

Syntax loopback-detection

no loopback-detection

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet | interface range gigabitEthernet | interface port-channel | interface range port-channel )

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the loopback detection function of ports 1-3:

Switch(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3

Switch(Config-if-range)# loopback-detection

11.5 loopback-detection config process-mode Description

The loopback-detection config process-mode command is used to configure the process-mode for the ports by which the switch copes with the detected loops. You also need to configure the recovery mode to remove the block status of the port or VLAN when the process-mode is Port Based or VLAN Based.

Syntax loopback-detection config process-mode { alert | port-based | vlan-based } recovery-mode { auto | manual }

Parameter alert When a loop is detected, the switch will send a trap message and generate an entry on the log file. It is the default setting.

port-based When a loop is detected, the switch will send a trap message and generate an entry on the log file. In addition, the switch will block the port

92

on which the loop is detected and no packets can pass through the port.

vlan-based When a loop is detected, the switch will send a trap message and generate an entry on the log file. In addition, the switch will block the VLAN in which the loop is detected and only the packets of the blocked VLAN cannot pass through the port.

auto Block status can be automatically removed after recovery time.

manual Block status can only be removed manually.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet | interface range gigabitEthernet | interface port-channel | interface range port-channel )

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the loopback detection process-mode as port-based, and configure the recovery mode as manual for port 2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# loopback-detection config process-mode port-based

recovery-mode manual

11.6 loopback-detection recover Description

The loopback-detection recover command is used to remove the block status of selected ports, recovering the blocked ports to normal status,

Syntax loopback-detection recover

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet | interface range gigabitEthernet | interface port-channel | interface range port-channel )

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Recover the blocked port 1/0/2 to normal status:

93

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# loopback-detection recover

11.7 show loopback-detection global Description

The show loopback-detection global command is used to display the global configuration of loopback detection function such as loopback detection global status, loopback detection interval and loopback detection recovery time.

Syntax show loopback-detection global

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the global configuration of loopback detection function:

Switch# show loopback-detection global

11.8 show loopback-detection interface Description

The show loopback-detection interface command is used to display the configuration of loopback detection function and the status of the specified Ethernet port.

Syntax show loopback-detection interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel lagid ] [ detail ]

Parameter port The Ethernet port number.

lagid The number of LAG, ranging from 1 to 14.

detail Displays the loop status and block status of the VLAN which the specified port belongs to.

94

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the configuration of loopback detection function and the status of all ports:

Switch# show loopback-detection interface

Display the configuration of loopback detection function and the status of port 5:

Switch# show loopback-detection interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

95

Chapter 12 DDM Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Note: DDM commands are only available on certain devices.

The DDM (Digital Diagnostic Monitoring) function allows the user to monitor the status of the SFP modules inserted into the SFP ports on the switch. The user can choose to shut down the monitoring SFP port automatically when specified parameter exceeds the alarm threshold or warning threshold. The monitoring parameters include: Temperature, Voltage, Bias Current, Tx Power and Rx Power.

12.1 ddm state enable Description

The ddm state enable command is used to enable the DDM function on the specified SFP port.

Use the no ddm state enable command to disable the DDM function on this port.

Syntax ddm state enable

no ddm state enable

Default Setting Enabled on all the SFP ports.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Example Enable DDM function on port 1/0/25:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ddm state enable

96

12.2 ddm shutdown Description

The ddm shutdown command is used to configure whether to shut down the port when an exceeding alarm threshold or warning threshold event is encountered.

Syntax ddm shutdown { none | warning | alarm }

Parameter none The port will never be shut down regardless of the exceeding alarm threshold and warning threshold events.

warning Shut down the port when an exceeding warning threshold event is encountered.

alarm Shut down the port when an exceeding alarm threshold event is encountered.

Default Setting none, which means the port will never be shut down regardless of the exceeding alarm threshold and warning threshold events.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet )

Example Shut down the port 1/0/25 when an exceeding warning threshold event is encountered:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ddm shutdown warning

12.3 ddm temperature_threshold Description

The ddm temperature_threshold command is used to configure the threshold of the DDM temperature value.

Syntax ddm temperature_threshold { high_alarm | high_warning | low_alarm | low_warning } value

97

Parameter high_alarm Specify the highest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken.

high_warning Specify the highest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken.

low_alarm Specify the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken.

low_warning Specify the lowest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken.

value Enter the threshold value in Celsius.

Default Setting None.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet )

Example Configure the high_alarm threshold of DDM temperature on the port 1/0/25 as 5:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ddm temperature_threshold high_alarm 5

12.4 ddm voltage_threshold Description

The ddm voltage_threshold command is used to configure the threshold of the DDM voltage value.

Syntax ddm voltage_threshold { high_alarm | high_warning | low_alarm | low_warning } value

98

Parameter high_alarm Specify the highest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken.

high_warning Specify the highest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken.

low_alarm Specify the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken.

low_warning Specify the lowest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken.

value Enter the threshold value in Volt.

Default Setting None.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet )

Example Configure the high_alarm threshold of DDM voltage on the port 1/0/25 as 5:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ddm voltage_threshold high_alarm 5

12.5 ddm bias_current_threshold Description

The ddm bias_current_threshold command is used to configure the threshold of the DDM Bias Current value.

Syntax ddm bias_current_threshold { high_alarm | high_warning | low_alarm | low_warning } value

99

Parameter high_alarm Specify the highest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken.

high_warning Specify the highest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken.

low_alarm Specify the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken.

low_warning Specify the lowest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken.

value Enter the threshold value in mA.

Default Setting None.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface fastEthernet / interface range fastEthernet / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Example Configure the high_alarm threshold of DDM Bias Current on the port 1/0/25 as 5:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ddm bias_current_threshold high_alarm 5

12.6 ddm tx_power_threshold Description

The ddm tx_power_threshold command is used to configure the threshold of the DDM Tx Power value.

Syntax ddm tx_power_threshold { high_alarm | high_warning | low_alarm | low_warning } value

100

Parameter high_alarm Specify the highest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken.

high_warning Specify the highest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken.

low_alarm Specify the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken.

low_warning Specify the lowest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken.

value Enter the threshold value in mW.

Default Setting None.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet )

Example Configure the high_alarm threshold of DDM Tx Power on the port 1/0/25 as 5:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ddm tx_power_threshold high_alarm 5

12.7 ddm rx_power_threshold Description

The ddm rx_power_threshold command is used to configure the threshold of the DDM Rx Power value.

Syntax ddm rx_power_threshold { high_alarm | high_warning | low_alarm | low_warning } value

101

Parameter high_alarm Specify the highest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken.

high_warning Specify the highest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken.

low_alarm Specify the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken.

low_warning Specify the lowest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken.

value Enter the threshold value in mW.

Default Setting None.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet )

Example Configure the high_alarm threshold of DDM Rx Power on the port 1/0/25 as 5:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ddm rx_power_threshold high_alarm 5

12.8 show ddm configuration Description

The show ddm configuration command is used to display the DDM configuration.

Syntax show ddm configuration { state | temperature | voltage | bias_current | tx_power | rx_power }

Parameter state Display the DDM configuration state.

temperature Displays the threshold of the DDM temperature value.

102

voltage Displays the threshold of the DDM Voltage value.

bias_current Displays the threshold of the DDM Bias Current value.

tx_power Displays the threshold of the DDM Tx Power value.

rx_power Displays the threshold of the DDM Rx Power value.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Example View the DDM configuration state:

T2600G-28TS(config)#show ddm configuration state

View the threshold of the DDM Voltage value:

T2600G-28TS(config)#show ddm configuration voltage

12.9 show ddm status Description

The show ddm status command is used to display the DDM status, which is the digital diagnostic monitoring status of SFP modules inserting into the switchs SFP ports.

Syntax show ddm status

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Example View the DDM status:

T2600G-28TS(config)#show ddm status

103

Chapter 13 Etherchannel Commands

Etherchannel Commands are used to configure LAG and LACP function.

LAG (Link Aggregation Group) is to combine a number of ports together to make a single high-bandwidth data path, which can highly extend the bandwidth. The bandwidth of the LAG is the sum of bandwidth of its member port.

LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) is defined in IEEE802.3ad and enables the dynamic link aggregation and disaggregation by exchanging LACP packets with its partner. The switch can dynamically group similarly configured ports into a single logical link, which will highly extend the bandwidth and flexibly balance the load.

13.1 channel-group Description

The channel-group command is used to add a port to the EtherChannel Group and configure its mode. To delete the port from the EtherChannel Group, please use no channel-group command.

Syntax

channel-group num mode { on | active | passive }

no channel-group

Parameter

num The number of the EtherChannel Group, ranging from 1 to 14.

on Enable the static LAG.

active Enable the active LACP mode.

passive Enable the passive LACP mode.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

104

Example

Add ports 2-4 to EtherChannel Group 1 and enable the static LAG:

Switch(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-4

Switch(config-if-range)# channel-group 1 mode on

13.2 port-channel load-balance Description

The port-channel load-balance command is used to configure the Aggregate Arithmetic for LAG. To return to the default configurations, please use no port-channel load-balance command.

Syntax

port-channel load-balance { src-mac | dst-mac | src-dst-mac | src-ip | dst-ip | src-dst-ip }

no port-channel load-balance

Parameter

src-mac The source MAC address. When this option is selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source MAC address of the packets.

dst-mac The destination MAC address. When this option is selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the destination MAC address of the packets.

src-dst-mac The source and destination MAC address. When this option is selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source and destination MAC addresses of the packets. The Aggregate Arithmetic for LAG is src-dst-mac by default.

src-ip The source IP address. When this option is selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source IP address of the packets.

dst-ip The destination IP address. When this option is selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the destination IP address of the packets.

src-dst-ip The source and destination IP address. When this option is selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source and destination IP addresses of the packets.

105

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the Aggregate Arithmetic for LAG as src-dst-ip:

Switch(config)# port-channel load-balance src-dst-ip

13.3 lacp system-priority Description

The lacp system-priority command is used to configure the LACP system priority globally. To return to the default configurations, please use no lacp system-priority command.

Syntax

lacp system-priority pri

no lacp system-priority

Parameter

pri The system priority, ranging from 0 to 65535. It is 32768 by default.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the LACP system priority as 1024 globally:

Switch(config)# lacp system-priority 1024

106

13.4 lacp port-priority Description

The lacp port-priority command is used to configure the LACP port priority for specified ports. To return to the default configurations, please use no lacp port-priority command.

Syntax

lacp port-priority pri

no lacp port-priority

Parameter

pri The port priority, ranging from 0 to 65535. It is 32768 by default.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the LACP port priority as 1024 for ports 1-3:

Switch(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3

Switch(config-if-range)# lacp port-priority 1024

Configure the LACP port priority as 2048 for port 4:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4

Switch(config-if)# lacp port-priority 2048

13.5 show etherchannel Description

The show etherchannel command is used to display the EtherChannel information.

Syntax show etherchannel [ channel-group-num ] { detail | summary }

107

Parameter

channel-group-num The EtherChannel Group number, ranging from 1 to 14. By default, it is empty, and will display the information of all EtherChannel Groups.

detail The detailed information of EtherChannel.

summary The EtherChannel information in summary.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the detailed information of EtherChannel Group 1:

Switch(config)# show etherchannel 1 detail

13.6 show etherchannel load-balance Description

The show etherchannel load-balance command is used to display the Aggregate Arithmetic of LAG.

Syntax

show etherchannel load-balance

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the Aggregate Arithmetic of LAG:

Switch(config)# show etherchannel load-balance

108

13.7 show lacp Description

The show lacp command is used to display the LACP information for a specified EtherChannel Group.

Syntax

show lacp [ channel-group-num ] { internal | neighbor }

Parameter channel-group-num The EtherChannel Group number, ranging from 1 to 14. By default, it is empty, and will display the information of all LACP groups.

internal The internal LACP information.

neighbor The neighbor LACP information.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the internal LACP information of EtherChannel Group 1:

Switch(config)# show lacp 1 internal

13.8 show lacp sys-id Description

The show lacp sys-id command is used to display the LACP system priority globally.

Syntax

show lacp sys-id

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

109

Example

Display the LACP system priority:

Switch(config)# show lacp sys-id

110

Chapter 14 MAC Address Commands

MAC Address configuration can improve the network security by configuring the Port Security and maintaining the address information by managing the Address Table.

14.1 mac address-table static Description

The mac address-table static command is used to add the static MAC address entry. To remove the corresponding entry, please use no mac address-table static command. The static address can be added or removed manually, independent of the aging time. In the stable networks, the static MAC address entries can facilitate the switch to reduce broadcast packets and enhance the efficiency of packets forwarding remarkably.

Syntax mac address-table static mac-addr vid vid interface { fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port }

no mac address-table static mac-addr vid vid interface { fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port }

Parameter mac-addr The MAC address of the entry you desire to add.

vid The VLAN ID number of your desired entry. It ranges from 1 to 4094.

port The Ethernet port number of your desired entry.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Add a static Mac address entry to bind the MAC address 00:02:58:4f:6c:23, VLAN1 and port 1 together:

Switch(config)# mac address-table static 00:02:58:4f:6c:23 vid 1 interface

gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

111

14.2 no mac address-table dynamic Description

The no mac address-table dynamic command is used to delete the specified dynamic MAC address, or dynamic MAC addresses based on the VLAN or the port.

Syntax no mac address-table dynamic { mac-addr | vid vid | interface {fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port } }

Parameter

mac-addr The MAC address you desire to delete.

vid The VLAN ID on which you desire to delete MAC addresses.

port The Ethernet port on whichyou desire to delete MAC addresses.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Delete the MAC addresses on VLAN 1:

Switch(config)# no mac address-table dynamic vid 1

14.3 mac address-table aging-time Description

The mac address-table aging-time command is used to configure aging time for the dynamic address. To return to the default configuration, please use no mac address-table aging-time command.

Syntax mac address-table aging-time aging-time

no mac address-table aging-time

Parameter aging-time The aging time for the dynamic address. The value of it can be 0 or ranges from 10 to 630 seconds. When 0 is entered, the Auto Aging function is disabled. It is 300 by default.

112

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the aging time as 500 seconds:

Switch(config)# mac address-table aging-time 500

14.4 mac address-table filtering Description

The mac address-table filtering command is used to add the filtering address entry. To delete the corresponding entry, please use no mac address-table filtering command. The filtering address function is to forbid the undesired package to be forwarded. The filtering address can be added or removed manually, independent of the aging time.

Syntax mac address-table filtering mac-addr vid vid

no mac address-table filtering {[ mac-addr ] [ vid vid ]}

Parameter mac-addr The MAC address to be filtered.

vid The corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address. It ranges from 1 to 4094.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Add a filtering address entry of which VLAN ID is 1 and MAC address is 00:1e:4b:04:01:5d:

Switch(config)# mac address-table filtering 00:1e:4b:04:01:5d vid 1

113

14.5 mac address-table notification

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The mac address-table notification command is used to configure global settings of MAC address table notification.

Syntax mac address-table notification { [ global-status enable | disable ] [ table-full-status enable | disable ] [ interval time ] }

Parameter global-status enable | disable Enable/Disable the notification function globally.

table-full-status enable | disable Enable/Disable the MAC threshold notification. With this feature enabled, a SNMP notification is generated and sent to the network management system (NMS) when the threshold of the switchs MAC address table is reached or exceeded.

interval time Specify the notification trap interval between each set of traps that are generated to the NMS. The interval ranges from 1 to 1000 seconds, and its 1 second by default.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the global MAC address notification and table full notification, specify the notification sending interval as 2 seconds:

T2600G-28TS(config)# mac address-table notification global-status

enable table-full-status enable interval 2

14.6 mac address-table max-mac-count Description

The mac address-table max-mac-count command is used to configure the Port Security. To return to the default configurations, please use no mac

114

address-table max-mac-count command. Port Security is to protect the switch from the malicious MAC address attack by limiting the maximum number of the MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. The port with Port Security feature enabled will learned the MAC address dynamically. When the learned MAC address number reaches the maximum, the port will stop learning. Therefore, the other devices with the MAC address unlearned cannot access to the network via this port.

Syntax mac address-table max-mac-count { [ max-number num ][ mode { dynamic | static | permanent } ][ status { forward | drop | disable } ] [ exceed-max-learned enable | disable ] }

no mac address-table max-mac-count [ max-number | mode | status ]

Parameter num The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. It ranges from 0 to 64. By default, this value is 64.

dynamic | static | permanent Learn mode for MAC addresses. There are three modes, including Dynamic mode, Static mode and Permanent mode. When Dynamic mode is selected, the learned MAC address will be deleted automatically after the aging time. When Static mode is selected, the learned MAC address will be out of the influence of the aging time and can only be deleted manually. The learned entries will be cleared after the switch is rebooted. When permanent mode is selected, the learned MAC address will be out of the influence of the aging time and can only be deleted manually too. However, the learned entries will be saved even the switch is rebooted.

status Select the action to be taken when the number of the MAC addresses reaches the maximum learning number on the port. By default, this function is disabled.

forward: The packets will be forward but not be learned when learned MAC number exceeds the maximum MAC address number on this port.

drop: The packets will be dropped when learned MAC number exceeds the maximum MAC address number on this port.

disable: The MAC address threshold on this port is disabled.

new-mac-learned enable | disable Enable/Disable the new-mac-learned notification on this port. With this feature enabled, a SNMP notification is generated and sent to the network management system (NMS) when the port learns a new MAC address.

115

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable Port Security function for port 1/0/1, select Static mode as the learn mode, and specify the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on this port as 30. When the number of MAC address entries reaches 30 on this port, new entry will be dropped:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)# mac address-table max-mac-count max-number 30

mode static status drop

14.7 mac address-table notification (interface)

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The mac address-table notification command is used to configure the MAC change notification on port.

Syntax mac address-table notification { [ learn-mode-change enable | disable ] [ new-mac-learned enable | disable ]}

Parameter learn-mode-change enable | disable Enable/Disable the learn-mode-change notification. With this feature enabled, a SNMP notification is generated and sent to the network management system (NMS) when the learning mode of this port changes. To configure the learning mode configuration, please refer to mac address-table max-mac-count.

new-mac-learned enable | disable Enable/Disable the new-mac-learned notification on this port. With this feature enabled, a SNMP notification is generated and sent to the network management system (NMS) when the port learns a new MAC address.

116

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the learn-mode-change notification on port 1/0/2:

T2600G-28TS(config)# mac address-table notification global-status

enable

T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

T2600G-28TS(config-if)# mac address-table notification

learn-mode-change enable

14.8 mac address-table security

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The mac address-table security command is used to configure the maximum number of MAC address cane be learned in specified VLANs.

Syntax mac address-table security vid vid max-learn number{ forward | drop }

Parameter vid Specify the VLAN ID to configure its MAC address table.

number Configure the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN. It ranges from 0 to 16383.

forward | drop | disable Choose the mode when learned MAC number exceeds the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN.

Drop: The packets will be dropped when learned MAC number exceeds the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN.

Forward: The packets will be forward but not be learned when learned MAC number exceeds the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN.

117

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the max learned MAC address number is VLAN 2 as 1000, and drop the packets that have no match in the MAC address table:

T2600G-28TS(config)# mac address-table security vid 2 max-learn 1000

drop

14.9 mac address-table vlan-security

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The mac address-table security command is used to configure the maximum number of MAC address cane be learned in specified VLANs.

Syntax mac address-table vlan-security { vid vid max-learn number | mode { forward | drop } }

Parameter vid Specify the VLAN ID to configure its MAC address table.

number Configure the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN. It ranges from 0 to 16383.

forward | drop | disable Choose the mode when learned MAC number exceeds the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN.

Drop: The packets will be dropped when learned MAC number exceeds the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN.

Forward: The packets will be forward but not be learned when learned MAC number exceeds the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN.

Disable: The threshold of the MAC address table is disabled.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

118

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the max learned MAC address number is VLAN 2 as 1000:

T2600G-18TS(config)# mac address-table vlan-security vid 2 max-learn

1000

14.10 show mac address-table Description

The show mac address-table command is used to display the information of all address entries.

Syntax show mac address-table { dynamic | static | filtering }

Parameter dynamic | static | filtering The type of your desired entry. By default, all the entries are displayed.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the information of all address entries:

Switch(config)# show mac address-table

14.11 clear mac address-table Description

The show mac address-table command is used to clear the specified address entries.

Syntax clear mac address-table { dynamic | static | filtering }

119

Parameter dynamic | static | filtering The type of your desired entry.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Clear the information of all static address entries:

Switch(config)# clear mac address-table static

14.12 show mac address-table aging-time Description

The show mac address-table aging-time command is used to display the Aging Time of the MAC address.

Syntax show mac address-table aging-time

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the Aging Time of the MAC address:

Switch(config)# show mac address-table aging-time

14.13 show mac address-table max-mac-count Description

The show mac address-table max-mac-count interface gigabitEthernet command is used to display the security configuration of all ports or the specified port.

120

Syntax show mac address-table max-mac-count {all | interface gigabitEthernet port }

Parameter

all Displays the security information of all the Ethernet ports.

port The Ethernet port number.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the security configuration of all ports:

Switch(config)# show mac address-table max-mac-count all

Display the security configuration of port 1/0/1:

Switch(config)# show mac address-table max-mac-count interface

gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

14.14 show mac address-table interface Description

The show mac address-table interface command is used to display the address configuration of the specified port/port channel.

Syntax show mac address-table interface { gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id }

Parameter

port The Ethernet port number.

port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

121

Example Display the address configuration of port 1/0/1:

Switch(config)# show mac address-table interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

14.15 show mac address-table count Description

The show mac address-table count command is used to display the total amount of MAC address table.

Syntax show mac address-table count [ vlan vlan-id ]

Parameter

vlan-id Specify the VLAN which the MAC entries belong to.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the total MAC entry information in different VLANs:

Switch(config)# show mac address-table count

14.16 show mac address-table address Description

The show mac address-table address command is used to display the information of the specified MAC address.

Syntax show mac address-table address mac-addr [ interface { gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id } | vid vlan-id ]

Parameter

mac-addr The specified MAC address.

port The Ethernet port number.

port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

vlan-id Specify the VLAN which the entry belongs to.

122

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the information of the MAC address 00:00:00:00:23:00 in VLAN 1:

Switch(config)#show mac address-table address 00:00:00:00:23:00 vid 1

14.17 show mac address-table vlan Description

The show mac address-table vlan command is used to display the MAC address configuration of the specified vlan.

Syntax show mac address-table vlan vid

Parameter

vid The specified VLAN id.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the MAC address configuration of vlan 1:

Switch(config)# show mac address-table vlan 1

14.18 show mac address-table notification

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The show mac address-table notification command is used to display the MAC notification configuration globally or on the specified port.

Syntax show mac address-table notification {all | interface gigabitEthernet port }

123

Parameter all Displays the notification information globally and of all the Ethernet ports.

port Displays the notification information on the specified port.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the notification configuration of all the ports:

T2600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table notification all

14.19 show mac address-table security

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The show mac address-table security command is used to display the MAC address security configuration globally or of the specified VLAN.

Syntax show mac address-table security [ vid vid ]

Parameter

vid The specified VLAN id.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the MAC address security configuration of VLAN 1:

T2600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table security vid 1

124

Chapter 15 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Commands

VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) technology is developed for the switch to divide the LAN into multiple logical LANs flexibly. Hosts in the same VLAN can communicate with each other, regardless of their physical locations. VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth, and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains.

15.1 vlan Description

The vlan command is used to create IEEE 802.1Q VLAN and enter VLAN Configuration Mode. To delete the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, please use no vlan command.

Syntax

vlan vlan-list no vlan vlan-list

Parameter

vlan-list Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID list, ranging from 2 to 4094, in the format of 2-3, 5. It is multi-optional.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create VLAN 2-10 and VLAN 100:

Switch(config)# vlan 2-10,100

Delete VLAN 2:

Switch(config)# no vlan 2

125

15.2 name Description

The name command is used to assign a description to a VLAN. To clear the description, please use no name command.

Syntax

name descript no name

Parameter

descript String to describe the VLAN, which contains 16 characters at most.

Command Mode

VLAN Configuration Mode(VLAN)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the name of VLAN 2 as group1:

Switch(config)# vlan 2

Switch(config-vlan)# name group1

15.3 vlan_trunk (globally)

Description

The vlan_trunk command is used to enable VLAN Trunk globally. To disable VLAN Trunk, use the no vlan_trunk command.

Syntax

vlan_trunk no vlan_trunk

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

126

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable VLAN Trunk globally:

Switch(config)#vlan_trunk

15.4 vlan_trunk (interface)

Description

The vlan_trunk command is used to enable VLAN Trunk for the desired port. When enabled, all packets in VLANs will pass through this port. To disable VLAN Trunk, use the no vlan_trunk command. By default, it is disabled.

Syntax

vlan_trunk no vlan_trunk

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable VLAN Trunk for port 1/0/3:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)#vlan_trunk

15.5 switchport general allowed vlan

Description

The switchport general allowed vlan command is used to add the desired port to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, or to remove a port from the corresponding VLAN.

127

Syntax

switchport general allowed vlan vlan-list { tagged | untagged }

no switchport general allowed vlan vlan-list

Parameter

vlan-list VLAN ID list, ranging from 2 to 4094, in the format of 2-3, 5. It is multi-optional.

tagged | untagged egress-rule.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/4 whose link type is general to VLAN 2 and its egress-rule as tagged:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4

Switch(config-if)#switchport general allowed vlan 2 tagged

15.6 switchport pvid Description

The switchport pvid command is used to configure the PVID for the switch ports.

Syntax

switchport pvid vlan-id

Parameter

vlan-id VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

128

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the PVID of port 1/0/2 as 2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# switchport pvid 2

15.7 switchport check ingress Description

The switchport check ingress command is used to enable the Ingress Checking function for the switch ports. With this function enabled, the port will accept the packet of which the VLAN ID is in the port's VLAN list and discard others. With this function disabled, the port will forward the packet directly. To disable this function, please use no switchport check ingress command.

Syntax

switchport check ingress no switchport check ingress

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable Ingress Checking on the port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# switchport check ingress

129

15.8 switchport acceptable frame

Description

The switchport acceptable frame command is used to specify the acceptable frame type for the switch ports and the ports will perform this operation before Ingress Checking. To restore to the default setting, please use no switchport acceptable frame command.

Syntax

switchport acceptable frame { all | tagged }

no switchport acceptable frame

Parameter

all | tagged the acceptable frame type.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the acceptable frame type of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/4 as tagged:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4

Switch(config-if)#switchport acceptable frame general

15.9 show vlan summary Description

The show vlan summary command is used to display the summarized information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN.

Syntax

show vlan summary

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

130

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the summarized information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN:

Switch(config)# show vlan summary

15.10 show vlan brief Description

The show vlan brief command is used to display the brief information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN.

Syntax

show vlan brief

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the brief information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN:

Switch(config)# show vlan brief

15.11 show vlan Description

The show vlan command is used to display the information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN.

Syntax

show vlan [ id vlan-id ]

Parameter

vlan-id Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. It is multi-optional. Using the show vlan command without parameter displays the detailed information of all VLANs.

131

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the information of vlan 5:

Switch(config)# show vlan id 5

15.12 show interface switchport Description

The show interface switchport command is used to display the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN configuration information of the specified port/port channel.

Syntax

show interface switchport [fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameter

port The port number. port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the VLAN configuration information of all ports and port channels:

Switch(config)# show interface switchport

132

Chapter 16 MAC-based VLAN Commands

MAC VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is the way to classify the VLANs based on MAC Address. A MAC address is relative to a single VLAN ID. The untagged packets and the priority-tagged packets coming from the MAC address will be tagged with this VLAN ID.

16.1 mac-vlan mac-address

Description

The mac-vlan mac-address command is used to create a MAC-based VLAN entry. To delete a MAC-based VLAN entry, please use the no mac-vlan mac-address command.

Syntax

mac-vlan mac-address mac-addr vlan vlan-id [description descript]

no mac-vlan mac-address mac-addr

Parameter

mac-addr MAC address, in the format of XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX.

vlan-id Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.

descript Give a description to the MAC address for identification, which contains 8 characters at most.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create VLAN 2 with the MAC address 00:11:11:01:01:12 and the name TP:

Switch(config)#mac-vlan mac-address 00:11:11:01:01:12 vlan 2

description TP

133

16.2 mac-vlan

Description

The mac-vlan command is used to enable a port for the MAC-based VLAN feature. Only the port is enabled can the configured MAC-based VLAN take effect. To disable the MAC-based VLAN function, please use no mac-vlan command. All the ports are disabled by default.

Syntax

mac-vlan

no mac-vlan

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 for the MAC-based VLAN feature:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)#mac-vlan

16.3 show mac-vlan

Description

The show mac-vlan command is used to display the information of the MAC-based VLAN entry. MAC address and VLAN ID can be used to filter the displayed information.

Syntax

show mac-vlan { all | mac-address mac-addr | vlan vlan-id }

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

134

Privilege Requirement

None.

Parameter

mac-addr MAC address, in the format of XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX.

vlan-id Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.

Example

Display the information of all the MAC-based VLAN entry:

Switch(config)#show mac-vlan all

16.4 show mac-vlan interface

Description

The show mac-vlan interface command is used to display the port state of MAC-based VLAN.

Syntax

show mac-vlan interface

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the enable state of all the ports:

Switch(config)#show mac-vlan interface

135

Chapter 17 Protocol-based VLAN Commands

Protocol VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is the way to classify VLANs based on Protocols. A Protocol is relative to a single VLAN ID. The untagged packets and the priority-tagged packets matching the protocol template will be tagged with this VLAN ID.

17.1 protocol-vlan template

Description

The protocol-vlan template command is used to create Protocol-based VLAN template. To delete Protocol-based VLAN template, please use no protocol-vlan template command.

Syntax

protocol-vlan template name protocol-name frame { ether_2 ether-type type | snap ether-type type | llc dsap dsap_type ssap ssap_type }

no protocol-vlan template template-idx

Parameter

protocol-name Give a name for the Protocol-based VLAN Template , which contains 8 characters at most.

ether_2 ether-type type Specify the Ethernet type.

snap ether-type type Specify the Ethernet type.

llc dsap dsap_type ssap ssap_type Specify the DSAP type and the SSAP type.

template-idx The number of the Protocol-based VLAN Template. You can get the template corresponding to the number by theshow protocol-vlan template command.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

136

Example

Create a Protocol-based VLAN template named TP whose Ethernet protocol type is 0x2024:

Switch(config)#protocol-vlan template name TP frame ether_2 ether-type

2024

17.2 protocol-vlan vlan

Description

The protocol-vlan vlan command is used to create a Protocol-based VLAN entry. To delete a Protocol-based VLAN entry, please use no protocol-vlan vlan command.

Syntax

protocol-vlan vlan vlan-id priority priority template template-idx

no protocol-vlan vlan group-idx

Parameter

vlan-id Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1-4094.

priority Specify the 802.1p priority for the packets that belong to the protocol VLAN, ranging from 07. The switch will determine the forwarding sequence according this value. The packets with larger value of 802.1p priority have the higher priority.

template-idx The number of the Protocol-based VLAN Template. You can get the template corresponding to the number by theshow protocol-vlan template command.

group-idx The number of the Protocol-based VLAN entry. You can get the Protocol-based VLAN entry corresponding to the number by theshow protocol-vlan vlan command.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

137

Example

Create Protocol-based VLAN 2 and bind it with Protocol-based VLAN Template 3:

Switch(config)#protocol-vlan vlan 2 template 3

17.3 protocol-vlan group

Description

The protocol-vlan command is used to add the port to a specified protocol group. To remove the port from this protocol group, please use no protocol-vlan group command.

Syntax

protocol-vlan group index

no protocol-vlan group index

Parameter

index Specify the protocol group ID.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Add Gigabit Ethernet port 20 to protocol group 1:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20

Switch(config-if)#protocol-vlan group 1

17.4 show protocol-vlan template

Description

The show protocol-vlan template command is used to display the information of the Protocol-based VLAN templates.

138

Syntax

show protocol-vlan template

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the information of the Protocol-based VLAN templates:

Switch(config)#show protocol-vlan template

17.5 show protocol-vlan vlan

Description

The show protocol-vlan vlan command is used to display the information about Protocol-based VLAN entry.

Syntax

show protocol-vlan vlan

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display information of the Protocol-based VLAN entry:

Switch(config)#show protocol-vlan vlan

139

Chapter 18 Private VLAN Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Note: Private VLAN commands are only available on certain devices.

Private VLANs are configured specially for saving VLAN resource of uplink devices and decreasing broadcast.

18.1 private-vlan primary

Description

The private-vlan primary command is used to configure the designated VLAN as the primary VLAN of the Private VLAN. To remove the primary VLAN property pf the current VLAN, please use no private-vlan primary command.

Syntax

private-vlan primary

no private-vlan primary

Command Mode

VLAN Configuration Mode (VLAN)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the VLAN 3 as the primary VLAN of the private VLAN:

T2600G-28TS(config)#vlan 3

T2600G-28TS(config-vlan)#private-vlan primary

18.2 private-vlan community

Description

The private-vlan community command is used to configure the designated VLAN as the community VLAN of the Private VLAN. To remove the community VLAN property pf the current VLAN, please use no private-vlan community command.

140

Syntax

private-vlan community

no private-vlan community

Command Mode

VLAN Configuration Mode (VLAN)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the VLAN 4 as the community VLAN of the private VLAN:

T2600G-28TS(config)#vlan 4

T2600G-28TS(config-vlan)#private-vlan community

18.3 private-vlan isolated

Description

The private-vlan isolated command is used to configure the designated VLAN as the isolated VLAN of the Private VLAN. To remove the isolated VLAN property pf the current VLAN, please use no private-vlan isolated command.

Syntax

private-vlan isolated

no private-vlan isolated

Command Mode

VLAN Configuration Mode (VLAN)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the VLAN 3 as the isolated VLAN of the private VLAN:

T2600G-28TS(config)#vlan 3

T2600G-28TS(config-vlan)#private-vlan isolated

141

18.4 private-vlan association

Description

The private-vlan association command is used to associate primary VLAN with secondary VLAN. To exterminate the currently association, please use no private-vlan association command.

Syntax

private-vlan association vlan_list

no private-vlan association vlan_list

Parameter

vlan_list Secondary VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094.

Command Mode

VLAN Configuration Mode (VLAN)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Associate primary VLAN 3 with community VLAN 4 as a private VLAN:

T2600G-28TS(config)#vlan 3

T2600G-28TS(config-vlan)#private-vlan association 4

18.5 switchport private-vlan

Description

The switchport private-vlan command is used to configure the private VLAN mode for the switchport. To invalid the configuration, please use no switchport private-vlan command.

Syntax

switchport private-vlan { promiscuous | host}

no switchport private-vlan

Parameter

promiscuous | host Configure the private VLAN mode for the switchport.

142

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure Gigabit Ethernet port 3 as host:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host

18.6 switchport private-vlan host-association

Description

The switchport private-vlan host-association command is used to add host type port to private VLAN. To remove the port from Private VLAN, please use no switchport private-vlan host-association command.

Syntax

switchport private-vlan host-association primary_vlan_id secondary_vlan_id vlantype

no switchport private-vlan host-association

Parameter

primary-vlan-id Primary VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094.

secondary-vlan-id Secondary VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094.

vlantype Specify the type of the secondary VLAN, either community or isolated.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

143

Example

Configure host type Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 as a member of primary VLAN 3 and secondary VLAN 4, with the type of VLAN 4 as community:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 3 4

community

18.7 switchport private-vlan mapping

Description

The switchport private-vlan mapping command is used to add promiscuous type port to private VLAN. To remove the port from Private VLAN, please use no switchport private-vlan mapping command.

Syntax

switchport private-vlan mapping primary_vlan_id secondary_vlan_id

no switchport private-vlan mapping

Parameter

primary-vlan-id Primary VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094.

secondary-vlan-id Secondary VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure promiscuous type Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 as a member of primary VLAN 3 and secondary VLAN 4:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport private-vlan mapping 3 4

144

18.8 show vlan private-vlan

Description

The show vlan private-vlan command is used to display the Private VLAN configuration information of the switch.

Syntax

show vlan private-vlan

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display the configuration information of all Private VLAN:

T2600G-28TS(config)#show vlan private-vlan

18.9 show vlan private-vlan interface

Description

The show vlan private-vlan interface command is used to display the Private VLAN configuration information of the specified port(s).

Syntax

show vlan private-vlan interface [fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameter

port The port number. port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

145

Example

Display the configuration information of all the Ethernet ports:

T2600G-28TS(config)#show vlan private-vlan interface

146

Chapter 19 VLAN-VPN Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Note: VLAN-VPN commands are only available on certain devices.

VLAN-VPN (Virtual Private Network) function, the implement of a simple and flexible Layer 2 VPN technology, allows the packets with VLAN tags of private networks to be encapsulated with VLAN tags of public networks at the network access terminal of the Internet Service Provider. And these packets will be transmitted with double-tag across the public networks.

19.1 dot1q-tunnel

Description

The dot1q-tunnel command is used to enable the VLAN-VPN function globally. To disable the VLAN-VPN function, please use the no dot1q-tunnel command.

Syntax

dot1q-tunnel no dot1q-tunnel

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the VLAN-VPN function globally:

T2600G-28TS(config)#dot1q-tunnel

19.2 switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid

Description

The switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid command is used to configure Global TPID for the ports. To restore to the default value, please use the no switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid command.

147

Syntax

switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid tpid no switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid

Parameter

tpid The value of Global TPID. It must be 4 Hex integers. By default, it is 8100.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure TPID of port 1/0/2 as 0x9100:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid 9100

19.3 dot1q-tunnel mapping

Description

The dot1q-tunnel mapping command is used to enable the VLAN Mapping feature globally. To disable this function, please use the no dot1q-tunnel mapping command. By default, the VLAN Mapping feature is disabled.

Syntax

dot1q-tunnel mapping no dot1q-tunnel mapping

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

148

Example

Enable the VLAN mapping feature globally:

T2600G-28TS(config)#dot1q-tunnel mapping

19.4 switchport dot1q-tunnel mode

Description

The switchport dot1q-tunnel mode command is used to configure the VPN ports mode. To close this VPN port, please use the no switchport dot1q-tunnel mode command. By default, no port has been configured as the VPN port. The VPN port mode uni and nni cannot switch to each other directly, so please close the VPN port and switch to the other mode if needed.

Syntax

switchport dot1q-tunnel mode { uni | nni } no switchport dot1q-tunnel mode

Parameter

uni The port connected to the clients. nni The port connected to the ISP.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 as the VPN UNI ports:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel mode uni

149

19.5 switchport dot1q-tunnel missdrop

Note:

For some devices, Missdrop can only be enabled on UNI ports.

For other devices, Missdrop can only be enabled on NNI ports.

Description

The switchport dot1q-tunnel missdrop command is used to enable the VLAN-VPN missdrop function for a specific port. To disable the VLAN-VPN missdrop function, please use the no switchport dot1q-tunnel missdrop command.

Syntax

switchport dot1q-tunnel missdrop no switchport dot1q-tunnel missdrop

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the VLAN-VPN missdrop function for Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel missdrop

19.6 switchport dot1q-tunnel use_inner_priority

Description

The switchport dot1q-tunnel use_inner_priority command is used to use the inner 802.1p priority. To disable this function, please use the no switchport dot1q-tunnel use_inner_priority command.

Syntax

switchport dot1q-tunnel use_inner_priority

150

no switchport dot1q-tunnel use_inner_priority

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the use inner priority function for Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel use_inner_priority

19.7 switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping

Note:

For some devices, choose a UNI port to enable VLAN mapping.

For other devices, choose a NNI port to enable VLAN mapping.

Description

The switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping command is used add the VLAN Mapping entry on a specified port. To delete the VLAN Mapping entry on this port, please use the no switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping command.

Syntax

switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping c-vlan sp-vlan [ descript ] no switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping [ c-vlan ]

Parameter

c-vlan Customer VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. sp-vlan Service Provider VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. descript Give a Description to the VLAN Mapping entry, which contains 16 characters at most.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

151

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Add a VLAN Mapping entry on the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 with the Customer VLAN as VLAN 2 and the Service Provider VLAN as VLAN 3:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping 2 3

19.8 switchport dot1q-tunnel replace

Description

The switchport dot1q-tunnel replace command is used to replace the customer VLAN ID with a VLAN ID of service provider on a specified port. To delete the VLAN Replace entry on this port, please use the no switchport dot1q-tunnel replace command.

Syntax

switchport dot1q-tunnel replace c-vlan sp-vlan [ descript ] no switchport dot1q-tunnel replace [ c-vlan ]

Parameters

c-vlan Customer VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. sp-vlan Service Provider VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. descript Give a Description to the VLAN Mapping entry, which contains 16 characters at most.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines Before configuring VLAN Replace, enable VLAN Mapping globally.

152

Example

Add a VLAN Replace entry on the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 to replace the Customer VLAN (VLAN 2) with the Service Provider VLAN (VLAN 3):

T2600G-28TS(config)# switchport dot1q-tunnel replace 2 3

19.9 show dot1q-tunnel

Description

The show dot1q-tunnel command is used to display the global configuration information of the VLAN VPN.

Syntax

show dot1q-tunnel

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the global configuration information of the VLAN VPN:

T2600G-28TS(config)#show dot1q-tunnel

19.10 show dot1q-tunnel mapping

Description

The show dot1q-tunnel mapping command is used to display the information of VLAN Mapping entry.

Syntax

show dot1q-tunnel mapping

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

153

Example

Display the information of VLAN Mapping entry:

T2600G-28TS(config)#show dot1q-tunnel mapping

19.11 show dot1q-tunnel interface

Description

The show dot1q-tunnel mapping interface command is used to display the VLAN VPN port type.

Syntax

show dot1q-tunnel interface

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the port type of all VLAN VPN ports:

T2600G-28TS(config)#show dot1q-tunnel interface

154

Chapter 20 GVRP Commands

GVRP (GARP VLAN registration protocol) is an implementation of GARP (generic attribute registration protocol). GVRP allows the switch to automatically add or remove the VLANs via the dynamic VLAN registration information and propagate the local VLAN registration information to other switches, without having to individually configure each VLAN.

20.1 gvrp Description

The gvrp command is used to enable the GVRP function globally. To disable the GVRP function, please use no gvrp command.

Syntax

gvrp

no gvrp

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the GVRP function globally:

Switch(config)#gvrp

20.2 gvrp (interface) Description

The gvrp command is used to enable the GVRP function for the desired port. To disable it, please use no gvrp command. The GVRP feature can only be enabled for the trunk-type ports.

Syntax

gvrp

155

no gvrp

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the GVRP function for Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/2-6:

Switch(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-6

Switch(config-if-range)#gvrp

20.3 gvrp registration Description

The gvrp registration command is used to configure the GVRP registration type for the desired port. To restore to the default value, please use no gvrp registration command.

Syntax

gvrp registration { normal | fixed | forbidden }

no gvrp registration

Parameter

normal | fixed | forbidden Registration mode. By default, the registration mode is normal.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

156

Example

Configure the GVRP registration mode as fixed for Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/2-6:

Switch(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-6

Switch(config-if-range)#gvrp registration fixed

20.4 gvrp timer Description

The gvrp timer command is used to set a GVRP timer for the desired port. To restore to the default setting of a GARP timer, please use no gvrp timer command.

Syntax

gvrp timer { leaveall | join | leave } value

no gvrp timer [leaveall | join | leave]

Parameter

leaveall | join | leave They are the three timers: leave All, join and leave. Once the LeaveAll Timer is set, the port with GVRP enabled can send a LeaveAll message after the timer times out, so that other GARP ports can re-register all the attribute information. After that, the LeaveAll timer will start to begin a new cycle. To guarantee the transmission of the Join messages, a GARP port sends each Join message two times. The Join Timer is used to define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join message. Once the Leave Timer is set, the GARP port receiving a Leave message will start its Leave timer, and deregister the attribute information if it does not receive a Join message again before the timer times out.

value The value of the timer. The LeaveAll Timer ranges from 1000 to 30000 centiseconds and the default value is 1000 centiseconds. The Join Timer ranges from 20 to 1000 centiseconds and the default value is 20 centiseconds. The Leave Timer ranges from 60 to 3000 centiseconds and the default value is 60 centiseconds.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

157

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Set the GARP leaveall timer of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/6 as 2000 centiseconds and restore the join timer of it to the default value:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/6

Switch(config-if)#gvrp timer leaveall 2000

Switch(config-if)#no gvrp timer join

20.5 show gvrp interface Description

The show gvrp interface command is used to display the GVRP configuration information of a specified Ethernet port or of all Ethernet ports.

Syntax

show gvrp interface [fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameter

port The port number. port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the GVRP configuration information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1:

Switch(config)#show gvrp interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Display the GVRP configuration information of all Ethernet ports:

Switch(config)#show gvrp interface

158

20.6 show gvrp global Description

The show gvrp global command is used to display the global GVRP status.

Syntax

show gvrp global

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the global GVRP status:

Switch(config)#show gvrp global

159

Chapter 21 IGMP Snooping Commands

IGMP Snooping (Internet Group Management Protocol Snooping) is a multicast control mechanism running on Layer 2 switch. It can effectively prevent multicast groups being broadcasted in the network.

21.1 ip igmp snooping (global) Description

The ip igmp snooping command is used to configure IGMP Snooping globally. To disable the IGMP Snooping function, please use no ip igmp snooping command.

Syntax ip igmp snooping

no ip igmp snooping

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable IGMP Snooping function:

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping

21.2 ip igmp snooping version Description

The ip igmp snooping version command is used to configure IGMP version globally. To return to the default configuration, please use no ip igmp snooping version command.

Syntax ip igmp snooping version {v1 | v2 | v3 }

no ip igmp snooping version

160

Parameter v1 | v2 | v3 Specify the IGMP version. By default, it is IGMP v3.

v1: The switch works as an IGMPv1 Snooping switch. It can only process IGMPv1 messages from the host. Report messages of other versions are ignored.

v2: The switch works as an IGMPv2 Snooping switch. It can process both IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 messages from the host. IGMPv3 messages are ignored.

v3: The switch works as an IGMPv3 Snooping switch. It can process IGMPv1, IGMPv2 and IGMPv3 messages from the host.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Specify the IGMP version as v2:

Switch (config)# ip igmp snooping version v2

21.3 ip igmp snooping drop-unknown Description

The ip igmp snooping drop-unknown command is used to configure the way how the switch processes multicast streams that are sent to unknown multicast groups as Discard. By default, it is Forward. To return to the default configuration, please use no ip igmp snooping drop-unknown command.

Syntax ip igmp snooping drop-unknown

no ip igmp snooping drop-unknown

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Specify the operation to process unknown multicast as discard:

161

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping drop-unknown

21.4 ip igmp snooping header-validation Description

The ip igmp snooping header-validation command is used to enable IGMP Header Validation globally. To disable the IGMP Header Validation function, please use no ip igmp snooping header-validation command. Generally, for IGMP packets, the TTL value should be 1, ToS field should be 0xC0, and Router Alert option should be 0x94040000. The fields to be validated depend on the IGMP version being used. IGMPv1 only checks the TTL field. IGMPv2 checks the TTL field and the Router Alert option. IGMPv3 checks TTL field, ToS field and Router Alert option. Packets that fail the validation process will be dropped.

Syntax ip igmp snooping header-validation

no ip igmp snooping header-validation

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable IGMP Header Validation:

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping header-validation

21.5 ip igmp snooping vlan-config Description

The ip igmp snooping vlan-config command is used to enable VLAN IGMP Snooping function or to modify IGMP Snooping parameters. To disable the VLAN IGMP Snooping function, please use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config command. To restore the default values, please use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config with specified parameters.

Syntax ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list [ rtime router-time | mtime member-time | ltime leave-time ]

162

no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list [ rtime | mtime | ltime ]

Parameter vlan-id-list The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.

router-time The Router Port Aging Time. Within this time, if the switch does not receive IGMP query message from the router port, it will consider this port is not a router port any more. Valid values are from 60 to 600 in seconds, and the default value is 300 seconds.

member-time The Member Port Aging Time. Within this time, if the switch does not receive IGMP report message from the member port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more. Valid values are from 60 to 600 in seconds, and the default value is 260 seconds.

leave-time The Leave Time. Valid values are from 1 to 30 in seconds, and the default value is 1 second. When the switch receives a leave message from a port to leave a multicast group, it will wait for a Leave Time before removing the port from the multicast group. During the period, if the switch receives any report messages from the port, the port will not be removed from the multicast group. Exceptions are as follows:

If the member port ages out before the Leave Time ends and no report messages are received, the port will be removed from the multicast group once its Member Port Aging Time ends.

The Leave Time mechanism will not take effect when Fast Leave takes effect.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the IGMP Snooping function and modify Router Port Aging Time as 300 seconds, Member Port Aging Time as 200 seconds for VLAN 1-3:

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-3 rtime 300

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-3 mtime 200

163

21.6 ip igmp snooping vlan-config

(immediate-leave) Description

This command is used to enable the Fast Leave feature for specific VLANs. To disable Fast Leave on the VLANs, please use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list immediate-leave command. This function is disabled by default.

Syntax ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list immediate-leave

no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list immediate-leave

Parameter vlan-id-list The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the Fast Leave for VLAN 1-3:

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-3 immediate-leave

21.7 ip igmp snooping vlan-config

(report-suppression) Description

This command is used to enable the IGMP Report Suppression function for specific VLANs. When enabled, the switch will only forward the first IGMP report message for each multicast group to the IGMP querier and suppress subsequent IGMP report messages for the same multicast group during one query interval. This feature prevents duplicate report messages from being sent to the IGMP querier. To disable the IGMP report suppression function and forward all the IGMP reports to the Layer 3 device in specific VLANs,

164

please use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list report-suppression command. This function is disabled by default.

Syntax ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list report-suppression

no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list report-suppression

Parameter vlan-id-list The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the IGMP Report Suppression for VLAN 1-3:

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-3 report-suppression

21.8 ip igmp snooping vlan-config

(router-ports-forbidden) Description

This command is used to forbid the specified ports as being router ports in the specified VLAN(s). To delete the forbidden router ports, please use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list router-ports-forbidd command.

Syntax ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list router-ports-forbidd interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-list }

no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list router-ports-forbidd interface [ gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-list ]

Parameter vlan-id-list The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.

port-list Forbid the specified ports as being router ports. Packets sent from multicast routers to these ports will be discarded.

165

port-channel-list Forbid the specified port-channels as being router ports. Packets sent from multicast routers to these port-channels will be discarded.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Forbid the Ethernet ports 1/0/1-3 as being router ports in VLAN 1 :

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1 router-ports-forbidd

interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3

21.9 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (rport interface) Description

This command is used to specify the static router ports for specific VLANs. To delete the static router ports, please use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list rport interface command.

Syntax ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list rport interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-list }

no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list rport interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-list }

Parameter vlan-id-list The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.

port-list The list of Ethernet ports.

port-channel-list The ID of the port channels.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

166

Example Set the router port as 1/0/1 for VLAN 1-2:

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-2 rport interface

gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

21.10 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (static) Description

This command is used to configure interfaces to statically join a multicast group. To remove interfaces from a static multicast group, please use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list staticcommand.

Syntax ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list static ip interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-list }

no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list static ip interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-list }

Parameter vlan-id-list The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.

ip Specify the IP address of the multicast group that the hosts want to join.

port-list The list of Ethernet ports.

port-channel-list The ID of the port channels.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure port ports 1/0/1-3 in VLAN 2 to statically join multicast group 225.0.0.1:

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 2 static 225.0.0.1 interface

gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3

167

21.11 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (querier) Description

This command is used to enable the IGMP Snooping Querier feature for specific VLANs. To disable the IGMP Snooping Querier feature on the VLANs, please use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list querier command without any parameters. To restore the default values, please use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list querier command with specified parameters.

Syntax ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list querier [ max-response-time response-time | query-interval interval | general-query source-ip ip-addr | last-member-query-count count | last-member-query-interval interval ]

no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list querier [ max-response-time | query-interval | general-query source-ip | last-member-query-count ]

Parameter vlan-id-list The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.

response-time The hosts maximum response time to general query messages. Valid values are from 1 to 25 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.

query-interval interval The interval between general query messages sent by the switch. Valid values are from 10 to 300 seconds, and the default value is 60 seconds.

ip-addr The source IP address of the general query messages sent by the switch. It should be a unicast address. By default, it is 0.0.0.0.

count The number of group-specific queries to be sent. With IGMP Snooping Querier enabled, when the switch receives an IGMP leave message, it obtains the address of the multicast group that the host wants to leave from the message. Then the switch sends out group-specific queries to this multicast group through the port receiving the leave message. If specified count of group-specific queries are sent and no report message is received, the switch will delete the multicast address from the multicast forwarding table. Valid values are from 1 to 5, and the default value is 2.

last-member-query-interval interval The interval between group- specific queries.. Valid values are from 1 to 5 seconds, and the default value is 1 second.

168

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the IGMP Snooping Querier for VLAN 3, and configure the query interval as 100 seconds:

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 3 querier

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 3 querier query interval 100

21.12 ip igmp snooping (interface) Description

The ip igmp snooping command is used to enable the IGMP Snooping function for the desired port. To disable the IGMP Snooping function, please use no ip igmp snooping command.

Syntax ip igmp snooping

no ip igmp snooping

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable IGMP Snooping function of port 1/0/3:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# ip igmp snooping

169

21.13 ip igmp snooping max-groups Description

The ip igmp snooping max-groups command is used to configure the maximum number of groups that a port can join in. The ip igmp snooping max-groups action is used to configure the action that the port takes when it receives an IGMP report message and the maximum number of entries is in the forwarding table. To remove the maximum group limitation and return to the default of no limitation on the specified port, please use the no ip igmp snooping max-groups command. To return to the default action of dropping the report, please use the no ip igmp snooping max-groups action command. These commands only apply to the dynamic multicast groups.

Syntax ip igmp snooping max-groups maxgroup

ip igmp snooping max-groups action { drop | replace }

no ip igmp snooping max-groups

no ip igmp snooping max-groups action

Parameter maxgroup Specify the maximum numbers of groups that the port can join. It ranges from 0 to 1000 and the default value is 1000.

drop When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port joins has exceeded the max-group, the port will not join any new multicast group.

replace When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port joins has exceeded the max-group, the newly joined multicast group will replace an existing multicast group with the lowest multicast group address.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Specify the maximum numbers of groups that ports 1/0/2-5 can join as 10, and configure the throttling action as replace:

Switch(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-5

170

Switch(config-if-range)#ip igmp snooping max-groups 10

Switch(config-if-range)#ip igmp snooping max-groups action replace

21.14 ip igmp snooping immediate-leave Description

The ip igmp snooping immediate-leave command is used to configure the Fast Leave function for port. To disable the Fast Leave function, please use no ip igmp snooping immediate-leave command.

Syntax ip igmp snooping immediate-leave

no ip igmp snooping immediate-leave

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the Fast Leave function for port 1/0/3:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# ip igmp snooping immediate-leave

21.15 ip igmp snooping authentication

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description

The ip igmp snooping authenticaiton command is used to authenticate the users who want to join the limited multicast source. To disable the multicast authentication, please use no ip igmp snooping authentication command.

Syntax

ip igmp snooping authentication

no ip igmp snooping authentication

171

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines The IGMP Authentication feature will take effect only when AAA function is enabled and the RADIUS server is configured. For how to enable AAA function and configure RADIUS server, please refer to aaa enable and radius-server host.

Example

Enable IGMP authentication on port 1/0/3:

T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip igmp snooping authentication

21.16 ip igmp snooping accounting

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description

The ip igmp snooping accounting command is used to enable IGMP accounting globally. To disable the IGMP accouting, please use no ip igmp snooping accounting command.

Syntax

ip igmp snooping accounting

no ip igmp snooping accounting

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

172

Example

Enable IGMP accounting globally:

T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping accounting

21.17 ip igmp profile Description

The ip igmp profile command is used to create the configuration profile. To delete the corresponding profile, please use no ip igmp profile command.

Syntax

ip igmp profile id

no ip igmp profile id

Parameter

id Specify the id of the configuration profile, ranging from 1 to 999.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create the profile 1:

Switch(config)# ip igmp profile 1

21.18 deny Description

The deny command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as deny.

Syntax

deny

Command Mode

Profile Configuration Mode

173

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as deny:

Switch(config)# ip igmp profile 1 Switch(config-igmp-profile)#deny

21.19 permit Description

The permit command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as permit.

Syntax

permit

Command Mode

Profile Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as permit:

Switch(config)# ip igmp profile 1 Switch(config-igmp-profile)#permit

21.20 range Description

The range command is used to configure the range of the profiles filtering multicast address. To delete the corresponding filtering multicast address, please use no range command. A profile contains 16 filtering IP-range entries at most.

174

Syntax

range start-ip end-ip

no range start-ip end-ip

Parameter

start-ip The start filtering multicast IP address.

end-ip The end filtering multicast IP address.

Command Mode

Profile Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure one of the filter multicast address entry as range 225.1.1.1 to 226.3.2.1 in profile 1:

Switch(config)# ip igmp profile 1 Switch(config-igmp-profile)#range 225.1.1.1 226.3.2.1

21.21 ip igmp filter Description

The ip igmp filter command is used to bind the specified profile to the interface. To delete the binding, please use no ip igmp filter command.

Syntax ip igmp filter profile-id no ip igmp filter

Parameter profile-id Specify the profile ID, ranging from 1 to 999.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

175

Example Bind profile 1 to interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# ip igmp filter 1

21.22 clear ip igmp snooping statistics Description

The clear ip igmp snooping statistics command is used to clear the statistics of the IGMP packets.

Syntax clear ip igmp snooping statistics

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Clear the statistics of the IGMP packets:

Switch(config)# clear ip igmp snooping statistics

21.23 show ip igmp snooping Description

The show ip igmp snooping command is used to display the global configuration of IGMP snooping.

Syntax show ip igmp snooping

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the global configuration of IGMP:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping

176

21.24 show ip igmp snooping interface Description

The show ip igmp snooping interface command is used to display the port configuration of IGMP snooping. If no interface is specified, it displays all interfaces IGMP snooping configurations.

Syntax show ip igmp snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet [port-list ] | port-channel [port-channel-list ] ] { authentication | basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat }

Parameter port-list The list of Ethernet ports.

Port-channel-list The list of port channels.

authentication | basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat The related configuration information selected to display.

Note: Authentication is only available on certain devices.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the IGMP baisic configuration configuration of all ports and port channels:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping interface basic-config

Display the IGMP basic configuration of port 1/0/2:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

basic-config

Display the IGMP packet statistics of ports 1/0/1-4:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-4

packet-stat

177

21.25 show ip igmp snooping vlan Description

The show ip igmp snooping vlan command is used to display the VLAN configuration of IGMP snooping.

Syntax show ip igmp snooping vlan [ vlan-id ]

Parameter vlan-id The VLAN ID selected to display.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the IGMP snooping configuration information of VLAN 2:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping vlan 2

21.26 show ip igmp snooping groups Description

The show ip igmp snooping groups command is used to display the information of all IGMP snooping groups. It can be extended to some other commands to display the dynamic and static multicast information of a selected VLAN.

Syntax show ip igmp snooping groups [ vlan {vlan-id } ] [ multicast_addr | count | dynamic | dynamic count | static | static count ]

Parameter vlan-id The VLAN ID selected to display the information of all multicast items.

multicast_addr IP address of the multicast group.

count The numbers of all multicast groups.

dynamic Display dynamic multicast groups.

dynamic count The numbers of all dynamic multicast groups.

178

static Display static multicast groups.

static count The numbers of all static multicast groups.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the information of all IGMP snooping groups:

Switch#show ip igmp snooping groups

Display all the multicast entries in VLAN 5:

Switch(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5

Display the count of multicast entries in VLAN 5:

Switch(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 count

Display the dynamic multicast groups of VLAN 5

Switch(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 dynamic

Display the static multicast groups of VLAN 5

Switch(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 static

Display the count of dynamic multicast entries of VLAN 5

Switch(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 dynamic count

Display the count of static multicast entries of VLAN 5

Switch(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 static count

21.27 show ip igmp profile Description

The show ip igmp profile command is used to display the configuration information of all the profiles or a specific profile.

Syntax

show ip igmp profile [ id ]

Parameter

id Specify the ID of the profile, ranging from 1 to 999.

179

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the configuration information of all profiles:

Switch(config)# show ip igmp profile

180

Chapter 22 MLD Snooping Commands

MLD Snooping (Multicast Listener Discovery Snooping) is a multicast control mechanism running on Layer 2 switch. It can effectively prevent multicast groups being broadcasted in the IPv6 network.

22.1 ipv6 mld snooping (global) Description

The ipv6 mld snooping command is used to enable MLD Snooping function globally. If this function is disabled, all related MLD Snooping function would not work. To disable this function, please use no ipv6 mld snooping command.

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping no ipv6 mld snooping

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable MLD Snooping:

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping

22.2 ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown Description

The ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown command is used to enable the unknown multicast packets filter function. To disable this function, please use no ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown command. By default, it is disabled.

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown no ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

181

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable unknown multicast filter function:

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown

22.3 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config Description

The ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config command is used to enable VLAN MLD Snooping function or to modify MLD Snooping parameters. To disable the VLAN MLD Snooping function, please use no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config command.

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list [ rtime router-time | mtime member-time | ltime leave-time ]

no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list [ rtime | mtime | ltime ]

Parameter vlan-id-list The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.

router-time The Router Port Aging Time. Within this time, if the switch does not receive any MLD query messages from the router port, it will consider this port is not a router port any more. Valid values are from 60 to 600 in seconds, and the default value is 300 seconds.

member-time The Member Port Aging Time. Within this time, if the switch does not receive any MLD report messages from the member port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more. Valid values are from 60 to 600 in seconds, and the default value is 260 seconds.

leave-time The Leave Time. Valid values are from 1 to 30 in seconds, and the default value is 1 second. When the switch receives a done message from a port to leave a multicast group, it will wait for a Leave Time before removing the port from the multicast group. During the period, if the switch receives any report messages from the port, the port will not be removed from the multicast group. Exceptions are as follows:

If the member port ages out before the Leave Time ends and no report messages are received, the port will be removed from the multicast group once its Member Port Aging Time ends.

182

The Leave Time mechanism will not take effect when Fast Leave takes effect.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the MLD Snooping function and modify Router Port Time as 300 seconds, Member Port Time as 200 seconds for VLAN 1-3:

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-3 rtime 300

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-3 mtime 200

22.4 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config

(immediate-leave) Description

This command is used to enable the Fast Leave feature for specific VLANs. To disable Fast Leave on the VLANs, please use no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list immediate-leave command. This function is disabled by default.

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list immediate-leave

no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list immediate-leave

Parameter vlan-id-list The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the Fast Leave for VLAN 1-3:

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-3 immediate-leave

183

22.5 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config

(report-suppression) Description

This command is used to enable the MLD Report Suppression function for specific VLANs. When enabled, the switch will only forward the first MLD report message for each multicast group to the MLD querier and suppress subsequent MLD report messages for the same multicast group during one query interval. This feature prevents duplicate report messages from being sent to the MLD querier. To disable the MLD report suppression function and forward all the MLD reports to the Layer 3 device in specific VLANs, please use no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list report-suppression command. This function is disabled by default.

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list report-suppression

no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list report-suppression

Parameter vlan-id-list The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the MLD Report Suppression for VLAN 1-3:

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-3 report-suppression

184

22.6 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config

(router-ports-forbidden) Description

This command is used to forbid the specified ports as being router ports in the specified VLAN(s). To delete the forbidden router ports, please use no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list router-ports-forbidd command.

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list router-ports-forbidd interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-list }

no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list router-ports-forbidd interface [ gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-list ]

Parameter vlan-id-list The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.

port-list Forbid the specified ports as being router ports. Packets sent from multicast routers to these ports will be discarded.

port-channel-list Forbid the specified port-channels as being router ports. Packets sent from multicast routers to these port-channels will be discarded.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Forbid the Ethernet ports 1/0/1-3 as being router ports in VLAN 1:

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1 router-ports-forbidd

interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3

185

22.7 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (rport

interface) Description

This command is used to specify the static router ports for specific VLANs. To delete the static router ports, please use no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list rport interface command.

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list rport interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-list }

no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list rport interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-list }

Parameter vlan-id-list The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.

port-list The list of Ethernet ports.

port-channel-list The ID of the port channels.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Set the router port as 1/0/1 for VLAN 1-2:

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-2 rport interface

gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

22.8 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (static) Description

This command is used to configure interfaces to statically join a multicast group. To remove interfaces from a static multicast group, please use no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list staticcommand.

186

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list static ip interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-list }

no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list static ip interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-list }

Parameter vlan-id-list The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.

ip Specify the IP address of the multicast group that the hosts want to join.

port-list The list of Ethernet ports.

port-channel-list The ID of the port channels.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure port ports 1/0/1-3 in VLAN 2 to statically join multicast group ff80::1234:1:

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 2 static ff80::1234:1

interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3

22.9 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config (querier) Description

This command is used to enable the MLD Snooping Querier feature for specific VLANs. To disable the MLD Snooping Querier feature on the VLANs, please use no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list querier command without any parameters. To restore the default values, please use no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list querier command with specified parameters.

187

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list querier [ max-response-time response-time | query-interval interval | general-query source-ip ip-addr | last-listener-query-count count | last-listener-query-interval interval ]

no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list querier [ max-response-time | query-interval | general-query source-ip | last-listener-query-count | last-listener-query-interval ]

Parameter vlan-id-list The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5.

response-time The hosts maximum response time to general query messages. Valid values are from 1 to 25 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.

query-interval interval The interval between general query messages sent by the switch. Valid values are from 10 to 300 seconds, and the default value is 60 seconds.

ip-addr The source IP address of the general query messages sent by the switch. It should be a unicast address. By default, it is fe80::2ff:ffff:fe00:1.

count The number of group-specific queries to be sent. With MLD Snooping Querier enabled, when the switch receives an MLD done message, it obtains the address of the multicast group that the host wants to leave from the message. Then the switch sends out group-specific queries to this multicast group through the port receiving the done message. If specified count of group-specific queries are sent and no report message is received, the switch will delete the multicast address from the multicast forwarding table. Valid values are from 1 to 5, and the default value is 2.

last-member-query-interval interval The interval between group- specific queries. Valid values are from 1 to 5 seconds, and the default value is 1 second.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

188

Example Enable the MLD Snooping Querier for VLAN 3, and configure the query interval as 100 seconds:

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 3 querier

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 3 querier query interval

100

22.10 ipv6 mld snooping (interface) Description

The ipv6 mld snooping command is used to enable MLD Snooping function on the desired port. To disable this function, please use no ipv6 mld snooping command.

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping no ipv6 mld snooping

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable MLD Snooping on port 1/0/3:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping

22.11 ipv6 mld snooping max-groups Description

The ipv6 mld snooping max-groups command is used to configure the maximum number of groups that a port can join in. The ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action is used to configure the action that the port takes when it receives an MLD report message and the maximum number of entries is in the forwarding table. To remove the maximum group limitation and return to the default of no limitation on the specified port, please use the no ipv6 mld

189

snooping max-groups command. To return to the default action of dropping the report, please use the no ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action command. These commands only apply to the dynamic multicast groups.

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping max-groups maxgroup

ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action { drop | replace }

no ipv6 mld snooping max-groups

no ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action

Parameter maxgroup Specify the maximum numbers of groups that the port can join. It ranges from 0 to 1000 and the default value is 1000.

drop When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port joins has exceeded the max-group, the port will not join any new multicast group.

replace When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port joins has exceeded the max-group, the newly joined multicast group will replace an existing multicast group with the lowest multicast group address.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Specify the maximum numbers of groups that ports 1/0/2-5 can join as 10, and configure the throttling action as replace:

Switch(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-5

Switch(config-if-range)#ipv6 mld snooping max-groups 10

Switch(config-if-range)#ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action replace

22.12 ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave Description

The ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave command is used to configure the Fast Leave function for port. To disable the Fast Leave function, please use no ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave command.

190

Syntax ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave

no ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the Fast Leave function for port 1/0/3:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave

22.13 ipv6 mld profile Description

The ipv6 mld profile command is used to create the configuration profile. To delete the corresponding profile, please use no ipv6 mld profile command.

Syntax

ipv6 mld profile id

no ipv6 mld profile id

Parameter

id Specify the id of the configuration profile, ranging from 1 to 999.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create the profile 1:

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1

191

22.14 deny Description

The deny command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as deny.

Syntax

deny

Command Mode

Profile Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as deny:

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1 Switch(config-MLD-profile)#deny

22.15 permit Description

The permit command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as permit.

Syntax

permit

Command Mode

Profile Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as permit:

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1 Switch(config-igmp-profile)#permit

192

22.16 range Description

The range command is used to configure the range of the profiles filtering multicast address. To delete the corresponding filtering multicast address, please use no range command. A profile contains 16 filtering IP-range entries at most.

Syntax

range start-ip end-ip

no range start-ip end-ip

Parameter

start-ip Start IPv6 multicast address of the filter entry..

end-ip End IPv6 multicast address of the filter entry.

Command Mode

Profile Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure one of the filter multicast address entry as range ff80::1234 to ff80::1235 in profile 1:

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1 Switch(config-igmp-profile)#range ff80::1234 ff80::1235

22.17 ipv6 mld filter Description

The ipv6 mld filter command is used to bind the specified profile to the interface. To delete the binding, please use no ipv6 mld filter command.

Syntax ipv6 mld filter profile-id no ipv6 mld filter

Parameter profile-id Specify the profile ID, ranging from 1 to 999.

193

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Bind profile 1 to interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# ipv6 mld filter 1

22.18 clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics Description

The clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics command is used to clear the statistics of the MLD packets.

Syntax clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Clear the statistics of the MLD packets:

Switch(config)# clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics

22.19 show ipv6 mld snooping Description

The show ipv6 mld snooping command is used to display the global configuration of MLD Snooping.

Syntax show ipv6 mld snooping

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

194

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the global configuration of MLD Snooping:

Switch(config)# show ipv6 mld snooping

22.20 show ipv6 mld snooping interface Description

The show ipv6 mld snooping interface command is used to display the port configuration of MLD snooping.

Syntax show ipv6 mld snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet [ port | port-list ] ] { basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat }

show ipv6 mld snooping interface [ port-channel [port-channel-list ] ] { basic-config | max-groups }

Parameter port The Ethernet port number.

port-list The list of Ethernet ports.

basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat The related configuration information selected to display.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the MLD baisic configuration configuration of all ports and port channels:

Switch# show ipv6 mld snooping interface basic-config

Display the MLD basic configuration of port 1/0/2:

Switch# show ipv6 mld snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

basic-config

195

Display the MLD packet statistics of ports 1/0/1-4:

Switch# show ipv6 mld snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-4

packet-stat

22.21 show ipv6 mld snooping vlan Description

The show ipv6 mld snooping vlan command is used to display VLAN information of MLD Snooping.

Syntax show ipv6 mld snooping vlan [ vlan-id ]

Parameter vlan-id The VLAN ID selected to display, ranging from 1 to 4094.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display all of the VLAN information:

Switch(config)# show ipv6 mld snooping vlan

22.22 show ipv6 mld snooping groups Description

The show ipv6 mld snooping groups command is used to display multicast groups.

Syntax show ipv6 mld snooping groups [ vlan {vlan-id } ] [ ipv6_multicast_addr | count | dynamic | dynamic count | static | static count ]

Parameter vlan-id The VLAN ID selected to display the information of all multicast items.

ipv6_multicast_addr IPv6 address of the multicast group.

count The numbers of all multicast groups.

dynamic Display dynamic multicast groups.

196

dynamic count The numbers of all dynamic multicast groups.

static Display static multicast groups.

static count The numbers of all static multicast groups.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display all of the multicast groups:

Switch(config)# show ipv6 mld snooping groups

22.23 show ipv6 mld profile Description

The show ipv6 mld profile command is used to display the configuration information of all the profiles or a specific profile.

Syntax

show ipv6 mld profile [ id ]

Parameter

id Specify the ID of the profile, ranging from 1 to 999.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the configuration information of all profiles:

Switch(config)# show ipv6 mld profile

197

Chapter 23 MVR Commands

MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration) allows a single multicast VLAN to be shared for multicast member ports in different VLANs in IPv4 network. In IGMP Snooping, if member ports are in different VLANs, a copy of the multicast streams is sent to each VLAN that has member ports. While MVR provides a dedicated multicast VLAN to forward multicast traffic over the Layer 2 network, to avoid duplication of multicast streams for clients in different VLANs. Clients can dynamically join or leave the multicast VLAN without interfering with their relationships in other VLANs.

23.1 mvr (global) Description

The mvr command is used to enable MVR globally. To disable MVR, please use no mvr command.

Syntax mvr

no mvr

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable MVR globally:

Switch(config)# mvr

23.2 mvr group Description

The mvr group command is used to add multicast groups to MVR. To delete multicast groups from MVR, please use no mvr group command. You can configure up to 511 multicast groups.

Syntax mvr group ip-addr[count ]

198

no mvr group ip-addr[count ]

Parameter ip-addr The start IP address of the contiguous series of multicast groups.

count The number of the multicast groups to be added to the MVR. Valid values are from 1 to 256, and the default value is 1.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Add multicast groups 225.1.2.3 -239.1.2.5 to MVR:

Switch (config)# mvr group 225.1.2.3 3

23.3 mvr mode Description

The mvr mode command is used to configure the MVR mode as compatible or dynamic. By default, it is compatible. To return to the default configuration, please use no mvr mode command.

Syntax mvr mode { compatible | dynamic }

no mvr mode

Parameter compatible In this mode, the switch does not forward report or leave messages from the hosts to the IGMP querier. So the IGMP querier cannot learn the multicast groups membership information from the switch. You have to statically configure the IGMP querier to transmit all the required multicast streams to the switch via the multicast VLAN.

dynamic In this mode, after receiving report or leave messages from the hosts, the switch will forward them to the IGMP querier via the multicast VLAN (with appropriate translation of the VLAN ID). So the IGMP querier can learn the multicast groups membership information through the report and leave messages, and transmit the multicast streams to the switch via the multicast VLAN according to the multicast forwarding table.

199

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the MVR mode as dynamic:

Switch(config)# mvr mode dynamic

23.4 mvr querytime Description

The mvr querytime command is used to configure the maximum time to wait for IGMP report on a receiver port before removing the port from multicast group membership. To return to the default configuration, please use no mvr querytime command.

Syntax mvr querytime time

no mvr querytime

Parameter time The query response time. Valid values are from 1 to100 tenths of a second, and the default value is 5 tenths of a second.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the query response time of MVR as 1 second, that is 10 tenths of a second:

Switch(config)# mvr querytime 10

200

23.5 mvr vlan Description

The mvr vlan command is used to specify the multicast VLAN. By default, it is VLAN 1. To return to the default configuration, please use no mvr vlan command.

Syntax mvr vlan vlan-id

no mvr vlan

Parameter vlan-id The ID of the multicast VLAN. Valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the multicast VLAN as VLAN 10:

Switch(config)# mvr vlan 10

23.6 mvr (interface) Description

This command is used to enable MVR for specific interfaces. To disable MVR for the interfaces, please use no mvr command. By default, it is disabled.

Syntax mvr

no mvr

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

201

Example Enable MVR for port 1/0/1:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)#mvr

23.7 mvr type Description

The mvr type command is used to configure the MVR port type as receiver or source. By default, the port is a non-MVR port. If you attempt to configure a non-MVR port with MVR characteristics, the operation fails. To return to the default configuration, please use no mvr type command.

Syntax mvr type { source | receiver }

no mvr type

Parameter source Configure the uplink ports that receive and send multicast data on the multicast VLAN as source ports. Source ports should belong to the multicast VLAN.

receiver Configure the ports that are connecting to the hosts as receiver ports. A receiver port can only belong to one VLAN, and cannot belong to the multicast VLAN.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the port 1/0/3 as a receiver port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)#mvr type receiver

202

23.8 mvr immediate Description

The mvr immediate command is used to enable the Fast Leave feature of MVR for specified port. To disable the Fast Leave feature of MVR for specific ports, please use no mvr immediate command.

Syntax mvr immediate

no mvr immediate

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines Only receiver ports support Fast Leave. Before enabling Fast Leave for a port, make sure there is only a single receiver device connecting to the port.

Example Enable the Fast Leave feature of MVR for port 1/0/3:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)#mvr immediate

23.9 mvr vlan (group) Description

This command is used to statically add ports to an MVR group. Then the ports can receive multicast traffic sent to the IP multicast address via the multicast VLAN.

Syntax mvr vlan vlan-id group ip-addr

Parameter vlan-id The ID of the multicast VLAN. Valid values are from 1 to 4094.

ip-addr The IP address of the multicast group.

203

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines This command applies to only receiver ports. The switch adds or removes the receiver ports to the corresponding multicast groups by snooping the report and leave messages from the hosts. You can also statically add a receiver port to an MVR group.

Example Add port 1/0/3 to MVR group 225.1.2.3 statically. The multicast VLAN is VLAN 10:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)#mvr vlan 10 group 225.1.2.3

23.10 show mvr Description

The show mvr command is used to display the global configuration of MVR.

Syntax show mvr

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the global configuration of mvr:

Switch# show mvr

204

23.11 show mvr interface Description

The show mvr interface command is used to display the MVR configurations of specific interfaces.

Syntax show mvr interface gigabitEthernet [port | port-list ]

Parameter port The Ethernet port number.

port-list The list of Ethernet ports.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the MVR configuration of port 1/0/3:

Switch# show mvr interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

23.12 show mvr members Description

The show mvr members command is used to display the membership information of all MVR groups or the specified MVR group.

Syntax show mvr members [ ip-addr ] [ status active | inactive ]

Parameter ip-addrThe multicast IP address of the MVR group.

active Display all active MVR groups.

inactiveDisplay all inactive MVR groups.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

205

Example Display the membership information of all MVR groups:

Switch# show mvr members

206

Chapter 24 MSTP Commands

MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol), compatible with both STP and RSTP and subject to IEEE 802.1s, can disbranch a ring network. STP is to block redundant links and backup links as well as optimize paths.

24.1 debug spanning-tree Description

The debug spanning-tree command is used to enable debuggning of spanning-tree activities. To disable the debugging function, please use no debug spanning-tree command.

Syntax debug spanning-tree { all | bpdu receive | bpdu transmit | cmpmsg | errors | flush | init | migration | proposals | roles | state | tc }

no debug spanning-tree { all | bpdu receive | bpdu transmit | cmpmsg | errors | flush | init | migration | proposals | roles | state | tc }

Parameters all Display all the spanning-tree debug messages.

bpdu receive Display the debug messages of the received spanning-tree bridge protocol data unit (BPDU).

bpdu transmit Display the debug messages of the sent spanning-tree BPDU.

cmpmsg Display the message priority debug messages.

errors Display the MSTP error debug messages.

flush Display the address table flushing debug messages.

init Display the data structure initialization debug messages.

migration Display the version migration debug messages.

proposals Display the MSTP handshake debug messages.

roles Display the MSTP interface role switchling debug messages.

state Display the MSTP interface state change debug messages.

tc Display the MSTP topology event debug messages.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode

207

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Display all the spanning-tree debug messages:

Switch# debug spanning-tree all

24.2 spanning-tree (global) Description

The spanning-tree command is used to enable STP function globally. To disable the STP function, please use no spanning-tree command.

Syntax spanning-tree

no spanning-tree

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the STP function:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree

24.3 spanning-tree (interface) Description

The spanning-tree command is used to enable STP function for a port. To disable the STP function, please use no spanning-tree command.

Syntax spanning-tree

no spanning-tree

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

208

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the STP function for port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree

24.4 spanning-tree common-config Description

The spanning-tree common-config command is used to configure the parameters of the ports for comparison in the CIST and the common parameters of all instances. To return to the default configuration, please use no spanning-tree common-config command. CIST (Common and Internal Spanning Tree) is the spanning tree in a switched network, connecting all devices in the network.

Syntax spanning-tree common-config [ port-priority pri ] [ ext-cost ext-cost ] [ int-cost int-cost ] [ portfast { enable | disable }] [ point-to-point { auto | open | close }]

no spanning-tree common-config

Parameter pri Port Priority, which must be multiple of 16 ranging from 0 to 240. By default, the port priority is 128. Port Priority is an important criterion on determining if the port connected to this port will be chosen as the root port. In the same condition, the port with the highest priority will be chosen as the root port. The lower value has the higher priority.

ext-cost External Path Cost, which is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of ports in different MST regions. It is an important criterion on determining the root port. The lower value has the higher priority. It ranges from o to 2000000. By default, it is 0 which is mean auto.

int-cost Internal Path Cost, which is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of ports in an MST region. It is an important criterion on determining the root port. The lower value has the higher priority. By

209

default, it is automatic. It ranges from o to 2000000. By default, it is 0 which is mean auto.

portfast Enable/ Disable Edge Port. By default, it is disabled. The edge port can transit its state from blocking to forwarding rapidly without waiting for forward delay.

point-to-point The P2P link status, with auto, open and close options. By default, the option is auto. If the two ports in the P2P link are root port or designated port, they can transit their states to forwarding rapidly to reduce the unnecessary forward delay.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the STP function of port 1, and configure the Port Priority as 64, ExtPath Cost as 100, IntPath Cost as 100, and then enable Edge Port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree common-config port-priority 64 ext-cost

100 int-cost 100 portfast enable point-to-point open

24.5 spanning-tree mode Description

The spanning-tree mode command is used to configure the STP mode of the switch. To return to the default configurations, please use no spanning-tree mode command.

Syntax spanning-tree mode { stp | rstp | mstp }

no spanning-tree mode

Parameter stp Spanning Tree Protocol, the default value.

rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

mstp Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

210

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the spanning-tree mode as mstp:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mode mstp

24.6 spanning-tree mst configuration Description

The spanning-tree mst configuration command is used to access MST Configuration Mode from Global Configuration Mode, as to configure the VLAN-Instance mapping, region name and revision level. To return to the default configuration of the corresponding Instance, please use no spanning-tree mst configuration command.

Syntax spanning-tree mst configuration

no spanning-tree mst configuration

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enter into the MST configuration mode:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration

Switch(Config-mst)#

24.7 instance Description

The instance command is used to configure the VLAN-Instance mapping. To remove the VLAN-instance mapping or disable the corresponding instance,

211

please use no instance command. When an instance is disabled, the related mapping VLANs will be removed.

Syntax instance instance-id vlan vlan-id

no instance instance-id[ vlan vlan-id ]

Parameters instance-id Instance ID, ranging from 1 to 8.

vlan-id The VLAN ID selected to mapping with the corresponding instance.

Command Mode MST Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Map the VLANs 1-100 to Instance 1:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration

Switch(config-mst)# instance 1 vlan 1-100

Disable Instance 1, namely remove all the mapping VLANs 1-100:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration

Switch(config-mst)# no instance 1

Remove VLANs 1-50 in mapping VLANs 1-100 for Instance 1:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration

Switch(config-mst)# no instance 1 vlan 1-50

24.8 name Description

The name command is used to configure the region name of MST instance.

Syntax name name

212

Parameters name The region name, used to identify MST region. It ranges from 1 to 32 characters.

Command Mode MST Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the region name of MST as region1:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration

Switch(config-mst)# name region1

24.9 revision Description

The revision command is used to configure the revision level of MST instance.

Syntax revision revision

Parameters revision The revision level for MST region identification, ranging from 0 to 65535.

Command Mode MST Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the revision level of MST as 100:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration

Switch(config-mst)# revision 100

213

24.10 spanning-tree mst instance Description

The spanning-tree mst instance command is used to configure the priority of MST instance. To return to the default value of MST instance priority, please use no spanning-tree mst instance command.

Syntax spanning-tree mst instance instance-id priority pri

no spanning-tree mst instance instance-id priority

Parameter instance-id Instance ID, ranging from 1 to 8.

pri MSTI Priority, which must be multiple of 4096 ranging from 0 to 61440. By default, it is 32768. MSTI priority is an important criterion on determining if the switch will be chosen as the root bridge in the specific instance.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the MST Instance 1 and configure its priority as 4096:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst instance 1 priority 4096

24.11 spanning-tree mst Description

The spanning-tree mst command is used to configure MST Instance Port. To return to the default configuration of the corresponding Instance Port, please use no spanning-tree mst command. A port can play different roles in different spanning tree instance. You can use this command to configure the parameters of the ports in different instance IDs as well as view status of the ports in the specified instance.

Syntax spanning-tree mst instance instance-id {[ port-priority pri ] | [ cost cost ]}

214

no spanning-tree mst instance instance-id

Parameter instance-id Instance ID, ranging from 1 to 8.

pri Port Priority, which must be multiple of 16 ranging from 0 to 240. By default, it is 128. Port Priority is an important criterion on determining if the port will be chosen as the root port by the device connected to this port.

cost Path Cost, ranging from 0 to 200000. The lower value has the higher priority. Its default value is 0 meaning auto.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the priority of port 1 in MST Instance 1 as 64, and path cost as 2000:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree mst instance 1 port-priority 64 cost 2000

24.12 spanning-tree priority Description

The spanning-tree priority command is used to configure the bridge priority. To return to the default value of bridge priority, please use no spanning-tree priority command.

Syntax spanning-tree priority pri

no spanning-tree priority

Parameter pri Bridge priority, ranging from 0 to 61440. It is 32768 by default.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

215

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the bridge priority as 4096:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree priority 4096

24.13 spanning-tree timer Description

The spanning-tree timer command is used to configure forward-time, hello-time and max-age of Spanning Tree. To return to the default configurations, please use no spanning-tree timer command.

Syntax spanning-tree timer {[ forward-time forward-time ] [ hello-time hello-time ] [ max-age max-age ]}

no spanning-tree timer

Parameter forward-time Forward Delay, which is the time for the port to transit its state after the network topology is changed. Forward Delay ranges from 4 to 30 in seconds and it is 15 by default. Otherwise, 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age.

hello-time Hello Time, which is the interval to send BPDU packets, and used to test the links. Hello Time ranges from 1 to 10 in seconds and it is 2 by default. Otherwise, 2 * (Hello Time + 1) <= Max Age.

max-age The maximum time the switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure, ranging from 6 to 40 in seconds. By default, it is 20.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure forward-time, hello-time and max-age for Spanning Tree as 16 seconds, 3 seconds and 22 seconds respectively:

216

Switch(config)# spanning-tree timer forward-time 16 hello-time 3

max-age 22

24.14 spanning-tree hold-count Description

The spanning-tree hold-count command is used to configure the maximum number of BPDU packets transmitted per Hello Time interval. To return to the default configurations, please use no spanning-tree hold-count command.

Syntax spanning-tree hold-count value

no spanning-tree hold-count

Parameter value The maximum number of BPDU packets transmitted per Hello Time interval, ranging from 1 to 20 in pps. By default, it is 5.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the hold-count of STP as 8pps:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree hold-count 8

24.15 spanning-tree max-hops Description

The spanning-tree max-hops command is used to configure the maximum number of hops that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded. To return to the default configurations, please use no spanning-tree max-hops command.

Syntax spanning-tree max-hops value

no spanning-tree max-hops

217

Parameter value The maximum number of hops that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded, ranging from 1 to 40 in hop. By default, it is 20.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the max-hops of STP as 30:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree max-hops 30

24.16 spanning-tree bpdufilter Description

The spanning-tree bpdufilter command is used to enable the BPDU filter function for a port. With the BPDU Filter function enabled, the port does not forward BPDUs from the other switches. To disable the BPDU filter function, please use no spanning-tree bpdufilter command.

Syntax spanning-tree bpdufilter

no spanning-tree bpdufilter

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the BPDU filter function for port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree bpdufilter

218

24.17 spanning-tree bpduflood Description

The spanning-tree bpduflood command is used to enable the BPDU forward function for a port. With the function enabled, the port still can forward spanning tree BPDUs when the spanning tree function is disabled on this port. To disable the BPDU filter function, please use no spanning-tree bpduflood command.

Syntax spanning-tree bpduflood

no spanning-tree bpduflood

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the BPDU forward function for port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree bpduflood

24.18 spanning-tree bpduguard Description

The spanning-tree bpduguard command is used to enable the BPDU protect function for a port. With the BPDU protect function enabled, the port will set itself automatically as ERROR-PORT when it receives BPDU packets, and the port will disable the forwarding function for a while. To disable the BPDU protect function, please use no spanning-tree bpduguard command.

Syntax spanning-tree bpduguard

no spanning-tree bpduguard

219

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the BPDU protect function for port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree bpduguard

24.19 spanning-tree guard loop Description

The spanning-tree guard loop command is used to enable the Loop Protect function for a port. Loop Protect is to prevent the loops in the network brought by recalculating STP because of link failures and network congestions. To disable the Loop Protect function, please use no spanning-tree guard loop command.

Syntax spanning-tree guard loop

no spanning-tree guard loop

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the Loop Protect function for port 2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree guard loop

220

24.20 spanning-tree guard root Description

The spanning-tree guard root command is used to enable the Root Protect function for a port. With the Root Protect function enabled, the root bridge will set itself automatically as ERROR-PORT when receiving BPDU packets with higher priority, in order to maintain the role of root ridge. To disable the Root Protect function, please use no spanning-tree guard root command.

Syntax spanning-tree guard root

no spanning-tree guard root

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the Root Protect function for port 2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree guard root

24.21 spanning-tree guard tc Description

The spanning-tree guard tc command is used to enable the TC Protect of Spanning Tree function for a port. To disable the TC Protect of Spanning Tree function, please use no spanning-tree guard tc command. A switch removes MAC address entries upon receiving TC-BPDUs. If a malicious user continuously sends TC-BPDUs to a switch, the switch will be busy with removing MAC address entries, which may decrease the performance and stability of the network. With the Protect of Spanning Tree function enabled, you can configure the number of TC-BPDUs in a required time, so as to avoid the process of removing MAC addresses frequently.

Syntax spanning-tree guard tc

221

no spanning-tree guard tc

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the TC Protect of Spanning Tree for port 2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree guard tc

24.22 spanning-tree mcheck Description

The spanning-tree mcheck command is used to enable mcheck.

Syntax spanning-tree mcheck

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable mcheck for port 2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree mcheck

24.23 show spanning-tree active Description

The show spanning-tree active command is used to display the active information of spanning-tree.

222

Syntax show spanning-tree active

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the active information of spanning-tree:

Switch(config)# show spanning-tree active

24.24 show spanning-tree bridge Description

The show spanning-tree bridge command is used to display the bridge parameters.

Syntax show spanning-tree bridge [ forward-time | hello-time | hold-count | max-age | max-hops | mode | priority | state ]

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the bridge parameters:

Switch(config)# show spanning-tree bridge

24.25 show spanning-tree interface Description

The show spanning-tree interface command is used to display the spanning-tree information of all ports or a specified port.

223

Syntax show spanning-tree interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ][ edge | ext-cost | int-cost | mode | p2p | priority | role | state | status ]

Parameter port The Ethernet port number.

port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the spanning-tree information of all ports:

Switch(config)# show spanning-tree interface

Display the spanning-tree information of port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# show spanning-tree interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Display the spanning-tree mode information of port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# show spanning-tree interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 mode

24.26 show spanning-tree interface-security Description

The show spanning-tree interface-security command is used to display the protect information of all ports or a specified port.

Syntax show spanning-tree interface-security [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] [ bpdufilter | bpduflood | bpduguard | loop | root | tc ]

Parameter port The Ethernet port number.

port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

224

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the protect information of all ports:

Switch(config)# show spanning-tree interface-security

Display the protect information of port 1:

Switch(config)# show spanning-tree interface-security gigabitEthernet

1/0/1

Display the interface security bpdufilter information:

Switch(config)# show spanning-tree interface-security bpdufilter

24.27 show spanning-tree mst Description

The show spanning-tree mst command is used to display the related information of MST Instance.

Syntax show spanning-tree mst { configuration [ digest ] | instance instance-id [ interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] ] }

Parameter instance-id Instance ID desired to show, ranging from 1 to 8.

port The Ethernet port number.

port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the region information and mapping information of VLAN and MST Instance:

Switch(config)#show spanning-tree mst configuration

Display the related information of MST Instance 1:

Switch(config)#show spanning-tree mst instance 1

225

Display all the ports information of MST Instance 1:

Switch(config)#show spanning-tree mst instance 1 interface

226

Chapter 25 LLDP Commands

LLDP function enables network devices to advertise their own device information periodically to neighbors on the same LAN. The information of the LLDP devices in the LAN can be stored by its neighbor in a standard MIB, so it is possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System (NMS) using SNMP.

25.1 lldp Description

The lldp command is used to enable LLDP function. To disable the LLDP function, please use no lldp command.

Syntax lldp

no lldp

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable LLDP function globally:

Switch(config)#lldp

25.2 lldp forward_message Description

The lldp forward_message command is used to enable the switch to forward LLDP messages when LLDP function is disabled. To disable the LLDP messages forwarding function, please use no lldp forward_message command.

Syntax lldp forward_message

no lldp forward_message

227

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the switch to forward LLDP messages when LLDP function is disabled globally:

Switch(config)#lldp forward_message

25.3 lldp hold-multiplier Description

The lldp hold-multiplier command is used to configure the Hold Multiplier parameter. The aging time of the local information in the neighbor device is determined by the actual TTL value used in the sending LLDPDU. TTL = Hold Multiplier * Transmit Interval. To return to the default configuration, please use no lldp hold-multiplier command.

Syntax lldp hold-multiplier multiplier

no lldp hold-multiplier

Parameter multiplier Configure the Hold Multiplier parameter. It ranges from 2 to 10. By default, it is 4.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Specify Hold Multiplier as 5:

Switch(config)#lldp hold-multiplier 5

228

25.4 lldp timer Description

The lldp timer command is used to configure the parameters about transmission. To return to the default configuration, please use no lldp timer command.

Syntax lldp timer { tx-interval tx-interval | tx-delay tx-delay | reinit-delay reinit-delay | notify-interval notify-interval | fast-count fast-count }

no lldp timer { tx-interval | tx-delay | reinit-delay | notify-interval | fast-count }

Parameter tx-interval Configure the interval for the local device to transmit LLDPDU to its neighbors. The value ranges from 5 to 32768 and the default value is 30 seconds.

tx-delay Configure a value from 1 to 8192 in seconds to specify the time for the local device to transmit LLDPDU to its neighbors after changes occur so as to prevent LLDPDU being sent frequently. By default, it is 2 seconds.

reinit-delay This parameter indicates the amount of delay from when LLDP status becomes "disable" until re-initialization will be attempted. The value ranges from 1 to 10 and the default value is 2.

notify-interval Specify the interval of Trap message which will be sent from local device to network management system. The value ranges from 5 to 3600 and the default value is 5 seconds.

fast-count When the port's LLDP state transforms from Disable (or Rx_Only) to Tx&Rx (or Tx_Only), the fast start mechanism will be enabled, that is, the transmit interval will be shorten to a second, and several LLDPDUs will be sent out (the number of LLDPDUs equals this parameter). The value ranges from 1 to 10 and the default value is 3.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Specify the Transmit Interval of LLDPDU as 45 seconds and Trap message to NMS as 120 seconds:

229

Switch(config)#lldp timer tx-interval 45

Switch(config)#lldp timer notify-interval 120

25.5 lldp receive Description

The lldp receive command is used to enable the designated port to receive LLDPDU. To disable the function, please use no lldp receive command.

Syntax lldp receive

no lldp receive

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable port 1/0/1 to receive LLDPDU:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)#lldp receive

25.6 lldp transmit Description

The lldp transmit command is used to enable the designated port to transmit LLDPDU. To disable the function, please use no lldp transmit command.

Syntax lldp transmit

no lldp transmit

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

230

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1 to transmit LLDPDU:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)#lldp transmit

25.7 lldp snmp-trap Description

The lldp snmp-trap command is used to enable the ports SNMP notification. If enabled, the port will notify the trap event to network management system. To disable the ports' SNMP notification, please use no lldp snmp-trap command.

Syntax lldp snmp-trap

no lldp snmp-trap

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the SNMP notification for Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)#lldp snmp-trap

231

25.8 lldp tlv-select

Description The lldp tlv-select command is used to configure TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU. To exclude TLVs, please use no lldp tlv-select command. By default, All TLVs are included in outgoing LLDPDU.

Syntax lldp tlv-select { [ port-description ] [ system-capability ] [ system-description ] [ system-name ] [ management-address ] [ port-vlan ] [ protocol-vlan ] [ vlan-name ] [ link-aggregation ] [ mac-phy-cfg ] [ max-frame-size ] [ power ] [ all ] }

no lldp tlv-select { [ port-description ] [ system-capability ] [ system-description ] [ system-name ] [ management-address ] [ port-vlan ] [ protocol-vlan ] [ vlan-name ] [ link-aggregation ] [ mac-phy-cfg ] [ max-frame-size ] [ power ] [ all ] }

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Exclude management-address and port-vlan-id TLVs in LLDPDU outgoing from Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)# no lldp tlv-select management-address port-vlan

25.9 lldp management-address

Description The lldp management-address command is used to configure the ports management address to be included in management address TLV. The NMS uses management addresses to identify the devices. To delete the ports management address, please use no lldp management address command.

232

Syntax lldp management-address { ip-address }

no lldp management-address

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the ports management address as 192.168.1.100 for port 1/0/1:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)# lldp management-address 192.168.0.100

25.10 lldp med-fast-count Description

The lldp med-fast-count command is used to configure the number of the LLDP-MED frames that will be sent out. When LLDP-MED fast start mechanism is activated, multiple LLDP-MED frames will be transmitted based on this parameter. The default value is 4. To return to the default configuration, please use no lldp med-fast-count command.

Syntax lldp med-fast-count count

no lldp med-fast-count

Parameter count Configure the Fast Start Count parameter. It ranges from 1 to 10. By default, it is 4.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Specify Fast Start Count as 5:

233

Switch(config)# lldp med-fast-count 5

25.11 lldp med-status Description

The lldp med-status command is used to enable the LLDP-MED feature for the corresponding port. After the LLDP-MED feature is enabled, the port's Admin Status will be changed to Tx&Rx. To disable the LLDP-MED feature for the corresponding port, please use no lldp med-status command.

Syntax lldp med-status

no lldp med-status

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the LLDP-MED feature for port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# lldp med-status

25.12 lldp med-tlv-select Description

The lldp med-tlv-select command is used to configure LLDP-MED TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU for the corresponding port. To exclude LLDP-MED TLVs, please use no lldp med-tlv-select command. By default, All TLVs are included in outgoing LLDPDU.

Syntax lldp med-tlv-select { [inventory-management] [location] [network-policy] [power-management] [all] }

no lldp med-tlv-select { [inventory-management] [location] [network-policy] [power-management] [all] }

234

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Exclude network policy and inventory TLVs in LLDPDU outgoing from port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# no lldp med-tlv-select network-policy inventory-

management

25.13 lldp med-location Description

The lldp med-location command is used to configure the Location Identification TLV's content in outgoing LLDPDU of the port.

Syntax lldp med-location { emergency-number identifier | civic-address [ [ language language ] [ province-state province-state ] [ lci-county-name county-name ] [ lci-city city ] [ street street ] [ house-number house-number ] [name name ] [ postal-zipcode postal-zipcode ] [ room-number room-number ] [ post-office-box post-office-box ] [ additional additional ] [ country-code country-code ] [ what { dhcp-server | endpoint | switch } ] ] }

Parameter emergency-number Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier, which is used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk-based PSAP. The length of this field ranges from 10 to 25 characters.

civic-address The civic address is defined to reuse the relevant sub-fields of the DHCP option for civic Address based Location Configuration Information as specified by IETF.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

235

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the civic address in the Location Identification TLV's content in outgoing LLDPDU of port 1/0/2. Configure the language as English and city as London:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# lldp med-location civic-address language English lci-city

London

25.14 show lldp

Description The show lldp command is used to display the global configuration of LLDP.

Syntax show lldp

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the global configuration of LLDP:

Switch#show lldp

25.15 show lldp interface

Description The show lldp interface command is used to display LLDP configuration of the corresponding port. By default, the LLDP configuration of all the ports will be displayed.

Syntax show lldp interface [ gigabitEthernet port ]

236

Parameters

port The Ethernet port number.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the LLDP configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:

Switch#show lldp interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

25.16 show lldp local-information interface

Description The show lldp local-information interface command is used to display the LLDP information of the corresponding port. By default, the LLDP information of all the ports will be displayed.

Syntax show lldp local-information interface [ gigabitEthernet port ]

Parameters

port The Ethernet port number.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the LLDP information of 1/0/1:

Switch#show lldp local-information interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

237

25.17 show lldp neighbor-information interface

Description The show lldp neighbor-information interface command is used to display the neighbor information of the corresponding port. By default, the neighbor information of all the ports will be displayed.

Syntax show lldp neighbor-information interface [ gigabitEthernet port ]

Parameters

port The Ethernet port number.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the neighbor information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:

Switch#show lldp neighbor-information interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

25.18 show lldp traffic interface Description

The show lldp traffic interface command is used to display the LLDP statistic information between the local device and neighbor device of the corresponding port. By default, the LLDP statistic information of all the ports will be displayed.

Syntax show lldp traffic interface [ gigabitEthernet port ]

Parameters

port The Ethernet port number.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

238

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the LLDP statistic information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:

Switch#show lldp traffic interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

239

Chapter 26 L2PT Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Note: L2PT commands are only available on certain devices.

L2PT (Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling) is a feature for service providers to transmit packets from different customers across their ISP networks and maintain Layer 2 protocol configurations of each customer. The supported Layer 2 protocols are STP (Spanning Tree Protocol), GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol), CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol), VTP (VLAN Trunking Protocol), PAgP (Port Aggregation Protocol), UDLD (UniDirectional Link Detection) and PVST+(Per VLAN Spanning Tree Plus).

26.1 l2protocol-tunnel Description

The l2protocol-tunnel command is used to enable the layer 2 protocol tunneling (L2PT) function globally. To disable the L2PT function, please use no l2protocol-tunnel command.

Syntax

l2protocol-tunnel

no l2protocol-tunnel

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the L2PT function globally:

T2600G-28TS(config)# l2protocol-tunnel

240

26.2 l2protocol-tunnel type

Description

The l2protocol-tunnel type command is used to configure the L2PT function on a specified port. To disable the L2PT function on the specified port, please use no l2protocol-tunnel command.

Syntax

l2protocol-tunnel type nni

l2protocol-tunnel type uni { 01000ccccccc | 01000ccccccd | gvrp | stp | lacp | all } [ threshold threshold ]

no l2protocol-tunnel

Parameter

nni Specify the port type according to its connecting device in the network. Specify the ports type as NNI if it is connecting to the ISP network.

uni Specify the port type according to its connecting device in the network. Specify the ports type as UNI if it is connecting to the users local network.

01000ccccccc | 01000ccccccd | gvrp | stp | lacp | all Select the supported Layer 2 protocol type. Packets of the specified protocol will be encapsulated with their destination MAC address before they are sent to the ISP network. Packets will be decapsulated to restore their Layer 2 protocol and MAC address information before they are sent to the customer network.

01000ccccccc: Enable protocol tunneling for the packets with destination MAC address 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CC. 01-00-0CC-CC-CC-CC is used as the destination MAC address of the CDP/VTP/PAgP/UDLD packets.

01000ccccccd: Enable protocol tunneling for the packets with destination MAC address 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD. 01-00-0CC-CC-CC-CD is used as the destination MAC address of Cisco PVST+ BPDUs.

gvrp: Enable protocol tunneling for the GVRP packets.

stp: Enable protocol tunneling for the STP packets.

lacp: Enable protocol tunneling for the LACP packets.

all: All the above Layer 2 protocols are supported for tunneling.

241

threshold Configure the threshold for packets-per-second accepted for encapsulation. Packets beyond the threshold will be dropped. It ranges from 0 to 1000.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure port 1/0/3 as a UNI port for STP packets with the threshold as 1000 packets/second:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

T2600G-28TS(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel type uni stp threshold 1000

26.3 show l2protocol-tunnel global Description

The show l2protocol-tunnel global command is used to display the global L2PT status.

Syntax

show l2protocol-tunnel global

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the global L2PT status:

T2600G-28TS(config)# show l2protocol-tunnel global

242

26.4 show l2protocol-tunnel interface Description

The show l2protocol-tunnel interface command is used to display the L2PT configuration information of a specified Ethernet port or of all Ethernet ports.

Syntax

show l2protocol-tunnel interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameter

port The port number. port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the L2PT configuration information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:

T2600G-28TS(config)#show l2protocol-tunnel interface gigabitEthernet

1/0/1

Display the L2PT configuration information of all Ethernet ports:

T2600G-28TS(config)#show l2protocol-tunnel interface

243

Chapter 27 PPPoE ID-Insertion Commands (Only for Certain

Devices)

Note: PPPoE ID-Insertion commands are only available on certain devices.

The PPPoE ID-Insertion feature provides a way to extract a Vendor-specific tag as an identifier for the authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) access requests on an Ethernet interface. When enabled, the switch attaches a tag to the PPPoE discovery packets, which is called the PPPoE Vendor-Specific tag and it contains a unique line identifier. There are two formats of Vendor-specific tags: Circuit-ID format and Remote-ID format. The BRAS receives the tagged packet, decodes the tag, and uses the Circuit-ID/Remote-ID field of that tag as a NAS-Port-ID attribute in the RADIUS server for PPP authentication and AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting) access requests. The switch will remove the Circuit-ID/Remote-ID tag from the received PPPoE Active Discovery Offer and Session-confirmation packets from the BRAS.

27.1 pppoe id-insertion (global) Description

The pppoe id-insertion command is used to enable the PPPoE ID-Insertion function globally. To disable the PPPoE ID-Insertion function, please use no pppoe id-insertion command.

Syntax

pppoe id-insertion

no pppoe id-insertion

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the PPPoE ID-Insertion function:

T2600G-28TS(config)# pppoe id-insertion

244

27.2 pppoe circuit-id (interface) Description

The pppoe circuit-id command is used to enable the PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function for a specified port. To disable the PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function on a specified port, please use no pppoe circuit-id command.

Syntax

pppoe circuit-id

no pppoe circuit-id

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function for the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:

T2600G-28TS (config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

T2600G-28TS (config-if)# pppoe circuit-id

27.3 pppoe circuit-id type Description

The pppoe circuit-id type command is used to configure the type of PPPoE Circuit-ID for a specified port. By default, the PPPoE Circuit-ID type is ip.

Syntax

pppoe circuit-id type { mac | ip | udf [Value] | udf-only [Value] }

Parameter

mac | ip | udf | udf-only The type of PPPoE Circuit-ID for the port.

mac: The MAC address of the switch will be used to encode the Circuit-ID option.

245

ip: The IP address of the switch will be used to encode the Circuit-ID option. This is the default value.

udf: A user specified string with the maximum length of 40 characters will be used to encode the Circuit-ID option.

udf-only: Only the user specified string with the maximum length of 40 will be used to encode the Circuit-ID option.

Value The value of udf/udf-only. The maximum length is 40 characters.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the type of PPPoE Circuit-ID as mac for the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:

T2600G-28TS (config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

T2600G-28TS (config-if)# pppoe circuit-id type mac

27.4 pppoe remote-id Description

The pppoe remote-id command is used to enable the PPPoE Remote-ID Insertion and configure the Remote-ID value for a specified port. To disable the PPPoE Remote-ID Insertion function on a specified port, please use no pppoe remote-id command. By default, the PPPoE Remote-ID Insertion is disabled.

Syntax

pppoe remote-id [Value]

no pppoe remote-id

Parameter

Value The value of UDF. The maximum length is 40 characters. If not specified, the default value will be the PPPoE clients MAC address.

246

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the remote-ID as mac for the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:

T2600G-28TS (config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

T2600G-28TS (config-if)# pppoe remote-id mac

27.5 show pppoe id-insertion global Description

The show pppoe id-insertion global command is used to display the global configuration of PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function.

Syntax

show pppoe id-insertion global

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the configuration of PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function globally:

T2600G-28TS # show pppoe circuit-id global

27.6 show pppoe id-insertion interface Description

The show pppoe id-insertion interface command is used to display all ports or the specified ports configuration information of PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function.

247

Syntax

show pppoe id-insertion interface [gigabitEthernet port ]

Parameter

port The Fast/Gigabit Ethernet port number.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the configuration information of PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function of all Ethernet ports:

T2600G-28TS# show pppoe id-insertion interface

Display the configuration of PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function of the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1 :

T2600G-28TS# show pppoe id-insertion interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

248

Chapter 28 Static Routes Commands

28.1 ip routing Description

This ip routing command is used to enable IPv4 routing globally. To disable IPv4 routing, please use the no ip routing command.

Syntax

ip routing

no ip routing

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable IPv4 routing feature for the switch:

Switch(config)# ip routing

28.2 interface vlan Description

This interface vlan command is used to create the VLAN interface. To delete the specified VLAN interface, please use the no interface vlan command.

Syntax

interface vlan { vid }

no interface vlan { vid }

Parameter

vid The ID of the VLAN.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

249

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create the VLAN interface 2:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 2

28.3 interface loopback Description

This interface loopback command is used to create the loopback interface. To delete the specified loopback interface, please use the no interface loopback command.

Syntax

interface loopback { id }

no interface loopback { id }

Parameter

id The ID of the loopback interface, ranging from 1 to 64.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create the loopback interface 1:

Switch(config)# interface loopback 1

28.4 switchport Description

This switchport command is used to switch the Layer 3 interface into the Layer 2 port. To switch the Layer 2 port into the Layer 3 routed port, please use the no switchport command.

250

Syntax

switchport

no switchport

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Switch port 1/0/9 into the routed port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/9 Switch(config-if)# no switchport

28.5 interface range port-channel Description

This interface range port-channel command is used to create multiple port-channel interfaces.

Syntax

interface range port-channel port-channel-list

Parameter

port-channel-list The list of the port-channel interface, ranging from 1 to 14, in the format of 1-3, 5.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create the port-channel interfaces 1, 3, 4 and 5:

Switch(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5

251

28.6 description Description

This description command is used to add a description to the Layer 3 interface, including routed port, port-channel interface, loopback interface and VLAN interface. To clear the description of the corresponding interface, please use the no description command.

Syntax

description string

no description

Parameter

string Content of an interface description, ranging from 1 to 32 characters.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Add a description system-if to the routed port 1/0/9 :

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/9 Switch(config-if)# no switchport Switch(config-if)# description system-if

28.7 shutdown Description

This shutdown command is used to shut down the specified interface. The interface type include: routed port, port-channel interface, loopback interface and VLAN interface. To enable the specified interface, please use the no shutdown command.

Syntax

shutdown

252

no shutdown

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Shut down the routed port 1/0/9:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/9 Switch(config-if)# no switchport Switch(config-if)# shutdown

28.8 interface port-channel Description

This interface port-channel command is used to create the port-channel interface. To delete the specified port-channel interface, please use the no interface port-channel command.

Syntax

interface port-channel { port-channel-id }

no interface port-channel { port-channel-id }

Parameter

port-channel-id The ID of the port-channel interface, ranging from 1 to 14.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create the port-channel interface 1:

Switch(config)# interface port-channel 1

253

28.9 ip route Description

This ip route command is configure the static route. To clear the corresponding entry, please use the no ip route command.

Syntax

ip route { dest-address } { mask } { next-hop-address } [ distance ]

no ip route { dest-address } { mask } { next-hop-address }

Parameter

dest-address The destination IP address.

mask The subnet mask.

next-hop-address The address of the next-hop.

distance The distance metric of this route, ranging from 1 to 255. The smaller the distance is, the higher the priority is.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create a static route with the destination IP address as 192.168.2.0, the subnet mask as 255.255.255.0 and the next-hop address as 192.168.0.2:

Switch(config)# ip route 192.168.2.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.0.2

28.10 ipv6 routing Description

This ipv6 routing command is enale the IPv6 routing feature globally. To diable IPv6 routing, please use the no ipv6 routing command.

Syntax

ipv6 routing

no ipv6 routing

254

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable IPv6 routing globally:

Switch(config)# ipv6 routing

28.11 ipv6 route Description

This ipv6 route command is configure the IPv6 static route. To clear the corresponding entry, please use the no ipv6 route command.

Syntax

ipv6 route { ipv6-dest-address } { next-hop-address } [ distance ]

no ipv6 route { ipv6-dest-address } { next-hop-address }

Parameter

ipv6-dest-address The IPv6 address of the destination network.

next-hop-address The IPv6 address of the next-hop.

distance The distance metric of this route, ranging from 1 to 255. The smaller the distance is, the higher the priority is.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create a static route with the destination network IP address as 3200::/64 and the next-hop address as 3100::1234:

Switch(config)# ipv6 route 3200::/64 3100::1234

255

28.12 show interface vlan Description

The show interface vlan command is used to display the information of the specified interface VLAN.

Syntax show interface vlan vid

Parameter vid The VLAN ID.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the information of VLAN 2:

Switch(config)#show interface vlan 2

28.13 show ip interface Description

This show ip interface command is used to display the detailed information of the specified Layer 3 interface.

Syntax

show ip interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id | loopback id | vlan vlan-id ]

Parameter

port The port number.

port-channel-id The ID of the port channel. Member ports in this port channel should all be routed ports.

id The loopback interface ID.

vlan-id The VLAN interface ID.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

256

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the detailed information of the VLAN interface 2:

Switch(config)# show ip interface vlan 2

28.14 show ip interface brief Description

This show ip interface brief command is used to display the summary information of the Layer 3 interfaces.

Syntax

show ip interface brief

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the summary information of the Layer 3 interfaces:

Switch(config)# show ip interface brief

28.15 show ip route Description

This show ip route command is used to display the route entries of the specified type.

Syntax

show ip route [ static | connected ]

Parameter

static | connected Specify the route type. If not specified, all types of route entries will be displayed.

static: The static routes.

257

connected: The connected routes.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the static routes:

Switch(config)# show ip route static

28.16 show ip route specify Description

This show ip route specify command is used to display the valid routing information to the specified IP address or network segments.

Syntax

show ip route specify { ip } [ mask ] [ longer-prefixes ]

Parameter

ip Specify the destination IP address.

mask Specify the destination IP address together with the parameter ip.

longer-prefixes Specify the destination subnets that match the network segment determined by the ip and mask parameters.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the shortest route to 192.168.0.100:

Switch(config)# show ip route specify 192.168.0.100

Look up the route entry with the destination as 192.168.0.0/24:

Switch(config)# show ip route specify 192.168.0.0 255.255.255.0

Display the routes to all the subnets that belongs to 192.168.0.0/16:

258

Switch(config)# show ip route specify 192.168.0.0 255.255.0.0 longer-prefixes

28.17 show ip route summary Description

This show ip route summary command is used to display the summary information of the route entries classified by their sources.

Syntax

show ip route summary

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the summary information of route entries:

Switch(config)# show ip route summary

28.18 show ipv6 interface Description

This command is used to display the configured IPv6 information of the management interface, including ipv6 function status, link-local address and global address, IPv6 multicast groups etc.

Syntax

show ipv6 interface

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the IPv6 information of the management interface:

259

Switch(config)# show ipv6 interface

28.19 show ipv6 route Description

This show ipv6 route command is used to display the IPv6 route entries of the specified type.

Syntax

show ipv6 route [ static | connected ]

Parameter

static | connected Specify the route type. If not specified, all types of route entries will be displayed.

static: The static routes.

connected: The connected routes.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the IPv6 static routes:

Switch(config)# show ipv6 route static

28.20 show ipv6 route summary Description

This show ipv6 route summary command is used to display the summary information of the IPv6 route entries classified by their sources.

Syntax

show ipv6 route summary

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

260

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the summary information of IPv6 route entries:

Switch(config)# show ipv6 route summary

261

Chapter 29 IPv6 Address Configuration Commands

The IPv6 address configuration commands are provided in the Interface Configuration Mode, which includes the routed port, the port-channel interface and the VLAN interface. Enter the configuration mode of these Layer 3 interfaces and configure their IPv6 parameters.

29.1 ipv6 enable Description

This command is used to enable the IPv6 function on the specified Layer 3 interface. IPv6 function should be enabled before the IPv6 address configuration management. By default it is enabled on VLAN interface 1. IPv6 function can only be enabled on one Layer 3 interface at a time.

If the IPv6 function is disabled, the corresponding IPv6-based modules will be invalid, for example SSHv6, SSLv6, TFTPv6 and more. To disable the IPv6 function, please use no ipv6 enable command.

Syntax

ipv6 enable no ipv6 enable

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the IPv6 function on the VLAN interface 1:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 1

Switch(config-if)# ipv6 enable

29.2 ipv6 address autoconfig Description

This command is used to enable the automatic configuration of the ipv6 link-local address. The switch has only one ipv6 link-local address, which can be configured automatically or manually. The general ipv6 link-local address

262

has the prefix as fe80::/10. IPv6 routers cannot forward packets that have link-local source or destination addresses to other links. The autu-configured ipv6 link-local address is in EUI-64 format. To verify the uniqueness of the link-local address, the manually configured ipv6 link-local address will be deleted when the auto-configured ipv6 link-local address takes effect.

Syntax

ipv6 address autoconfig

Configuration Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the automatic configuration of the ipv6 link-local address on VLAN interface 1:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 1

Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address autoconfig

29.3 ipv6 address link-local Description

The ipv6 address link-local command is used to configure the ipv6 link-local address manually on a specified interface. To delete the configured link-local address, please use no ipv6 address link-local command.

Syntax

ipv6 address ipv6-addr link-local

no ipv6 address ipv6-addr link-local

Parameter

ipv6-addr The link-local address of the interface. It should be a standardized IPv6 address with the prefix fe80::/10, otherwise this command will be invalid.

Configuration Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

263

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the link-local address as fe80::1234 on the VLAN interface 1:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 1

Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address fe80::1234 link-local

29.4 ipv6 address dhcp Description

The ipv6 address dhcp command is used to enable the DHCPv6 Client function. When this function is enabled, the Layer 3 interface will try to obtain IP from DHCPv6 server. To delete the allocated IP from DHCPv6 server and disable the DHCPv6 Client function, please use no ipv6 address dhcp command.

Syntax

ipv6 address dhcp

no ipv6 address dhcp

Configuration Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the DHCP Client function on VLAN interface 1:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 1

Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address dhcp

29.5 ipv6 address ra Description

This command is used to configure the interfaces global IPv6 address according to the address prefix and other configuration parameters from its

264

received RA(Router Advertisement) message. To disable this function, please use no ipv6 address ra command.

Syntax

ipv6 address ra

no ipv6 address ra

Configuration Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the automatic ipv6 address configuration function to obtain IPv6 address through the RA message on VLAN interface 1:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 1

Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address ra

29.6 ipv6 address eui-64 Description

This command is used to manually configure a global IPv6 address with an extended unique identifier (EUI) in the low-order 64 bits on the interface. Specify only the network prefix. The last 64 bits are automatically computed from the switch MAC address. To remove a EUI-64 IPv6 address from the interface, please use the no ipv6 address eui-64 command.

Syntax

ipv6 address ipv6-addr eui-64

no ipv6 address ipv6-addr eui-64

Parameter

ipv6-addr Global IPv6 address with 64 bits network prefix, for example 3ffe::/64.

Configuration Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

265

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure an EUI-64 global address on the interface with the network prefix 3ffe::/64:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 1

Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address 3ffe::/64 eui-64

29.7 ipv6 address Description

This command is used to manually configure a global IPv6 address on the interface. To remove a global IPv6 address from the interface, please use no ipv6 address command.

Syntax

ipv6 address ipv6-addr

no ipv6 address ipv6-addr

Parameter

ipv6-addr Global IPv6 address with network prefix, for example 3ffe::1/64.

Configuration Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the global address 3001::1/64 on VLAN interface 1:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 1

Switch(config-if)# ipv6 address 3001::1/64

266

29.8 show ipv6 interface Description

This command is used to display the configured ipv6 information of the management interface, including ipv6 function status, link-local address and global address, ipv6 multicast groups etc.

Syntax

show ipv6 interface

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the ipv6 information of the management interface:

Switch(config)# show ipv6 interface

267

Chapter 30 ARP Commands

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is used to resolve an IP address into an Ethernet MAC address. The switch maintains an ARP mapping table to record the IP-to-MAC mapping relations, which is used for forwarding packets. An ARP mapping table contains two types of ARP entries: dynamic and static. An ARP dynamic entry is automatically created and maintained by ARP. A static ARP entry is manually configured and maintained.

30.1 arp Description

This arp command is used to add a static ARP entry. To delete the specified ARP entry, please use the no arp command.

Syntax

arp ip mac type

no arp ip type

Parameter

ip The IP address of the static ARP entry.

mac The MAC address of the static ARP entry.

type The ARP type. Configure it as arpa.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create a static ARP entry with the IP as 192.168.0.1 and the MAC as 00:11:22:33:44:55:

Switch(config)# arp 192.168.0.1 00:11:22:33:44:55 arpa

268

30.2 clear arp-cache Description

This clear arp-cache command is used to clear all the dynamic ARP entries.

Syntax

clear arp-cache

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Clear all the dynamic ARP entries:

Switch(config)# clear arp-cache

30.3 arp dynamicrenew Description

This arp dynamicrenew command is used to automatically renew dynamic ARP entries. To disable the switch to automatically renew dynamic ARP entries, please use the no arp dynamicremew command. By default, it is enabled.

Syntax

arp dynamicremew

no arp dynamicremew

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the switch to automatically renew the dynamic ARP entries:

Switch(config)# arp dynamicrenew

269

30.4 arp timeout Description

This arp timeout command is used to configure the ARP aging time of the interface.

Syntax

arp timeout timeout

no arp timeout

Parameter

timeout Specify the aging time, ranging from 10 to 3000 seconds. The default value is 1200 seconds.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the ARP aging time as 60 seconds:

Switch(config)# arp timeout 60

30.5 gratuitous-arp intf-status-up enable Description

This gratuitous-arp intf-status-up enable command is used to enable the Layer 3 interface to send a gratuitous ARP packet when the interfaces status becomes up.

Syntax

gratuitous-arp intf-status-up enable

no gratuitous-arp intf-status-up enable

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

270

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Enable the switchs Layer 3 interfaces to send gratuitous ARP packets when their status becomes up:

Switch(config)# gratuitous-arp intf-status-up enable

30.6 gratuitous-arp dup-ip-detected enable Description

This gratuitous-arp dup-ip-detected enable command is used to enable the Layer 3 interface to send a gratuitous ARP packet when receiving a gratuitous packets of which the IP address is the same as its own.

Syntax

gratuitous-arp dup-ip-detected enable

no gratuitous-arp dup-ip-detected enable

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Enable the switchs Layer 3 interface to send gratuitous ARP packets when receiving a gratuitous packets of which the IP address is the same as its own:

Switch(config)# gratuitous-arp dup-ip-detected enable

30.7 gratuitous-arp learning enable Description

This gratuitous-arp learning enable command is used to enable the Layer 3 interface to learn MAC addresses from the gratuitous ARP packets.

Syntax

gratuitous-arp learning enable

no gratuitous-arp learning enable

271

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Enable the Layer 3 interface to learn MAC addresses from the gratuitous ARP packets:

Switch(config)# gratuitous-arp learning enable

30.8 gratuitous-arp send-interval Description

This gratuitous-arp send-interval command is used to configure the interval at which the interface periodically send the gratuitous ARP packets.

Syntax

gratuitous-arp send-interval interval

Parameter

Interval Specify the interval at which the interface periodically send the gratuitous ARP packets. Value 0 means the interface will not send gratuitous ARP packets.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface vlan / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Specify the interface VLAN 1 to send gratuitous ARP packets every 1 second:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 1 Switch(config-if)# gratuitous-arp send-interval 1

272

30.9 ip proxy-arp Description

The ip proxy-arp command is used to enable Proxy ARP function on the specified VLAN interface or routed port. To disable Proxy ARP on this interface, please use no ip proxy-arp command.

Syntax

ip proxy-arp no ip proxy-arp

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

None

Example

Enable the Proxy ARP function on VLAN Interface 2:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 2

Switch(config-if)# ip proxy-arp

Enable the Proxy ARP function on routed port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 2

Switch(config-if)# no switchport

Switch(config-if)# ip proxy-arp

30.10 ip local-proxy-arp Description

The ip local-proxy-arp command is used to enable Local Proxy ARP function on the specified VLAN interface or routed port. To disable Local Proxy ARP function on this interface, please use no ip local-proxy-arp command.

Syntax

ip local-proxy-arp no ip local-proxy-arp

273

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (Interface vlan / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

None

Example

Enable the Proxy ARP function on VLAN Interface 2:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 2

Switch(config-if)# ip local-proxy-arp

Enable the Proxy ARP function on routed port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 2

Switch(config-if)# no switchport

Switch(config-if)# ip local-proxy-arp

30.11 show arp Description

This show arp command is used to display the active ARP entries. If no parameter is speicified, all the active ARP entries will be displayed.

Syntax

show arp [ ip ] [ mac ]

Parameter

ip Specify the IP address of your desired ARP entry.

mac Specify the MAC address of your desired ARP entry.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

274

Example

Display the ARP entry with the IP as 192.168.0.2:

Switch(config)# show arp 192.168.0.2

30.12 show ip arp (interface) Description

This show ip arp (interface) command is used to display the active ARP entries associated with a specified Layer 3 interface.

Syntax

show ip arp { gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id | vlan id }

Parameter

port Specify the number of the routed port.

port-channel-id Specify the ID of the port channel.

id Specify the VLAN interface ID.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the ARP entry associated with VLAN interface 2:

Switch(config)# show ip arp vlan 2

30.13 show ip arp summary Description

This show ip arp summary command is used to display the number of the active ARP entries.

Syntax

show ip arp summary

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

275

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the number of the ARP entries:

Switch(config)# show ip arp summary

30.14 show gratuitous-arp Description

This show gratuitous arp command is used to display the configuration of gratuitous ARP.

Syntax

show gratuitous-arp

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the configuration of gratuitous ARP:

Switch(config)# show gratuitous-arp

30.15 show ip proxy-arp Description

The show ip proxy-arp command is used to display the Proxy ARP status.

Syntax

show ip proxy-arp

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None

276

Example

Display the Proxy ARP status:

Switch(config)# show ip proxy-arp

277

Chapter 31 DHCP Server Commands

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a network configuration protocol for hosts on TCP/IP networks, and it provides a framework for distributing configuration information to hosts. DHCP server assigns IP addresses from specified address pools on a switch or router to DHCP clients and manages them.

31.1 service dhcp server Description

The service dhcp server command is used to enable DHCP service globally. To disable DHCP server service, please use no service dhcp server command.

Syntax

service dhcp server no service dhcp server

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable DHCP server service globally:

Switch(config)# service dhcp server

31.2 ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip Description

The ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip command is used to specify the Option 138, which should be configured as the management IP address of an AC (Access Control) device. If the APs in the local network request this option, the server will inform the APs of the ACs IP address by sending a packet containing this option. To delete the Option 138, please use no ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip command.

278

Syntax

ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip ip-address no ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip

Parameter

ip-addressSpecify the management IP address of an AC (Access Control) device.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Set the remote DHCP servers IP address as 192.168.3.1:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip 192.168.3.1

31.3 ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id Description

The ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id command is used to configure the class ID of the packets from DHCP server in a different network segment. To delete the class ID settings, please use no ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id command.

Syntax

ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id class-id no ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id

Parameter

class-idSpecify the class ID of the DHCP packets from another network segment.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

279

Example

Set the class ID of the DHCP packets from another network segment as 34:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id 34

31.4 ip dhcp server exclude-address Description

The ip dhcp server exclude-address command is used to specify the reserved IP addresses which are forbidden to allocate, such as the gateway address, the network segment broadcast address, the server address etc. To delete the reserved IP addresses, please use no ip dhcp server exclude-address command.

Syntax

ip dhcp server exclude-address start-ip-address end-ip-address no ip dhcp server exclude-address start-ip-addr end-ip-address

Parameter

start-ip-addressSpecify the start IP address of the reserved IP pool. end-ip-addressSpecify the end IP address of the reserved IP pool. Only one IP address will be reserved if the end IP address and the start IP address are the same.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Set the reserved IP addresses from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.9:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server exclude-address 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.9

31.5 ip dhcp server pool Description

The ip dhcp server pool command is used to create the address pool of DHCP Server and enter the dhcp configuration mode. To delete the address pool, please use no ip dhcp server pool command.

280

Syntax

ip dhcp server pool pool-name no ip dhcp server pool pool-name

Parameter

pool-name Specify the address pool name, ranging from 1 to 8 characters.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create the address pool of name POOL1:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server pool POOL1

31.6 ip dhcp server ping timeout Description

The ip dhcp server ping timeout command is used to specify the timeout of PING process. To resume the default value, please use no ip dhcp server ping timeout command.

Syntax

ip dhcp server ping timeout value no ip dhcp server ping timeout

Parameter

value Specify the timeout value, ranging from 100 to 10000ms. The default value is 100ms.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

281

Example

Set the timeout of PING as 200ms:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server ping timeout 200

31.7 ip dhcp server ping packets Description

The ip dhcp server ping packets command is used to specify the number of PING packets sent. If this value is set to 0, the PING process will be disabled. To resume the default value, please use no ip dhcp server ping packets command.

Syntax

ip dhcp server ping packets num

Parameter

num Specify the PING packets number, ranging from 0 to 10. By default its 1.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the PING packets number as 2:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server ping packets 2

31.8 network Description

The network command is used to specify the address and subnet of the network pool.

Syntax

network network-address subnet-mask

282

Parameter

network-address Specify the network address of the pool, with the format A.B.C.D. All the IP addresses in the same subnet are allocatable except the reserved addresses and specific addresses. subnet-mask Specify the subnet mask of the pool, with the format A.B.C.D.

Command Mode

DHCP Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the address pool product as 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server pool product

Switch(config-dhcp)# network 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0

31.9 lease Description

The lease command is used to specify the lease time of the address pool.

Syntax

lease lease-time

Parameter

lease-time Specify the lease time of the pool, ranging from 1 to 2880 minutes. The default value is 120 minutes.

Command Mode

DHCP Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the lease time of address pool product as 10 minutes:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server pool product

283

Switch(config-dhcp)# lease 10

31.10 address hardware-address Description

The address hardware-address command is used to reserve the static address bound with hardware address in the address pool. To delete the binding, please use no address hardware-address.

Syntax

address ip-address hardware-address hardware-address hardware-type { ethernet | ieee802 } no address ip-address

Parameter

ip-address Specify the static binding IP address. hardware-address Specify the hardware address, in the format XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX. ethernet | ieee802 Specify the hardware type.

Command Mode

DHCP Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Reserve the IP address 192.168.0.10 in the address pool product for the device with the MAC address as 5e:4c:a6:31:24:01 and the hardware type as ethernet:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server pool product

Switch(config-dhcp)# address 192.168.0.10 hardware-address

5e:4c:a6:31:24:01 hardware-type ethernet

284

31.11 address client-identifier Description

The address client-identifier command is used to specify the static address bound with client ID in the address pool. To delete the binding, please use no address command.

Syntax

address ip-address client-identifier client-id [ascii] no address ip-address

Parameter

ip-address Specify the static binding IP address. client-id Specify the client ID, in the format of hex value. ascii The client ID is entered with ASCII characters.

Command Mode

DHCP Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Reserve the IP address 192.168.0.10 in the address pool product for the device with the client ID as abc in ASCII:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp pool product

Switch(dhcp-config)# address 192.168.0.10 client-identifier abc ascii

31.12 default-gateway Description

The default-gateway command is used to specify the default gateway of the address pool. To delete the configuration, please use no default-gateway.

Syntax

default-gateway gateway-list no default-gateway

285

Parameter

gateway-list Specify the gateway list, with the format of A.B.C.D,E.F.G.H. At most 8 gateways can be configured, separated by comma.

Command Mode

DHCP Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the address pool products default gateways as 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.1.1:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server pool product

Switch(dhcp-config)# default-gateway 192.168.0.1,192.168.1.1

31.13 dns-server Description

The dns-server command is used to specify the DNS server of the address pool. To delete this configuration, please use no dns-server command.

Syntax

dns-server dns-list no dns-server

Parameter

dns-list Specify the DNS server list, with the format of A.B.C.D,E.F.G.H. At most 8 DNS servers can be configured, separated by comma.

Command Mode

DHCP Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the address pools DNS servers as 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.1.1:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server pool product

286

Switch(config-dhcp)# dns-server 192.168.0.1,192.168.1.1

31.14 netbios-name-server Description

The netbios-name-server command is used to specify the Netbios servers IP address. To delete the Netbios servers, please use no netbios-name-server command.

Syntax

netbios-name-server NBNS-list no netbios-name-server

Parameter

NBNS-list Specify the Netbios server list, with the format of A.B.C.D,E.F.G.H. At most 8 Netbios servers can be configured, separated by comma.

Command Mode

DHCP Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the address pools Netbios servers as 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.1.1:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server pool product

Switch(config-dhcp)# netbios-name-server 192.168.0.1,192.168.1.1

31.15 netbios-node-type Description

The netbios-node-type command is used to specify the Netbios servers node type. To delete the node type setttings, please use no netbios-node-type command.

Syntax

netbios-node-type type no netbios-node-type

287

Parameter

type Specify the node type as b-node, h-node, m-node or p-node.

Command Mode

DHCP Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the address pools Netbios server type as b-node:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server pool product

Switch(config-dhcp)# netbios-node-type b-node

31.16 next-server Description

The next-server command is used to specify the next DHCP servers address during the DHCP boot process. To delete the next server, please use no next-server command.

Syntax

next-server ip-address next-server

Parameter

ip-address Specify the IP address of the next server.

Command Mode

DHCP Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the next servers IP address as 192.168.2.1:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server pool product

Switch(config-dhcp)# next-server 192.168.2.1

288

31.17 domain-name Description

The domain-name command is used to specify the domain name for the DHCP client. To delete the domain name, please use no domain-name command.

Syntax

domain-name domainname no domain-name

Parameter

domainname Specify the domain name for the DHCP client.

Command Mode

DHCP Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the DHCP clients domain name as edu:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server pool product

Switch(config-dhcp)# domain-name edu

31.18 bootfile Description

The bootfilecommand is used to specify the name of the DHCP clients bootfile. To delete the bootfile, please use no bootfile command.

Syntax

bootfile file-name no bootfile

Parameter

file-name Specify the name of the DHCP clients bootfile.

Command Mode

DHCP Configuration Mode

289

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the name of the DHCP clients bootfile as boot1:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp server pool product

Switch(config-dhcp)# bootfile boot1

31.19 show ip dhcp server status Description

The show ip dhcp server status command is used to display the status of the DHCP service.

Syntax

show ip dhcp server status

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the status of DHCP service:

Switch(config)# show ip dhcp server status

31.20 show ip dhcp server statistics Description

The show ip dhcp server statistics command is used to display the DHCP packets received and sent by DHCP server.

Syntax

show ip dhcp server statistics

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

290

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the statistics of DHCP packets received and sent by the DHCP server:

Switch(config)# show ip dhcp server statistics

31.21 show ip dhcp server extend-option Description

The show ip dhcp server extend-option command is used to display the configuration of the remote DCHP servers.

Syntax

show ip dhcp server extend-option

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the configurations of the remote DCHP servers:

Switch(config)# show ip dhcp server extend-option

31.22 show ip dhcp server pool Description

The show ip dhcp server pool command is used to display the configuration of the address pool.

Syntax

show ip dhcp server pool

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

291

Example

Display the configured address pool:

Switch(config)# show ip dhcp server pool

31.23 show ip dhcp server excluded-address Description

The show ip dhcp server excluded-address command is used to display the configuration of reserved addresses.

Syntax

show ip dhcp server excluded-address

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the configured reserved addresses:

Switch(config)# show ip dhcp server excluded-address

31.24 show ip dhcp server manual-binding Description

The show ip dhcp server manual-binding command is used to display the configuration of static binding address.

Syntax

show ip dhcp server manual-binding

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

292

Example

Display the configured static binding address:

Switch(config)# show ip dhcp server manual-binding

31.25 show ip dhcp server binding Description

The show ip dhcp server binding command is used to display the binding entries.

Syntax

show ip dhcp server binding [ ip ip-address ]

Parameter

ip-address Specify the binding IP address.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the address binding entries:

Switch(config)# show ip dhcp server binding

31.26 clear ip dhcp server statistics Description

The clear ip dhcp server statistics command is used to clear the statistics information of DHCP packets.

Syntax

clear ip dhcp server statistics

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

293

Example

Clear the packet statistics:

Switch(config)# clear ip dhcp server statistics

31.27 clear ip dhcp server binding Description

The clear ip dhcp server binding command is used to clear the binding information.

Syntax

clear ip dhcp server binding [ ip-address ]

Parameter

ip-address Specify the binding IP address.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Clear all the binding addresses:

Switch(config)# clear ip dhcp server binding

294

Chapter 32 DHCP Relay Commands

A DHCP Relay agent is a Layer 3 device that forwards DHCP packets between clients and servers. DHCP Relay forward requests and replies between clients and servers when they are not on the same physical subnet.

32.1 service dhcp relay Description

The service dhcp relay command is used to enable DHCP Relay function globally. To disable DHCP Relay function, please use no service dhcp relay command.

Syntax

service dhcp relay no service dhcp relay

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable DHCP Relay function globally:

Switch(config)# service dhcp relay

32.2 ip dhcp relay hops Description

The ip dhcp relay hops command is used to specify the maximum hops (DHCP Relay agent) that the DHCP packets can be relayed. To restore the default value, please use no service dhcp relay hops command.

Syntax

ip dhcp relay hops hops no ip dhcp relay hops

295

Parameter

hops Specify the maximum hops (DHCP Relay agent) that the DHCP packets can be relayed. If a packets hop count is more than the value you set here, the packet will be dropped. The valid value ranges from the 1 to 16, and the default value is 4.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the maximum number of relay hops as 6:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp relay hops 6

32.3 ip dhcp relay time Description

The ip dhcp relay time command is used to specify the DHCP relay time threshold. DHCP relay time is the time elapsed since client began address acquisition or renewal process. When the elapsed time of the DHCP packet is greater than the value set here, the DHCP packet will be dropped by the switch. To restore the default value, please use no service dhcp relay time command.

Syntax

ip dhcp relay time time no ip dhcp relay time

Parameter

time Specify the DHCP relay time threshold. The valid value ranges from 1 to 65535. The default value is 0, which means the switch will not examine this field of the DHCP packets.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

296

Example

Configure the DHCP Relay time as 30 seconds:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp relay time 30

32.4 ip helper-address Description

The ip helper-address command is used to add DHCP Server address to the Layer 3 interface. To delete the server address, please use no ip helper-address command.

Syntax

ip helper-address ip-address no ip helper-address [ ip-address ]

Parameter

ip-address DHCP Server address.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Add DHCP Server address 192.168.2.1 to interface VLAN 1:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 1

Switch(config-if)# ip helper-address 192.168.2.1

32.5 ip dhcp relay information Description

The ip dhcp relay information command is used to enable option 82 support in DHCP Relay. To disable this function, please use no ip dhcp relay information command.

Syntax

ip dhcp relay information no ip dhcp relay information

297

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet/interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable option 82 support in DHCP Relay for port 2:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp relay information

32.6 ip dhcp relay information strategy Description

The ip dhcp relay information strategy command is used to specify the operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the Host. To restore to the default option, please use no ip dhcp relay information strategy command.

Syntax

ip dhcp relay information strategy { drop | keep | replace} no ip dhcp relay information strategy

Parameter

drop | keep | replace The operations for Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the Host. The default operation is keep. drop: Discard the packet with the Option 82 field. keep: Keep the Option 82 field in the packet. replace: Replace the option 82 field with the system option defined by the switch.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

298

Example

Specify the option 82 strategy as replace to replace the Option 82 field with the local parameter on receiving the DHCP request packet for port 2:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp relay information strategy replace

32.7 ip dhcp relay information format Description

The ip dhcp relay information format command is used to select the format of option 82 sub-option value field. To restore to the default option, please use no ip dhcp relay information format command.

Syntax

ip dhcp relay information format { normal | private }

no ip dhcp relay information format

Parameter

normal | private The format type of option 82 sub-option value field.

normal: Indicates that the format of sub-option value field is TLV (type-length-value).

private: Indicates that the format of sub-option value field is the value you configure for the related sub-option.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Select the format of option 82 sub-option value field as TLV (type-length-value) for port 2:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)#ip dhcp relay information format normal

299

32.8 ip dhcp relay information circuit-id Description

The ip dhcp relay information circuit-id command is used to specify the custom circuit ID when option 82 customization is enabled. To clear the circuit ID, please use no ip dhcp relay information circuit-id command.

Syntax

ip dhcp relay information circuit-id circuitID no ip dhcp relay information circuit-id

Parameter

circuitID Specify the circuit ID, ranging from 1 to 64 characters.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the circuit ID as TP-Link for port 2:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp relay information circuit-id TP-Link

32.9 ip dhcp relay information remote-id Description

The ip dhcp relay information remote-id command is used to specify the custom remote ID when option 82 customization is enabled. To clear the remote ID, please use no ip dhcp relay information remote-id command.

Syntax

ip dhcp relay information remote-id remoteID no ip dhcp relay information remote-id

Parameter

remoteID Specify the remote ID, ranging from 1 to 64 characters.

300

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the remote ID as TP-Link for port 2:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp relay information remote-id TP-Link

32.10 ip dhcp relay default-interface Description

The ip dhcp relay default-interface command is used to configure default relay agent interface. When the switch works at DHCP VLAN Relay mode and there is no IP interface in the VLAN, the switch uses the IP of default relay agent interface to fill in the relay agent IP address field of DHCP packets. To delete the default relay agent interface use no ip dhcp relay default-interface.

Syntax

ip dhcp relay default-interface no ip dhcp relay default-interface

Command mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure interface VLAN 1 as the default relay agent interface:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 1

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp relay default-interface

301

32.11 ip dhcp relay vlan Description

The ip dhcp relay vlan command is used to add DHCP server address to specified VLAN. If there is an IP interface in the VLAN and it has configured a DHCP server address at the interface level, then the configuration at the interface level has higher priority. In this case, the DHCP server configured on the VLAN will not be used to forward the DHCP packets. To delete the DHCP server address use no ip dhcp relay vlan.

Syntax

ip dhcp relay vlan vid helper-address ip-address no ip dhcp relay vlan vid helper-address [ ip-address ]

Parameter

vid VLAN ID.

ip-address DHCP Server address.

Command mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Add DHCP server address 192.168.2.1 to VLAN 1:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp relay vlan 1 helper-address 192.168.2.1

32.12 show ip dhcp relay Description

The show ip dhcp relay command is used to display the global status and Option 82 configuration of DHCP Relay.

Syntax

show ip dhcp relay

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

302

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the configuration of DHCP Relay:

Switch(config)# show ip dhcp relay

303

Chapter 33 DHCP L2 Relay Commands

33.1 ip dhcp l2relay Description

The ip dhcp l2relay command is used to enable DHCP L2 Relay function globally. To disable DHCP L2 Relay function, please use no ip dhcp l2relay command.

Syntax

ip dhcp l2relay no ip dhcp l2relay

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable DHCP L2 Relay function globally:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp l2relay

33.2 ip dhcp l2relay vlan Description

The ip dhcp l2relay vlan command is used to enable DHCP L2 relay in the specified VLAN. To disable DHCP L2 Relay in the specific vlan, please use no ip dhcp l2relay vlan command.

Syntax

ip dhcp l2relay vlan vlan-range no ip dhcp l2relay vlan vlan-range

Parameter

vlan-range Specify the vlan to be enabled with DHCP L2 relay.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

304

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable DHCP L2 Relay for VLAN 2:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp l2relay vlan 2

33.3 ip dhcp l2relay information Description

The ip dhcp l2relay information command is used to enable option 82 support in DHCP Relay. To disable this function, please use no ip dhcp l2relay information command.

Syntax

ip dhcp l2relay information no ip dhcp l2relay information

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable option 82 support in DHCP Relay for port 2:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp l2relay information

33.4 ip dhcp l2relay information strategy Description

The ip dhcp l2relay information strategy command is used to specify the operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the Host. To restore to the default option, please use no ip dhcp l2relay information strategy command.

305

Syntax

ip dhcp l2relay information strategy { drop | keep | replace} no ip dhcp l2relay information strategy

Parameter

drop | keep | replace The operations for Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the Host. The default operation is keep. drop: Discard the packet with the Option 82 field. keep: Keep the Option 82 field in the packet. replace: Replace the option 82 field with the system option defined by the switch.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the option 82 strategy as replace to replace the Option 82 field with the local parameter on receiving the DHCP request packet for port 2:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp l2relay information strategy replace

33.5 ip dhcp l2relay information format Description

The ip dhcp l2relay information format command is used to select the format of option 82 sub-option value field. To restore to the default option, please use no ip dhcp l2relay information format command.

Syntax

ip dhcp l2relay information format { normal | private }

no ip dhcp l2relay information format

Parameter

normal | private The format type of option 82 sub-option value field.

306

normal: Indicates that the format of sub-option value field is TLV (type-length-value).

private: Indicates that the format of sub-option value field is the value you configure for the related sub-option.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Select the format of option 82 sub-option value field as TLV (type-length-value) for port 2:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)#ip dhcp l2relay information format normal

33.6 ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id Description

The ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id command is used to specify the custom circuit ID when option 82 customization is enabled. To clear the circuit ID, please use no ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id command.

Syntax

ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id circuitID no ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id

Parameter

circuitID Specify the circuit ID, ranging from 1 to 64 characters.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

307

Example

Specify the circuit ID as TP-Link for port 2:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id TP-Link

33.7 ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id Description

The ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id command is used to specify the custom remote ID when option 82 customization is enabled. To clear the remote ID, please use no ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id command.

Syntax

ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id remoteID no ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id

Parameter

remoteID Specify the remote ID, ranging from 1 to 64 characters.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the remote ID as TP-Link for port 2:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id TP-Link

33.8 show ip dhcp l2relay Description

The show ip dhcp l2relay command is used to display the global status and Option 82 configuration of DHCP Relay.

Syntax

show ip dhcp l2relay

308

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the configuration of DHCP Relay:

Switch(config)# show ip dhcp l2relay

33.9 show ip dhcp l2relay interface Description

The show ip dhcp l2relay interface command is used to display the DHCP L2 Relay status for the ports.

Syntax

show ip dhcp l2relay interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the DHCP L2 Relay configuration of port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)# show ip dhcp l2relay interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

309

Chapter 34 QoS Commands

QoS (Quality of Service) function is used to optimize the network performance. It provides you with network service experience of a better quality. The switch implements three priority modes based on port, on 802.1p and on DSCP.

34.1 qos trust mode Description

The qos trust mode command is used to configure the trust mode of CoS (Class of Service) function for the ports. The default trust mode is trust port priority.

Syntax qos trust mode { dot1p | dscp | untrust }

Parameter dot1p Trust 802.1p mode. In this mode, data will be classified into different services based on the 802.1p priority.

dscp Trust dscp mode. In this mode, data will be classified into different services based on the dscp priority.

untrust Trust port mode. In this mode, data will be classified into different services based on the based on the port priority.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Set the trust mode of port 1/0/3 as dscp:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# qos trust mode dscp

310

34.2 qos port-priority Description

The qos port-priority command is used to configure the port to 802.1p priority mapping for the desired port. To return to the default configuration, please use no qos port-priority command. When Port Priority is enabled, the packets will be mapped to different priority queues based on the ingress ports.

Syntax qos port-priority { dot1p-priority }

no qos port-priority

Parameter dot1p-priority The 802.1p priority that the packets will be mapped to from the desired port. It ranges from 0 to 7, which represent 802.1p priority 07 respectively. By default, the priority is 0.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the priority of port 5 as 3:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

Switch(config-if)# qos port-priority 3

34.3 qos cos-map Description

The qos cos-map command is used to configure 802.1p to queue mapping globally. To return to the default configuration, please use no qos cos-map command. When 802.1P Priority is enabled, the packets with 802.1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802.1P priority.

311

Syntax qos cos-map { dot1p-priority } { tc-queue }

no qos cos-map

Parameter dot1p-priority The value of 802.1p priority. It ranges from 0 to 7, which represent 802.1p priority 07 respectively.

tc-queue The number of TC queue that the 80.1p priority will be mapped to. It ranges from 0 to 7.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Map the 802.1p priority 5 to TC-2:

Switch (config)# qos cos-map 5 2

34.4 qos dot1p-remap Description

The qos dot1p-remap command is used to configure the 802.1p to 802.1p mappings. To return to the default configuration, please use no qos dot1p-remap command. When 802.1p remap is configured, the packets with the specific 802.1p priority will tagged with the desired new 802.1p priority.

Syntax qos dot1p-remap { dot1p-priority } { new-dot1p-priority }

no qos dot1p-remap

Parameter dot1p-priority The original 802.1p priority. It ranges from 0 to 7, which represent 802.1p priority 07 respectively.

new-dot1p-priority The new 802.1p priority. It ranges from 0 to 7.

Command Mode For some devices:

Global Configuration Mode

312

For other devices:

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example For some devices:

Remap 802.1p priority 5 to 802.1p priority 6:

Switch(config)#qos dot1p-remap 5 6

For other devices:

Remap 802.1p priority 5 to 802.1p priority 6 for port 1/0/1:

T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#qos dot1p-remap 5 6

34.5 qos dscp-map Description

The qos dscp-map command is used to configure the DSCP to 802.1p mapping. To return to the default configuration, please use no qos dscp-map command. DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) is a new definition to IP ToS field given by IEEE. This field is used to divide IP datagram into 64 priorities. When DSCP Priority is enabled, IP datagram are mapped to different priority levels based on DSCP priority.

Syntax qos dscp-map { dscp-value-list } { dot1p-priority }

no qos dscp-map

Parameter dscp-value-list The DSCP value list in the format of 1-3,5,7. The valid values are from 0 to 63.

dot1p-priority The 802.1p priority to which the DSCP priority will be mapped. It ranges from 0 to 7, which represent 802.1p priority 07 respectively. By default, the priority is 0.

313

Command Mode For some devices:

Global Configuration Mode

For other devices:

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example For some devices:

Map DSCP Priority 5 to 802.1p priority 2:

Switch(config)#qos dscp-map 5 2

For other devices:

Map DSCP Priority 5 to 802.1p priority 2 for port 1/0/1:

T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#qos dscp-map 5 2

34.6 qos dscp-remap Description

The qos dscp-remap command is used to configure the DSCP to DSCP mappings. To return to the default configuration, please use no qos dscp-remap command. When DSCP remap is configured, the packets with the specific DSCP priority will be changed to the desired new DSCP priority.

Syntax qos queue dscp-map { dscp-value-list } { dscp-remap-value }

no qos queue dscp-map

Parameter Dscp-value-list The original DSCP value list in the format of 1-3,5,7. The valid values are from 0 to 63.

Dscp-remap-value The new DSCP value, which ranges from 0 to 63.

314

Command Mode For some devices:

Global Configuration Mode

For other devices:

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example For some devices:

Map DSCP values 10-12 to DSCP value 2:

Switch(config)# qos dscp-remap 10-12 2

For other devices:

Map DSCP values 10-12 to DSCP value 2 for port 1/0/2:

T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

T2600G-28TS(config-if)# qos dscp-remap 10-12 2

34.7 qos queue bandwidth

Note: This command is only available on certain devices

Description The qos queue bandwidth command is used to configure the minimum guaranteed bandwidth allocated to the specified queue. A value of 0 means there is no guaranteed minimum bandwidth in effect (best-effort service). The default value is 0. The sum of all bandwidth values for the queues must not exceed 100%. To return to the default configuration, please use no qos bandwidth command.

Syntax qos queue { tc-queue } bandwidth { rate }

no qos queue { tc-queue } bandwidth

315

Parameter tc-queue The egress queue ID. It ranges from 0 to 7, which represents TC queue from TC0 to TC7 respectively.

rate The minimum bandwidth percentage for queue, ranging from 1 to 100 in increments of 1. By default, it is 0.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Set the minimum bandwidth of TC5 as 10% for port 1/0/1:

T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

T2600G-28TS(config-if)# qos queue 5 bandwidth 10

34.8 qos queue mode Description

The qos queue mode command is used to configure the Scheduler Mode. When the network is congested, the program that many packets complete for resources must be solved, usually in the way of queue scheduling. The switch will control the forwarding sequence of the packets according to the priority queues and scheduling algorithms you set. On this switch, the priority levels are labeled as TC0, TC1, TC2 TC7.

Syntax qos queue { tc-queue } mode { sp | wrr } [ weight weight ]

Parameter tc-queue The egress queue ID. It ranges from 0 to 7, which represents TC queue from TC0 to TC7 respectively.

sp Strict-Priority Mode. In this mode, the queue with higher priority will occupy the whole bandwidth. Packets in the queue with lower priority are sent only when the queue with higher priority is empty.

316

wrr Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, packets in all the queues are sent in order based on the weight value for each queue. If you select this mode, you need to specify the queue weight at the same time.

weight Configure the weight value of the specified TC queue. When the scheduler mode is specified as WRR, the weight value ranges from 1 to 127. The 8 queues will take up the bandwidth according to their ratio.

Command Mode For some devices:

Global Configuration Mode

For other devices:

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example For some devices:

Specify the Scheduler Mode of TC1 as WRR and set the queue weight as 10:

Switch(config)# qos queue 1 mode wrr weight 10

For other devices:

Specify the Scheduler Mode of TC1 as WRR and set the queue weight as 10 for port 1/0/1:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)# qos queue 1 mode wrr weight 10

34.9 show qos cos-map Description

The show qos cos-msp command is used to display the 802.1p priority to TC queue mappings.

Syntax show qos cos-map

317

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the 802.1p to queue mappings:

Switch# show qos cos-map

34.10 show qos dot1p-remap interface

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The show qos dot1p-remap interface command is used to display the 802.1p priority to 802.1p priority mappings.

Syntax show qos dot1p-remap interface [fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameter

port The port number. port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the IEEE 802.1P remap configuration of all the ports:

T2600G-28TS# show qos dot1p-remap interface

34.11 show qos dot1p-remap

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

318

Description The show qos dot1p-remap interface command is used to display the 802.1p priority to 802.1p priority mappings.

Syntax show qos dot1p-remap

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the IEEE 802.1P remap configuration:

Switch# show qos dot1p-remap

34.12 show qos dscp-map interface

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The show qos dscp-map interface command is used to display the DSCP priority configuration of the ports.

Syntax show qos dscp-map interface [fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameter

port The port number. port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display theDSCP priority configuration of all the ports:

T2600G-28TS# show qos dscp-map interface

319

34.13 show qos dscp-map

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The show qos dscp-map command is used to display the DSCP priority configuration.

Syntax show qos dscp-map

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the DSCP priority configuration:

Switch# show qos dscp-map

34.14 show qos dscp-remap interface

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The show qos dscp-remap interface command is used to display the DSCP priority to DSCP priority mappings of the ports.

Syntax show qos dscp-remap interface [fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameter

port The port number. port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

320

Example Display the DSCP to DSCP mappings for all the ports:

T2600G-28TS# show qos dscp-remap interface

34.15 show qos dscp-remap

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The show qos dscp-remap command is used to display the DSCP priority to DSCP priority mappings.

Syntax show qos dscp-remap

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the DSCP to DSCP mappings:

Switch# show qos dscp-remap

34.16 show qos port-priority interface Description

The show qos port-priority interface command is used to display the port to 802.1p priority mappings for the ports.

Syntax show qos port-priority interface [fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameter

port The port number. port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

321

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the port to 802.1p priority mappings for all the ports:

Switch# show qos port-priority interface

34.17 show qos trust interface Description

The show qos trust interface command is used to display the trust mode of the ports.

Syntax show qos trust interface [fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameter

port The port number. port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the trust mode of all the ports:

Switch# show qos trust interface

34.18 show qos queue interface Description

The show qos queue interface command is used to display the scheduler settings of the ports.

Syntax show qos queue interface [fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

322

Parameter

port The port number. port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the scheduler settings of all the ports:

Switch# show qos queue interface

323

Chapter 35 Bandwidth Control Commands

Bandwidth Control functions to control the traffic rate and traffic threshold on each port to ensure network performance. Rate limit functions to limit the ingress/egress traffic rate on each port. Storm Control function allows the switch to monitor broadcast packets, multicast packets and Unknown unicast frames in the network.

35.1 storm-control rate-mode Description

The storm-control rate-mode command is used to configure the storm control mode of the interface. To return to the default configuration, please use no storm-control rate-mode command.

Syntax storm-control rate-mode { kbps | ratio | pps } no storm-control rate-mode

Parameter kbps Select the storm control mode of the interface as kbps. The switch will limit the maximum speed of the specific kinds of traffic in kilo-bits per second. ratio Select the storm control mode of the interface as ratio. The switch will limit the percentage of bandwidth utilization for specific kinds of traffic.

pps The switch will limit the maximum number of packets per second for specific kinds of traffic.

Note: pps is only available on certain devices.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines This command should be used along with the storm-control command to enable the storm control function and specify the detailed parameters.

324

Example Set the storm control mode as kbps on port 1/0/5:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

Switch(config-if)# storm-control rate-mode kbps

35.2 storm-control Description

The storm-control command is used to enable the broadcast, multicast, or unknown unicast strom control function and to set threshold levels on an interface. To return to the default configuration, please use no storm-control command.

Syntax storm-control { broadcast | multicast | unicast } { rate } no storm-control { broadcast | multicast | unicast }

Parameter broadcast | multicast | unicast Select the mode of the storm control on the interface. rate Specify the bandwidth for receiving packets on the port. The specified type of packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be processed according to the configuration of storm-control exceed command. For kbps, the rate ranges from 1 to 1000000 kbps, and is rounded off to the nearest multiple of 64. For ratio, the rate ranges from 1 to 100 percent. For pps, the rate ranges from 1 to 1488000 packets per second.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines Before you configure the storm-control type as kbps or ratio, pelease ensure that the port is not in pps mode.

Example Configure the broadcast storm control rate as 1024 kbps on port 1/0/5:

325

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

Switch(config-if)# storm-control rate-mode kbps

Switch(config-if)# storm-control broadcast 1024

35.3 storm-control exceed Description

The storm-control exceed command is used to configure the action that the switch will perform when the storm exceeds the defined limit on an interface.

Syntax storm-control exceed { drop | shutdown } [ revocer-time time ]

Parameter drop Set the Action as Drop. The port will drop the subsequent packets when the traffic exceeds the limit. shutdown Set the Action as Shutdown. The port will be shutdown when the traffic exceeds the limit. time Specify the recover time for the port. It takes effect only when the action is set as shutdown. The valid values are from 0 to 3600 and the default value is 0. When the port is shutdown, it can recover to its normal state after the recover time passed. If the recover time is specified as 0, which means the port will not recover to its normal state automatically and you can recover the port manually using storm-control recover command.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the action as drop on port 1/0/5:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

Switch(config-if)# storm-control exceed drop

326

35.4 storm-control recover Description

The storm-control recover command is used to recover the port manually after the port is shutdown because of the storm. When the recover time is specified as 0, the port will not recover to its normal state automatically. In this condition, you need to use this command to recover the port manually.

Syntax storm-control recover

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Recover port 1/0/5 manually:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

Switch(config-if)# storm-control recover

35.5 bandwidth Description

The bandwidth command is used to configure the bandwidth limit for an Ethernet port. To disable the bandwidth limit, please use no bandwidth command.

Syntax bandwidth {[ ingress ingress-rate ] [ egress egress-rate ]}

no bandwidth { all | ingress | egress}

Parameter ingress-rate Specify the upper rate limit for receiving packets. The rate ranges from 1 to 1000000 kbps for the gigaport and 1 to 100000 kbps for the fast port, and is rounded off to the nearest multiple of 64.

327

egress-rate Specify the upper rate limit for sending packets. The rate ranges from 1 to 1000000 kbps for the gigaport and 1 to 100000 kbps for the fast port, and is rounded off to the nearest multiple of 64.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the ingress-rate as 5120Kbps and egress-rate as 1024Kbps for port 1/0/5:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

Switch(config-if)# bandwidth ingress 5120 egress 1024

35.6 show storm-control Description

The show storm-control command is used to display the storm-control information of Ethernet ports.

Syntax show storm-control interface [ fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port-list ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id-list ]

Parameter port-list The list of Ethernet ports.

port-channel-id-list The list of port channels.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the storm-control information of port 4, 5, 6, and 7:

Switch(config)# show storm-control interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4-7

328

35.7 show bandwidth Description

The show bandwidth command is used to display the bandwidth-limit information of Ethernet ports.

Syntax show bandwidth interface [ fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port-list ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id-list ]

Parameter port-list The list of Ethernet ports.

port-channel-id-list The list of port channels.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the bandwidth-limit information of port 1/0/4:

Switch(config)# show bandwidth interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4

329

Chapter 36 Voice VLAN Commands

Voice VLANs are configured specially for voice data stream. By configuring Voice VLANs and adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLANs, you can perform QoS-related configuration for voice data, ensuring the transmission priority of voice data stream and voice quality.

36.1 voice vlan Description

The voice vlan command is used to enable Voice VLAN function. To disable Voice VLAN function, please use no voice vlan command.

Syntax

voice vlan vlan-id

no voice vlan

Parameter

vlan-id Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the Voice VLAN function for VLAN 10:

Switch(config)# voice vlan 10

36.2 voice vlan (interface) Description

The voice vlan command is used to enable Voice VLAN function on the desired ports. To disable Voice VLAN function on ports, please use no voice vlan command.

330

Syntax

voice vlan

no voice vlan

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the Voice VLAN function for port 1/0/1:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)#voice vlan

36.3 voice vlan priority Description

The voice vlan priority command is used to configure the priority for the Voice VLAN. To restore to the default priority, please use no voice vlan priority command.

Syntax

voice vlan priority pri

no voice vlan priority

Parameter

pri Priority, ranging from 0 to 7, and the default value is 7.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

331

Example

Configure the priority of the Voice VLAN as 5:

Switch(config)# voice vlan priority 5

36.4 voice vlan oui Description

The voice vlan oui command is used to create Voice VLAN OUI. To delete the specified Voice VLAN OUI, please use no voice vlan oui command.

Syntax

voice vlan oui oui-prefix oui-desc string

no voice vlan mac-address oui-prefix

Parameter

oui-prefix The OUI address of the voice device, in the format of XX:XX:XX.

string Give a description to the OUI for identification which contains 16 characters at most.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create a Voice VLAN OUI described as TP-Phone with the OUI address 00:11:11:11:11:11 and the mask address FF:FF:FF:00:00:00:

Switch(config)#voice vlan oui 00:11:11 oui-desc TP-Phone

36.5 show voice vlan Description

The show voice vlan command is used to display the global configuration information of Voice VLAN.

332

Syntax

show voice vlan

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display the configuration information of Voice VLAN globally:

Switch(config)# show voice vlan

36.6 show voice vlan oui-table Description

The show voice vlan oui command is used to display the configuration information of Voice VLAN OUI.

Syntax

show voice vlan oui

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display the configuration information of Voice VLAN OUI:

Switch(config)# show voice vlan oui-table

36.7 show voice vlan interface Description

The show voice vlan interface command is used to display the Voice VLAN configuration information of all ports.

333

Syntax

show voice vlan interface

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display the Voice VLAN configuration information of all ports and port channels:

Switch(config)# show voice vlan interface

334

Chapter 37 Auto VoIP Commands

The Auto VoIP feature is used to prioritize the transmission of voice traffic. Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) enables telephone calls over a data network, and the Auto VoIP feature helps provide a classification mechanism for voice packets. When Auto VoIP is configured on a port that receives both voice and data traffic, this feature can help ensure that the sound quality of an IP phone does not deteriorate when data traffic on the port is heavy.

37.1 auto-voip Description

The auto-voip command is used to enable the Auto VoIP function globally.

To disable the Auto VoIP function, use no auto-voip command.

Syntax

auto-voip

no auto-voip

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Example

Enable the Auto VoIP function globally:

Switch(config)# auto-voip

37.2 auto-voip (interface) Description

The auto-voip command is used to specify the interface mode as VLAN ID for the ports. In this mode, the voice devices will send voice packets with desired VLAN tag.

Syntax

auto-voip vlan-id

Parameter

vlan-id Specify the Auto VoIP VLAN ID. The valid values are from 2 to 4094.

335

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Example

Set Auto VoIP VLAN 3 for port 3:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# auto-voip 3

37.3 auto-voip dot1p Description

The auto-voip dot1p command is used to specify the interface mode as dat1p for the ports. In this mode, the voice devices will send voice packets with desired 802.1p priority.

Syntax

auto-voip dot1p dot1p

Parameter

dot1pSet the 802.1p priority of Auto VoIP on specified ports. It ranges from 0 to 7.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Example

Set the 802.1p priority as 5 for the port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# auto-voip dot1p 5

336

37.4 auto-voip untagged Description

The auto-voip untagged command is used to specify the interface mode as untagged for the ports. In this mode, the voice devices will send untagged voice packets.

Syntax

auto-voip untagged

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Example

Set the interface mode as untagged for port 1/0/3:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# auto-voip untagged

37.5 auto-voip none Description

The auto-voip none command is used to specify the interface mode as none for the ports. In this mode, the switch allows the voice devices to use its own configuration to send voice traffic.

Syntax

auto-voip none

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Example

Instruct voice devices that are connected to port 3 to send the packets according to its own configuration:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# auto-voip none

337

37.6 no auto-voip (interface) Description

The no auto-voip command is used to specify the interface mode as disabled for the ports, which means the Auto VoIP function is disabled on the corresponding port.

Syntax

no auto-voip

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Example

Disable the Auto VoIP function on port 1/0/3:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# no auto-voip

37.7 auto-voip dscp Description

The auto-voip dscp command is used to set the DSCP value of Auto VoIP on specified ports.

Syntax

auto-voip dscp value

Parameter

valueSet the DSCP value of Auto VoIP on specified ports. It ranges from 0 to 63. By default, it is 0.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Example

Set DSCP value of Auto VoIP on port 3 as 33:

338

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# auto-voip dscp 33

37.8 auto-voip data priority Description

The auto-voip data priority command is used to enable or disable the CoS Override Mode on specified ports.

Syntax

auto-voip data priority { trust | untrust }

Parameter

trustIn this mode, the switch will then put the voice packets in the corresponding TC queue according to the 802.1p priority of the packets.

untrustIn this mode, the switch will ignore the 802.1p priority in the voice packets and put the packets in TC-5 directly.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Example

Set the CoS Override Mode as trust for port 1/0/3:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# auto-voip data priority trust

37.9 show auto-voip Description

The show auto-voip command is used to display the Auto VoIP configuration information.

Syntax

show auto-voip [ interface ]

339

Parameter

interface Displays the Auto VoIP configuration information of ports. When no parameter is entered, displays the global Auto VoIP configuration information.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and any Configuration Mode

Example

Displays the global Auto VoIP configuration information:

Switch (config)# show auto-voip

340

Chapter 38 Access Control Commands

38.1 user access-control ip-based enable Description

The user access-control ip-based enable command is used to configure the access control mode IP-based. To disable the access control feature, please use no user access-control command.

Syntax

user access-control ip-based enable

no user access-control

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the access control mode as IP-based:

Switch(config)# user access-control ip-based enable

38.2 user access-control ip-based Description

The user access-control ip-based command is used to limit the IP-range of the users for login. Only the users within the IP-range you set here are allowed to login. You can add up to 30 IP-based entries. To cancel the user access limit, please use no user access-control ip-based command.

Syntax

user access-control ip-based { ip-addr ip-mask } [ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ]

no user access-control ip-based index id

341

Parameter

ip-addr The source IP address. Only the users within the IP-range you set here are allowed for login. 5 IP-based entries can be configured at most.

ip-mask The subnet mask of the IP address.

[ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ] Specify the access interface. These interfaces are enabled by default.

id Delete the specified IP-based entry.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the access-control of the user whose IP address is 192.168.0.148:

Switch(config)# user access-control ip-based 192.168.0.148

255.255.255.255

38.3 user access-control mac-based enable Description

The user access-control mac-based enable command is used to configure the access control mode MAC-based. To disable the access control feature, please use no user access-control command.

Syntax

user access-control mac-based enable

no user access-control

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

342

Example

Configure the access control mode as MAC-based:

Switch(config)# user access-control mac-based enable

38.4 user access-control mac-based Description

The user access-control mac-based command is used to limit the MAC address of the users for login. Only the user with this MAC address you set here is allowed to login. You can add up to 30 mac-based control entries. To delete the mac-based access control entry, please use no user access-control mac-based command.

Syntax

user access-control mac-based { mac-addr } [ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ]

no user access-control mac-based index id

Parameter

mac-addr The source MAC address. Only the user with this MAC address is allowed to login.

[ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ] Specify the access interface. These interfaces are enabled by default.

id Specify the ID of the mac-based entry to be deleted.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure that only the user whose MAC address is 00:00:13:0A:00:01 is allowed to login:

Switch(config)# user access-control mac-based 00:00:13:0A:00:01

343

38.5 user access-control port-based enable Description

The user access-control port-based enable command is used to configure the access control mode Port-based. To disable the access control feature, please use no user access-control command.

Syntax

user access-control port-based enable

no user access-control

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the access control mode as Port-based:

Switch(config)# user access-control port-based enable

38.6 user access-control port-based Description

The user access-control port-based command is used to limit the ports for login. Only the users connected to these ports you set here are allowed to login. You can add up to 30 port-based control entries. To delete the port-based access control entry, please use no user access-control port-based command.

Syntax

user access-control port-based interface { gigabitEthernet port-list } [ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ]

no user access-control port-based index id

Parameter

port-list The list group of Ethernet ports, in the format of 1/0/1-4. You can appoint 5 ports at most.

344

[ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ] Specify the access interface. These interfaces are enabled by default.

id Specify the ID of the port-based entry to be deleted.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure that only the users connected to ports 2-6 are allowed to login:

Switch(config)# user access-control port-based interface gigabitEthernet

1/0/2-6

345

Chapter 39 HTTP and HTTPS Commands

With the help of HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) or HTTPS (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer), you can manage the switch through a standard browser. HTTP is the protocol to exchange or transfer hypertext. SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), a security protocol, is to provide a secure connection for the application layer protocol (e.g. HTTP) based on TCP. Adopting asymmetrical encryption technology, SSL uses key pair to encrypt/decrypt information. A key pair refers to a public key (contained in the certificate) and its corresponding private key. By default the switch has a certificate (self-signed certificate) and a corresponding private key. The Certificate/Key Download function enables the user to replace the default key pair.

39.1 ip http server Description

The ip http server command is used to enable the HTTP server within the switch. To disable the HTTP function, please use no ip http server command. This function is enabled by default. The HTTP and HTTPS server function can be disabled at the same time.

Syntax

ip http server

no ip http server

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Disable the HTTP function:

Switch(config)# no ip http server

346

39.2 ip http port Description

The ip http port command is used to configure the port number of the HTTP server within the switch. To set the number to the default value, please use no ip http port command.

Syntax

ip http port port-num

no ip http port

Parameter

port-num Enter the port number. This value ranges from 1 to 65535.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Set the port number of HTTP server as 1800:

Switch(config)# ip http port 1800

39.3 ip http max-users Description

The ip http max-users command is used to configure the maximum number of users that are allowed to connect to the HTTP server. To cancel this limitation, please use no ip http max-users command.

Syntax

ip http max-users admin-num operator-num poweruser-num user-num

no ip http max-users

Parameter

admin-num The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP server as Admin, ranging from 1 to 16. The total number of users should be no more than 16.

347

operator-num The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP server as operator, ranging from 0 to 15. The total number of users should be no more than 16.

poweruser-num The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP server as Power User, ranging from 0 to 15. The total number of users should be no more than 16.

user-num The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP server as User, ranging from 0 to 15. The total number of users should be no more than 16.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the maximum number of the Admin, Operator, Power User and User as 5, 1, 1, 1 for HTTP:

Switch(config)# ip http max-users 5 1 1 1

39.4 ip http session timeout Description

The ip http session timeout command is used to configure the connection timeout of the HTTP server. To restore to the default timeout time, please use no ip http session timeout command.

Syntax

ip http session timeout time

no ip http session timeout

Parameter

time The timeout time, ranging from 5 to 30 in minutes. By default, the value is 10.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

348

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the timeout time of the HTTP connection as 15 minutes:

Switch(config)# ip http session timeout 15

39.5 ip http secure-server Description

The ip http secure-server command is used to enable the HTTPS server within the switch. To disable the HTTPS function, please use no ip http secure-server command. This function is enabled by default. The HTTP and HTTPS server function can be disabled at the same time.

Syntax

ip http secure-server

no ip http secure-server

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Disable the HTTP function:

Switch(config)# no ip http secure-server

39.6 ip http secure-port Description

The ip http secure-port command is used to configure the port number of the HTTPS server within the switch. To set the number to the default value, please use no ip http secure-port command.

Syntax

ip http secure-port port-num

349

no ip http secure-port

Parameter

port-num Enter the port number. This value ranges from 1 to 65535.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Set the port number of HTTPS server as 2800:

Switch(config)# ip http secure-port 2800

39.7 ip http secure-protocol Description

The ip http secure-protocol command is used to configure the SSL protocol version. To restore to the default SSL version, please use no ip http secure-protocol command. By default, the switch supports all the protocol versions, including SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1 and TLS 1.2.

Syntax

ip http secure-protocol { ssl3 | tls1 | tls11 | tls12 | all }

no ip http secure-protocol

Parameter

ssl3 Select SSL Version 3.0 as the protocol for HTTPS.

tls1 Select TLS Version 1.0 as the protocol for HTTPS.

tls11 Select TLS Version 1.1 as the protocol for HTTPS.

tls12 Select TLS Version 1.2 as the protocol for HTTPS.

all Enable all the above protocols for HTTPS. The HTTPS server and client will negotiate the protocol each time.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

350

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the protocol of SSL connection as SSL 3.0:

Switch(config)# ip http secure-protocol ssl3

39.8 ip http secure-ciphersuite Description

The ip http secure-ciphersuite command is used to configure the cipherSuites over the SSL connection supported by the switch. To restore to the default ciphersuite types, please use no ip http secure-ciphersuite command.

Syntax

ip http secure-ciphersuite { [ rc4-128-md5 ] [ rc4-128-sha ] [ des-cbc-sha ] [ 3des-ede-cbc-sha ] [ ecdhe-a128-g-s256 ] [ ecdhe-a256-g-s384 ] }

no ip http secure-ciphersuite

Parameter

[ rc4-128-md5 ] [ rc4-128-sha ] [ des-cbc-sha ] [ 3des-ede-cbc-sha ] [ ecdhe-a128-g-s256 ] [ ecdhe-a256-g-s384 ] Specify the encryption algorithm and the digest algorithm to use on an SSL connection. By default, the switch supports all these ciphersuites.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the ciphersuite to be used for encryption over the SSL connection as 3des-ede-cbc-sha:

Switch(config)# ip http secure-ciphersuite 3des-ede-cbc-sha

351

39.9 ip http secure-max-users Description

The ip http secure-max-users command is used to configure the maximum number of users that are allowed to connect to the HTTPs server. To cancel this limitation, please use no ip http secure-max-users command.

Syntax

ip http secure-max-users admin-num operator-num poweruser-num user-num

no ip secure-max-users

Parameter

admin-num The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTPs server as Admin, ranging from 1 to 16. The total number of users should be less than 16.

Operator-num The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTPs server as operator, ranging from 0 to 15. The total number of users should be less than 16.

poweruser-num The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP server as Power User, ranging from 0 to 15. The total number of users should be less than 16.

user-num The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP server as User, ranging from 0 to 15. The total number of users should be less than 16.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the maximum number of the Admin, Operator, Power User and User as 5, 1, 1, 1 for HTTPs:

Switch(config)# ip http secure-max-users 5 1 1 1

352

39.10 ip http secure-session timeout Description

The ip http secure-session timeout command is used to configure the connection timeout of the HTTPS server. To restore to the default timeout time, please use no ip http secure-session timeout command.

Syntax

ip http secure-session timeout time

no ip http secure-session timeout

Parameter

time The timeout time, ranging from 5 to 30 in minutes. By default, the value is 10.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the timeout time of the HTTPs connection as 15 minutes:

Switch(config)# ip http secure-session timeout 15

39.11 ip http secure-server download certificate Description

The ip http secure-server download certificate command is used to download a certificate to the switch from TFTP server.

Syntax

ip http secure-server download certificate ssl-cert ip-address ip-addr

Parameter ssl-cert The name of the SSL certificate which is selected to download to the switch. The length of the name ranges from 1 to 25 characters. The Certificate must be BASE64 encoded.

353

ip-addr The IP address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Download an SSL Certificate named ssl-cert from TFTP server with the IP address of 192.168.0.146:

Switch(config)# ip http secure-server download certificate ssl-cert

ip-address 192.168.0.146

Download an SSL Certificate named ssl-cert from TFTP server with the IP address of fe80::1234

Switch(config)# ip http secure-server download certificate ssl-cert

ip-address fe80::1234

39.12 ip http secure-server download key Description

The ip http secure-server download key command is used to download an SSL key to the switch from TFTP server.

Syntax

ip http secure-server download key ssl-key ip-address ip-addr

Parameter ssl-key The name of the SSL key which is selected to download to the switch. The length of the name ranges from 1 to 25 characters. The Key must be BASE64 encoded.

ip-addr The IP address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

354

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Download an SSL key named ssl-key from TFTP server with the IP address of 192.168.0.146:

Switch(config)# ip http secure-server download key ssl-key ip-address

192.168.0.146

Download an SSL key named ssl-key from TFTP server with the IP address of fe80::1234

Switch(config)# ip http secure-server download key ssl-key ip-address

fe80::1234

39.13 show ip http configuration Description

The show ip http configuration command is used to display the configuration information of the HTTP server, including status, session timeout, access-control, max-user number and the idle-timeout, etc.

Syntax

show ip http configuration

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the configuration information of the HTTP server:

Switch(config)# show ip http configuration

355

39.14 show ip http secure-server Description

The show ip http secure-server command is used to display the global configuration of SSL.

Syntax

show ip http secure-server

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the global configuration of SSL:

Switch(config)# show ip http secure-server

356

Chapter 40 SSH Commands

SSH (Security Shell) can provide the unsecured remote management with security and powerful authentication to ensure the security of the management information.

40.1 ip ssh server Description

The ip ssh server command is used to enable SSH function. To disable the SSH function, please use no ip ssh server command.

Syntax

ip ssh server

no ip ssh server

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the SSH function:

Switch(config)# ip ssh server

40.2 ip ssh port Description

The ip ssh port command is used to configure the port for SSH service. To set the value to the default, please use no ip ssh port command.

Syntax

ip ssh port port

no ip ssh port

357

Parameter

port Set the port number. It ranges from 1 to 65535. The default value is 22.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the SSH port number as 22:

Switch(config)# ip ssh port 22

40.3 ip ssh version Description

The ip ssh version command is used to enable the SSH protocol version. To disable the protocol version, please use no ip ssh version command.

Syntax

ip ssh version { v1 | v2 }

no ip ssh version { v1 | v2 }

Parameter

v1 | v2 The SSH protocol version to be enabled. They represent SSH v1 and SSH v2 respectively.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable SSH v2:

Switch(config)# ip ssh version v2

358

40.4 ip ssh algorithm Description

The ip ssh algorithm command is used to configure the algorithm in SSH function. To disable the specified algorithm, please use no ip ssh algorithm command.

Syntax ip ssh algorithm {AES128-CBC | AES192-CBC | AES256-CBC | Blowfish-CBC | Cast128-CBC | 3DES-CBC | HMAC-SHA1 | HMAC-MD5 }

no ip ssh algorithm

Parameter AES128-CBC | AES192-CBC | AES256-CBC | Blowfish-CBC | Cast128-CBC | 3DES-CBC | HMAC-SHA1 | HMAC-MD5 Specify the SSH algorithm.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Specify the SSH algorithm as AES128-CBC:

Switch(config)# ip ssh algorithm AES128-CBC

40.5 ip ssh timeout Description

The ip ssh timeout command is used to specify the idle-timeout time of SSH. To restore to the factory defaults, please use ip ssh timeout command.

Syntax

ip ssh timeout value

no ip ssh timeout

Parameter

value The Idle-timeout time. During this period, the system will automatically release the connection if there is no

359

operation from the client. It ranges from 1 to 120 in seconds. By default, this value is 120 seconds.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the idle-timeout time of SSH as 30 seconds:

Switch(config)# ip ssh timeout 30

40.6 ip ssh max-client Description

The ip ssh max-client command is used to specify the maximum number of the connections to the SSH server. To return to the default configuration, please use no ip ssh max-client command.

Syntax

ip ssh max-client num

no ip ssh max-client

Parameter

num The maximum number of the connections to the SSH server. It ranges from 1 to 5. By default, this value is 5.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the maximum number of the connections to the SSH server as 3:

Switch(config)# ip ssh max-client 3

360

40.7 ip ssh download Description

The ip ssh download command is used to download the SSH key file from TFTP server.

Syntax ip ssh download { v1 | v2 } key-file ip-address ip-addr

Parameter v1 | v2 Select the type of SSH key to download, v1 represents SSH-1, v2 represents SSH-2.

key-file The name of the key-file which is selected to download. The length of the name ranges from 1 to 25 characters. The key length of the downloaded file must be in the range of 512 to 3072 bits.

ip-addr The IP address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Download an SSH-1 type key file named ssh-key from TFTP server with the IP address 192.168.0.148:

Switch(config)# ip ssh download v1 ssh-key ip-address 192.168.0.148

Download an SSH-1 type key file named ssh-key from TFTP server with the IP address fe80::1234:

Switch(config)# ip ssh download v1 ssh-key ip-address fe80::1234

40.8 remove public-key Description

The remove public-key command is used to remove the SSH public key from the switch.

Syntax remove public-key { v1 | v2 }

361

Parameter v1 | v2 Select the type of SSH public key, v1 represents SSH-1, v2 represents SSH-2.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Remove the SSH-1 type public key from the switch:

Switch# remove public-key v1

40.9 show ip ssh Description

The show ip ssh command is used to display the global configuration of SSH.

Syntax show ip ssh

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the global configuration of SSH:

Switch(config)# show ip ssh

362

Chapter 41 Telnet Commands

41.1 telnet Description

The telnet command is used to log in and manage other devices via telnet.

Syntax

telnet ip-addr

Parameter

ip-addrThe IP address of the device you want to log in.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

User Guidelines

Make sure the switch can access the device, and the device can be logged in via telnet.

Example

Log in to a device with the IP address of 192.168.0.10:

Switch# telnet 192.168.0.10

41.2 telnet enable Description

The telnet enable command is used to enable the Telnet function. To disable the Telnet function, please use the telnet disable command. This function is enabled by default.

Syntax

telnet enable

telnet disable

363

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Disable the Telnet function:

Switch(config)# telnet disable

41.3 telnet port Description

The telnet port command is used to configure the telent port number. To restore the setting, please use the no telnet port command.

Syntax

telnet port port

no telnet port

Parameter

portThe number of telnet port.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the telnet port number as 566:

Switch(config)# telnet port 566

41.4 show telnet-status Description

The show telnet-status command is used to display the configuration information of the Telnet function.

364

Syntax

show telnet-status

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display whether the Telnet function is enabled:

Switch(config)# show telnet-status

365

Chapter 42 Serial Port Commands

Note: Serial Port commands are only available on certain devices.

42.1 serial_port baud-rate Description

The serial_port baud-rate command is used to configure the communication baud rate on the console port. To return to the default baud rate, please use no serial_port command.

Syntax

serial_port baud-rate { 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 }

no serial_port

Parameter

9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 Specify the communication baud rate on the console port. The default baul rate is 38400 bps.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the communication baud rate on the console port to the default value:

T2600G-28TS(config)# no serial_port

366

Chapter 43 AAA Commands

AAA stands for authentication, authorization and accounting. This feature is used to authenticate users trying to log in to the switch or trying to access the administrative level privilege.

Applicable Access Application

The authentication can be applied on the following access applications: Telnet, SSH and HTTP.

Authentication Method List

A method list describes the authentication methods and their sequence to authenticate a user. The switch supports Login List for users to gain access to the switch, and Enable List for normal users to gain administrative privileges.

RADIUS/TACACS+ Server

User can configure the RADIUS/TACACS+ servers for the connection between the switch and the server.

Server Group

User can define the authentication server group with up to several servers running the same secure protocols, either RADIUS or TACACS+. Users can set these servers in a preferable order, which is called the server group list. When a user tries to access the switch, the switch will ask the first server in the server group list for authentication. If no response is received, the second server will be queried, and so on.

43.1 tacacs-server host Description

The tacacs-server host command is used to configure a new TACACS+ server. To delete the specified TACACS+ server, please use no tacacs-server host command.

Syntax

tacacs-server host ip-address [ port port-id ] [ timeout time ] [ key { [ 0 ] string | 7 encryped-string } ]

no tacacs-server host ip-address

Parameter

ip-address Specify the IP address of the TACACS+ server.

port-id Specify the servers port number for AAA. By default it is 49.

367

time Specify the time in seconds the switch waits for the servers response before it times out. The time ranges from 1 to 9 seconds. The default is 5 seconds.

[ 0 ] string | 7 encrypted-string 0 and 7 are the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted key will follow. 7 indicates that a symmetric encrypted key with a fixed length will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0. string is the shared key for the switch and the authentication servers to exchange messages. encrypted-string is a symmetric encrypted key with a fixed length, which you can copy from another switchs configuration file. The key or encrypted-key you configured here will be displayed in the encrypted form. Always configure the key as the last item of this command.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines The TACACS+ servers you configured are added in the server group tacacs by default.

Example

Configure a TACACS+ server with the IP address as 1.1.1.1, TCP port as 1500, timeout as 6 seconds, and the unencrypted key string as 12345.

Switch(config)# tacacs-server host 1.1.1.1 port 1500 timeout 6 key 12345

43.2 show tacacs-server Description

This show tacacs-server command is used to display the summary information of the TACACS+ servers.

Syntax

show tacacs-server

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

368

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display the information of all the TACACS+ servers:

Switch(config)# show tacacs-server

43.3 radius-server host Description

The radius-server host command is used to configure a new RADIUS server. To delete the specified RADIUS server, please use no radius-server host command.

Syntax

radius-server host ip-address [ auth-port port-id ] [ acct-port port-id ] [ timeout time ] [ retransmit number ] [ nas-id nas-id ] [ key { [ 0 ] string | 7 encrypted-string } ]

no radius-server host ip-address

Parameter

ip-address Specify the IP address of the RADIUS server.

auth-port port-id Specify the UDP destination port for authentication requests. By default it is 1812.

acct-port port-id Specify the UDP destination port for accouting requests. By deault it is 1813.

time Specify the time in seconds the switch waits for the servers response before it times out. The time ranges from 1 to 9 seconds. The default is 5 seconds.

number Specify the number of times a RADIUS request is resent to a server if the server is not responding in time. By default it is 2 times.

nas-id Specify the name of the NAS (Network Access Server) to be contained in RADIUS packets for identification. It ranges from 1 to 31 characters. The default value is the MAC address of the switch. Generally, the NAS indicates the switch itself.

[ 0 ] string | 7 encrypted-string 0 and 7 are the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted key will follow. 7 indicates that a symmetric

369

encrypted key with a fixed length will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0. string is the shared key for the switch and the authentication servers to exchange messages. encrypted-string is a symmetric encrypted key with a fixed length, which you can copy from another switchs configuration file. The key or encrypted-key you configured here will be displayed in the encrypted form. Always configure the key as the last item of this command.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines The RADIUS servers you configured are added in the server group radius by default.

Example

Configure a RADIUS server with the IP address as 1.1.1.1, authentication port as 1200, timeout as 6 seconds, retransmit times as 3, and the unencrypted key string as 12345.

Switch(config)# radius-server host 1.1.1.1 auth-port 1200 timeout 6

retransmit 3 key 12345

43.4 show radius-server Description

This show radius-server command is used to display the summary information of the RADIUS servers.

Syntax

show radius-server

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

370

Example

Display the information of all the RADIUS servers:

Switch(config)# show radius-server

43.5 aaa group Description

This aaa group command is used to create AAA server groups to group existing TACACS+/RADIUS servers for authentication. This command puts the switch in the server group subconfiguration mode.

To delete the corresponding AAA group, please use the no aaa group command.

Syntax

aaa group { radius | tacacs }group-name no aaa group { radius | tacacs }group-name

Parameter

radius | tacacs Specify the server group type as RADIUS or TACACS+.

group-name Specify the server group name.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create a RADIUS server group with the name radius1:

Switch(config)# aaa group radius radius1

43.6 server Description

This server command is used to add the existing server in the defined server group. To remove the specified server from the server group, please use the no server command.

371

Syntax

server ip-address no server ip-address

Parameter

ip-address Specify the servers IP address.

Command Mode

Server Group Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create the RADIUS server 1.1.1.1 to RADIUS server group radius1:

Switch(config)# aaa group radius radius1 Switch(aaa-group)# server 1.1.1.1

43.7 show aaa group Description

This show aaa group command is used to display the summary information of the AAA groups. All the servers in this group will be listed if you specify the group name.

Syntax

show aaa group [ group-name ]

Parameter

group-name Specify the server group name.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display the information of all the server groups:

Switch(config)# show aaa group

372

43.8 aaa authentication login Description

This aaa authentication login command is used to configure a login authentication method list. A method list describes the authentication methods and their sequence to authenticate a user. To delete the specified authentication method list, please use the no aaa authentication login command.

Syntax

aaa authentication login { method-list } { method1 } [ method2 ] [ method3 ] [ method4 ]

no authentication login method-list

Parameter

method-list Specify the method list name.

method1, method2, method3, method4 Specify the authentication methods in order. The next authentication method is tried only if the previous method does not respond, not if it fails.

The preset methods include radius, tacacs, local and none. radius means the RADIUS server group radius; tacacs means the RACACS+ server group tacacs; local means local username database are used; none means no authentication is used for login.

Users can aslo define new method with the aaa group command.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines By default the login authentication method list is default with local as method1.

Example

Configure a login authentication method list list1 with the priority1 method as radius and priority2 method as local:

Switch(config)# aaa authenticaiton login list1 radius local

373

43.9 aaa authentication enable Description

This aaa authentication enable command is used to configure a privilege authentication method list. A method list describes the authentication methods and their sequence to elevate a users privilege. To delete the specified authentication method list, please use the no aaa authentication enable command.

Syntax

aaa authentication enable { method-list } { method1 } [ method2 ] [ method3 ] [ method4 ]

no authentication enable method-list

Parameter

method-list Specify the method list name.

method1, method2, method3, method4 Specify the authentication methods in order. The next authentication method is tried only if the previous method does not respond, not if it fails.

The preset methods include radius, tacacs, local and none. radius means the RADIUS server group radius; tacacs means the RACACS+ server group tacacs; local means local username database are used; none means no authentication is used for privilege elevation.

Users can aslo define new method with the aaa group command.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines By default the enable authentication method is default with none as method1.

Example

Configure a privilege authentication method list list2 with the priority1 method as radius and priority2 method as local:

Switch(config)# aaa authenticaiton enable list2 radius local

374

43.10 aaa authentication dot1x default Description

This aaa authentication dot1x default command is used to configure an 802.1x authentication method list. A method list describes the authentication methods for users login in 802.1x. To delete the default authentication method list, please use the no aaa authentication dot1x default command.

Syntax

aaa authentication dot1x default { method }

no aaa authentication dot1x default

Parameter

method Specify the method name. Only RADIUS server group is supported, and the default method is server group radius.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the default 802.1x authentication method as radius1:

Switch(config)# aaa authentication dot1x default radius1

43.11 aaa accounting dot1x default Description

This aaa accounting dot1x default command is used to configure an 802.1x accounting method list. To delete the default accounting method list, please use the no aaa accounting dot1x default command.

Syntax

aaa accounting dot1x default { method }

no aaa accounting dot1x default

375

Parameter

method Sp+ecify the method name. Only RADIUS server group is supported, and the default method is server group radius.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the default 802.1x accounting method as radius1:

Switch(config)# aaa accounting dot1x default radius1

43.12 show aaa authentication Description

This show aaa authentication command is used to display the summary information of the authentication login, enable and dot1x metheod list.

Syntax

show aaa authentication [ login | enable | dot1x ]

Parameter

login | enable | dot1x Specify the method list type.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display the information of all the authentication method lists:

Switch(config)# show aaa authentication

376

43.13 show aaa accounting Description

This show aaa accounting command is used to display the summary information of the accounting metheod list.

Syntax

show aaa accounting [ dot1x ]

Parameter

dot1x Specify the method list type.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display the information of the default 802.1x accounting method list:

Switch(config)# show aaa accounting

43.14 line telnet Description

The line telnet command is used to enter the Line Configuration Mode to configure the telnet terminal line to which you want to apply the authentication list.

Syntax

line telnet

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

377

Example

Enter the telnet terminal line configuration mode:

Switch(config)#line telnet

43.15 login authentication (telnet) Description

The login authentication command is used to apply the login authentication method list to the telnet terminal line. To restore to the default authentication method list, please use the no login authentication command.

Syntax

login authentication { method-list }

no login authentication

Parameter

method-list Specify the login method list on the telnet terminal line. It is default by default, which contains the method local.

Command Mode

Line Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the login authentication method list on the telnet terminal line as list1:

Switch(config)#line telnet

Switch(config-line)# login authentication list1

43.16 line ssh Description

The line ssh command is used to enter the Line Configuration Mode to configure the ssh terminal line to which you want to apply the authentication list.

378

Syntax

line ssh

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enter the ssh terminal line configuration mode:

Switch(config)#line ssh

43.17 login authentication (ssh) Description

The login authentication command is used to apply the login authentication method list to the ssh terminal line. To restore to the default authentication method list, please use the no login authentication command.

Syntax

login authentication { method-list }

no login authentication

Parameter

method-list Specify the login method list on the ssh terminal line. It is default by default, which contains the method local.

Command Mode

Line Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the login authentication method list on the ssh terminal line as list1:

Switch(config)# line ssh

379

Switch(config-line)# login authentication list1

43.18 line console

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description

The line console command is used to enter the Line Configuration Mode to configure the console terminal line to which you want to apply the authentication list.

Syntax

line console line-number

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enter the console 0 terminal line configuration mode:

T2600G-28TS(config)#line console 0

43.19 login authentication (console)

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description

The login authentication command is used to apply the login authentication method list to the console terminal line. To restore to the default authentication method list, please use the no login authentication command.

Syntax

login authentication { method-list }

no login authentication

380

Parameter

method-list Specify the login method list on the console terminal line. It is default by default, which contains the method local.

Command Mode

Line Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the login authentication method list on the console 0 terminal line as list1:

T2600G-28TS(config)# line console 0

T2600G-28TS(config-line)# login authentication list1

43.20 enable authentication (telnet) Description

The enable authentication command is used to apply the privilege authentication method list to the telnet terminal line. To restore to the default authentication method list, please use the no enable authentication command.

Syntax

enable authentication { method-list }

no enable authentication

Parameter

method-list Specify the enable method list on the telnet terminal line. It is default by default, which contains the method none.

Command Mode

Line Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

381

Example

Configure the enable authentication method list on the telnet terminal line as list2:

Switch(config)#line telnet

Switch(config-line)# enable authentication list2

43.21 enable authentication (ssh) Description

The enable authentication command is used to apply the privilege authentication method list to the ssh terminal line. To restore to the default authentication method list, please use the no enable authentication command.

Syntax

enable authentication { method-list }

no enable authentication

Parameter

method-list Specify the enable method list on the ssh terminal line. It is default by default, which contains the method none.

Command Mode

Line Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the enable authentication method list on the ssh terminal line as list2:

Switch(config)# line ssh

Switch(config-line)# enable authentication list2

43.22 enable authentication (console)

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

382

Description

The enable authentication command is used to apply the privilege authentication method list to the console terminal line. To restore to the default authentication method list, please use the no enable authentication command.

Syntax

enable authentication { method-list }

no enable authentication

Parameter

method-list Specify the enable method list on the console terminal line. It is default by default, which contains the method none.

Command Mode

Line Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the enable authentication method list on the console 0 terminal line as list2:

T2600G-28TS(config)# line console 0

T2600G-28TS(config-line)# enable authentication list2

43.23 ip http login authentication Description

The ip http login authentication command is used to apply the login authentication method list to users accessing through HTTP. To restore to the default authentication method list, please use the no ip http login authentication command.

Syntax

ip http login authentication { method-list }

no ip http login authentication

383

Parameter

method-list Specify the login method list on the HTTP access. It is default by default, which contains the method local.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the login authentication method list on the HTTP access as list1:

Switch(config)# ip http login authentication list1

43.24 ip http enable authentication Description

The ip http enable authentication command is used to apply the privilege authentication method list to users accessing through HTTP. To restore to the default authentication method list, please use the no ip http enable authentication command.

Syntax

ip http enable authentication { method-list }

no ip http enable authentication

Parameter

method-list Specify the enable method list on the HTTP access. It is default by default, which contains the method none.

Command Mode

Line Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the enable authentication method list on the HTTP access as list2:

384

Switch(config)# ip http enable authentication list2

43.25 show aaa global Description

This show aaa global command is used to display global status of AAA function and the login/enable method lists of different application modules: telnet, ssh and HTTP.

Syntax

show aaa global

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display the AAA functions global status and each applications method list:

Switch(config)# show aaa global

43.26 enable admin password Description

The enable admin password command is used to set or change the Enable password for users to change the access level to admin. To remove the Enable password, please use no enable admin command. This command uses the symmetric encryption.

Syntax

enable admin password { [ 0 ] password | 7 encrypted-password }

no enable admin

Parameter

0 Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0.

385

password Enable password, a string with 31 characters at most, which can contain only English letters (case-sensitive), digits and 17 kinds of special characters. The special characters are !$%()*,-./[]_{|}. By default, it is empty. By default, it is empty.

7 Indicates a symmetric encrypted password with fixed length will follow.

encrypted-password A symmetric encrypted password with fixed length, which you can copy from another switchs configuration file. After the encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines

If the password you configured here is unencrypted and the global encryption function is enabled in service password-encryption, the password in the configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric encrypted form.

If both the enable admin password and enable admin secret are defined, only the latest configured password will take effect.

Example

Set the Enable password as abc123 and unencrypted for users to change the access level to admin:

Switch(config)#enable admin password 0 abc123

43.27 enable admin secret Description

The enable admin secret command is used to set or change the Enable password for users to change the access level to admin. To remove the Enable password, please use no enable admin command. This command uses the MD5 encryption.

Syntax

enable admin secret { [ 0 ] password | 5 encrypted-password }

386

no enable admin

Parameter

0 Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0.

password Enable password, a string with 31 characters at most, which can contain only English letters (case-sensitive), digits and 17 kinds of special characters. The special characters are !$%()*,-./[]_{|}. By default, it is empty. By default, it is empty. The password in the configuration file will be displayed in the MD5 encrypted form.

5 Indicates an MD5 encrypted password with fixed length will follow.

encrypted-password An MD5 encrypted password with fixed length, which you can copy from another switchs configuration file. After the encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines

If both the enable admin password and enable admin secret are defined, only the latest configured password will take effect.

Example

Set the Enable password as abc123 and unencrypted for users to change the access level to admin. The password will be displayed in the encrypted form.

Switch(config)#enable admin secret 0 abc123

43.28 enable-admin Description

The enable-admin command is used to get the administrative privelges by a non-admin user.

387

Syntax

enable-admin

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only User, Power User and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Get the administrative privelges (the Enable password is 123456):

Switch# enable-admin

Password: 123456

388

Chapter 44 IEEE 802.1x Commands

IEEE 802.1x function is to provide an access control for LAN ports via the authentication. An 802.1x system include three entities: supplicant, authenticator and authentication server. Supplicant: the device that requests access to the LAN. Authentication server: performs the actual authentication of the supplicant. It validates the

identity of the supplicant and notifies the authenticator whether or not the supplicant is authorized to access the LAN.

Authenticator: controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the supplicant. It is usually an 802.1x-supported network device, such as this TP-Link switch. It acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the supplicant and the authentication server, requesting identity information from the supplicant, verifying that information with the authentication server, and relaying a response to the supplicant.

This chapter handles with the authentication process between the supplicant and the switch. To realize the authentication and accounting function, you should also enbable the AAA function and configure the RADIUS server. Go to Chapter 42 AAA Commands for more details.

44.1 dot1x system-auth-control Description

The dot1x system-auth-control command is used to enable the IEEE 802.1x function globally. To disable the IEEE 802.1x function, please use no dot1x system-auth-control command.

Syntax

dot1x system-auth-control

no dot1x system-auth-control

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the IEEE 802.1x function:

Switch(config)#dot1x system-auth-control

389

44.2 dot1x handshake Description

The dot1x handshake command is used enable the handshake feature. The handshake feature is used to detect the connection status between the TP-Link 802.1x supplicant and the switch. Please disable the handshake feature if you are using a non-TP-Link 802.1x-compliant client software. This feature is enabled by default.

Syntax

dot1x handshake

no dot1x handshake

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Disable the 802.1x handshake function:

Switch(config)# no dot1x handshake

44.3 dot1x auth-protocol Description

The dot1x auth-protocol command is used to configure the authentication protocol of IEEE 802.1x and the default 802.1x authentication method is eap. To restore to the default 802.1x authentication protocol, please use no dot1x auth-protocol command.

Syntax

dot1x auth-protocol { pap | eap }

no dot1x auth-protocol

Parameter

pap | eap Authentication protocols.

390

pap: EAP termination mode. IEEE 802.1x authentication system uses extensible authentication protocol (EAP) to exchange information between the switch and the client. The EAP packets are terminated at the switch and repackaged in the Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) packets, and then transferred to the RADIUS server.

eap: EAP relay mode. IEEE 802.1x authentication system uses extensible authentication protocol (EAP) to exchange information between the switch and the client. The EAP protocol packets with authentication data are encapsulated in the advanced protocol (such as RADIUS) packets and transmitted to the authentication server.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the Authentication protocol of IEEE 802.1x as pap:

Switch(config)#dot1x auth-protocol pap

44.4 dot1x vlan-assignment Description

The dot1x vlan-assignment command is used to enable the VLAN assignment feature.To disable this feature, please use no dot1x vlan-assignment command.

802.1x VLAN assignment is a technology allowing the RADIUS server to send the VLAN assignment to the port when the port is authenticated.

If the assigned VLAN does not exist on the switch, the switch will create the related VLAN automatically, add the authenticated port to the VLAN and change the PVID based on the assigned VLAN.

If the assigned VLAN exists on the switch, the switch will directly add the authenticated port to the related VLAN and change the PVID instead of creating a new VLAN.

If no VLAN is supplied by the RADIUS server or if 802.1x authentication is disabled, the port will be in its original VLAN after successful authentication.

391

Syntax

dot1x vlan-assignment

no dot1x vlan-assignment

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the VLAN assignment feature:

Switch(config)#dot1x vlan-assignment

44.5 dot1x accounting Description

The dot1x accounting command is used to enable the IEEE 802.1x accounting function globally. To disable the IEEE 802.1x accounting function, please use no dot1x accounting command.

Syntax

dot1x accounting

no dot1x accounting

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the enable the IEEE 802.1x accounting function globally:

Switch(config)#dot1x accounting

392

44.6 dot1x mab Description

The dot1x mab command is used to enable the MAB feature on the port.To disable this feature, please use no dot1x mab command.

With MAB (MAC-Based Authentication Bypass) feature enabled, the switch automatically sends the authentication server a RADIUS access request frame with the clients MAC address as the username and password. It is also necessary to configure the RADIUS server with the clients information for authentication. You can enable this feature on IEEE 802.1x ports connected to devices without 802.1x capability. For example, most printers, IP phones and fax machines do not have 802.1x capability.

Syntax

dot1x mab

no dot1x mab

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the MAB feature on the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)#dot1x mab

44.7 dot1x guest-vlan Description

The dot1x guest-vlan command is used to configure the Guest VLAN function on the port. To disable the Guest VLAN function, please use no dot1x guest-vlan command.

393

Syntax

dot1x guest-vlan vid

no dot1x guest-vlan

Parameter

vid The VLAN ID needed to enable the Guest VLAN function, ranging from 0 to 4094. 0 means that Guest VLAN is disabled. The supplicants in the Guest VLAN can access the specified network source.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the Guest VLAN function for VLAN 5 and set the VLAN ID as 20 on the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1::

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)#dot1x guest-vlan 5

44.8 dot1x timeout quiet-period Description

The dot1x timeout quiet-period command is used to enable the quiet-period function on the port. To disable the function, please use no dot1x timeout quiet-period command.

Syntax

dot1x timeout quiet-period [ time ]

no dot1x timeout quiet-period

Parameter

time The length of the quiet-period time. If one users authentication fails, its subsequent IEEE 802.1x authentication requests will not be processed during the quiet-period time. It ranges from 1 to 999 seconds and the default value is 10 seconds.

394

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the quiet-period function and set the quiet-period as 5 seconds on the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)#dot1x quiet-period 5

44.9 dot1x timeout supp-timeout Description

The dot1x timeout supp-timeout command is used to configure the supplicant timeout on the port. To restore to the default, please use no dot1x timeout supp-timeout command.

Syntax

dot1x timeout supp-timeout time

no dot1x timeout supp-timeout

Parameter

time The maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from supplicant before resending a request to the supplicant, ranging from 1 to 60 in second. By default, it is 30 seconds.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the supplicant timeout value as 5 seconds on the Gigabit Ethernet pot 1/0/1:

395

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)#dot1x timeout supp-timeout 5

44.10 dot1x max- req Description

The dot1x max-req command is used to configure the maximum transfer times of the repeated authentication request when the server cannot be connected. To restore to the default value, please use no dot1x max-req command.

Syntax

dot1x max-req times

no dot1x max-req

Parameter

times The maximum transfer times of the repeated authentication request, ranging from 1 to 9 in times. By default, the value is 3.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the maximum transfer times of the repeated authentication request as 5 on the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)#dot1x max-req 5

44.11 dot1x Description

The dot1x command is used to enable the IEEE 802.1x function for a specified port. To disable the IEEE 802.1x function for a specified port, please use no dot1x command.

396

Syntax

dot1x

no dot1x

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet )

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the IEEE 802.1x function for the Gigabit Ethernet port 1:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)#dot1x

44.12 dot1x port-control Description

The dot1x port-control command is used to configure the Control Mode of IEEE 802.1x for the specified port. By default, the control mode is auto. To restore to the default configuration, please use no dot1x port-control command.

Syntax

dot1x port-control {auto | authorized-force | unauthorized-force}

no dot1x port-control

Parameter

auto | authorized-force | unauthorized-force The Control Mode for the port.

auto:In this mode, the port will normally work only after passing the 802.1x Authentication.

authorized-force: In this mode, the port can work normally without passing the 802.1x Authentication.

unauthorized-force: In this mode, the port is forbidden working for its fixed unauthorized status.

397

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the Control Mode for Gigabit Ethernetport 20 as authorized-force:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20

Switch(config-if)#dot1x port-control authorized-force

44.13 dot1x port-method Description

The dot1x port-method command is used to configure the control type of IEEE 802.1x for the specified port. By default, the control type is mac-based. To restore to the default configuration, please use no dot1x port-method command.

Syntax

dot1x port-method { mac-based | port-based }

no dot1x port-method

Parameter

mac-based | port-based The control type for the port.

mac-based: Any client connected to the port should pass the 802.1x authentication for access.

port-based: All the clients connected to the port can access the network on the condition that any one of the clients has passed the 802.1x Authentication.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

398

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the Control Type for Gigabit Ethernet port 20 as port-based:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20

Switch(config-if)#dot1x port-method port-based

44.14 dot1x auth-init Description

The dot1x auth-init command is used to initialize the specific client.

Syntax

dot1x auth-init [ mac mac-address ]

Parameter

mac-address: Enter the MAC address of the client that will be unauthorized.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Initialize the client whose MAC address is a 00:02:58:4f:6c:23 on port 1:

Switch(Config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(Config-if)#dot1x auth-init mac 00:02:58:4f:6c:23

44.15 dot1x auth-reauth Description

The dot1x auth-reauth command is used to reauthenticate the specific client.

399

Syntax

dot1x auth-reauth [ mac mac-address]

Parameter

mac-address: Enter the MAC address of the client that will be reauthenticated.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Reauthenticate the client whose MAC address is a 00:02:58:4f:6c:23 on port 1:

Switch(Config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(Config-if)#dot1x auth-reauth mac 00:02:58:4f:6c:23

44.16 show dot1x global Description

The show dot1x global command is used to display the global configuration of 801.X.

Syntax

show dot1x global

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the configuration of 801.X globally:

Switch(config)#show dot1x global

400

44.17 show dot1x interface Description

The show dot1x interface command is used to display all ports or the specified ports configuration information of 801.X.

Syntax

show dot1x interface [ gigabitEthernet port ]

Parameter port The Ethernet port number. If not specified, the information of all the ports will be displayed.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the configuration information of 801.X for Gigabit Ethernet port 20:

Switch(config)#show dot1x interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20

Display the configuration information of 801.X for all Ethernet ports:

Switch(config)#show dot1x interface

44.18 show dot1x auth-state interface Description

The show dot1x auth-state interface command is used to display the authentication status of each port.

Syntax

show dot1x auth-state interface [ fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port ]

Parameter port The Ethernet port number. If not specified, the information of all the ports will be displayed.

401

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the authentication status of each port:

Switch(config)#show dot1x auth-state interface

402

Chapter 45 Port Security Commands

You can limit the number of MAC addresses that can be learned on each port on this page, thus preventing the MAC address table from being exhausted by the attack packets.

45.1 mac address-table max-mac count Description

The mac address-table max-mac-count command is used to enable the port security feature of the port and configure the related parameters. To disable the feature and restore the parameters to defaults on the port, please use no mac address-table max-mac-count command.

Syntax mac address-table max-mac-count { [ max-number num ] [ exceed-max-learned enable | disable ] [ mode { dynamic | static | permanent } ] [ status { forward | drop | disable } ] }

no mac address-table max-mac-count [ max-number | mode | status ]

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Set the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on port 1/0/1 as 30, enable exceed-max-leaned feature and configure the mode as permanent and the status as drop:

Switch (config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)#mac address-table max-mac-count max-number 30

exceed-maxlearned enable mode permanent status drop

45.2 show mac address-table max-mac-count Description

The show mac address-table max-mac-count command is used to display the port security configuration on each port.

403

Syntax show mac address-table max-mac-count interface { fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port }

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the port security configuration on port 1/0/1

Switch# show mac address-table max-mac-count interface

gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

404

Chapter 46 Port Mirroring Commands

Port Mirroring allows the switch to send a copy of the traffic that passes through specified sources (ports, LAGs or the CPU) to a destination port. It does not affect the switching of network traffic on source ports, LAGs or the CPU. Usually, the monitoring port is connected to data diagnose device, which is used to analyze the monitored packets for monitoring and troubleshooting the network.

46.1 monitor session destination interface Description

The monitor session destination interface command is used to configure the monitoring port. Each monitor session has only one monitoring port. To change the monitoring port, please use the monitor session destination interface command by changing the port value. The no monitor session command is used to delete the corresponding monitoring port or monitor session.

Syntax monitor session session_num destination interface gigabitEthernet port

no monitor session session_num destination interface gigabitEthernet port

no monitor session session_num

Parameter session_num The monitor session number, can only be specified as 1.

port The monitoring port number.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Create monitor session 1 and configure port 1/0/1 as the monitoring port:

Switch(config)# monitor session 1 destination interface gigabitEthernet

1/0/1

Delete the monitoring port 1/0/2 from monitor session 1:

405

Switch(config)# no monitor session 1 destination interface

gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Delete the monitor session 1:

Switch(config)# no monitor session 1

46.2 monitor session source Description

The monitor session source command is used to configure the monitored interface. To delete the corresponding monitored interface, please use no monitor session source command.

Syntax monitor session session_num source { cpu cpu_number | interface gigabitEthernet port-list | interface port-channel port-channel-id } mode

no monitor session session_num source { cpu cpu_number | interface gigabitEthernet port-list | interface port-channel port-channel-id } mode

Parameter session_num The monitor session number. It can only be specified as 1.

cpu_number The CPU number. It can only be specified as 1.

port-list List of the Ethernet port number. It is multi-optional.

lag-list List of LAG interfaces. It is multi-optional.

mode The monitor mode. There are three options: rx, tx and both. Rx (ingress monitoring mode), means the incoming packets received by the monitored interface will be copied to the monitoring port. Tx (egress monitoring mode), indicates the outgoing packets sent by the monitored interface will be copied to the monitoring port. Both (ingress and egress monitoring), presents the incoming packets received and the outgoing packets sent by the monitored interface will both be copied to the monitoring port.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

406

User Guidelines 1. The monitoring port is corresponding to current interface configuration

mode.

2. Monitored ports number is not limited, but it cant be the monitoring port at the same time.

3. Whether the monitoring port and monitored ports are in the same VLAN or not is not demanded strictly.

4. The monitoring port and monitored ports cannot be link-aggregation member.

Example Create monitor session 1, then configure port 4, 5, 7 as monitored port and enable ingress monitoring:

Switch(config)# monitor session 1 source interface gigabitEthernet

1/0/4-5,1/0/7 rx

Delete port 4 in monitor session 1 and its configuration:

Switch(config)# no monitor session 1 source interface gigabitEthernet

1/0/4 rx

46.3 show monitor session Description

The show monitor session command is used to display the configuration of port monitoring.

Syntax show monitor session [session_num]

Parameter session_num The monitor session number, can only be specified as 1. It is optional.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the monitoring configuration of monitor session 1:

407

Switch(config)# show monitor session 1

408

Chapter 47 ACL Commands

ACL (Access Control List) is used to filter data packets by configuring a series of match conditions, operations and time ranges. It provides a flexible and secured access control policy and facilitates you to control the network security.

47.1 access-list create Description

The access-list create command is used to create an ACL.

Syntax access-list create acl-id[ name acl-name ]

no access-list create { acl-id }

Parameter acl-id Enter an ACL ID. The IDs for MAC ACL are from 0 to 499. The IDs for IP ACL are from 500 to 999. The IDs for Combined ACL are from 1000 to 1499. The IDs for IPv6 ACL are from 1500 to 1999. The IDs for Packet Content ACL are from 2000 to 2499.

Note: Packet Content ACL is only available on certain devices.

acl-name Enter a name to identify the ACL.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Create an IP ACL whose ID is 523:

Switch(config)# access-list create 523

47.2 access-list packet-content profile

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

409

Description The access-list packet-content profile command is used to specify the offset of each chunk. There are four chunks to be configured. They must be configured before you configure the chunk value&mask.

Syntax access-list packet-content profile chunk-offset0 offset0 chunk-offset1 offset1 chunk-offset2 offset2 chunk-offset3 offset3

Parameter offset0 -offset3: Specify the offset of each chunk. The value ranges from 0 to 31. When the offset is set as 31, it matches the first 127,128, 1, 2 bytes of the packet; when the offset is set as 0, it matches the 3, 4, 5, 6 bytes, and so on, for the rest of the offset value.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure a packet content profile with offset 0,1,2,3:

T2600-28TS(config)# access-list packet-content profile chunk-offset0 0

chunk-offset1 1 chunk-offset2 2 chunk-offset3 3

47.3 access-list resequence Description

The access-list resequence command is used to resequence the rules by providing a Start Rule ID and Step value.

Syntax access-list resequence acl-id-or-name start start-rule-id step rule-id-step-value

Parameter acl-id-or-name The ACL ID or name.

start-rule-id The start rule ID.

rule-id-step-value The step value.

410

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Resequence the rules of ACL 12 with the start ID as 1 and step value as 5:

Switch(config)# access-list resequence 12 start 1 step 5

47.4 access-list mac Description

The access-list mac command is used to create MAC ACL. To delete the MAC ACL, please use no access-list mac.

Syntax access-list mac acl-id-or-name rule { auto | rule-id } { deny | permit } logging {enable | disable} [smac source-mac smask source-mac-mask ] [dmac destination-mac dmask destination-mac-mask ] [type ether-type] [pri dot1p-priority] [vid vlan-id] [tseg time-range-name]

no access-list mac acl-id-or-name rule rule-id

Parameter acl-id-or-name Enter the ID or name of the ACL that you want to add a rule for.

auto The rule ID will be assigned automatically and the interval between rule IDs is 5.

rule-id Assign an ID to the rule.

deny | permit Specify the action to be taken with the packets that match the rule. By default, it is set to permit. The packets will be discarded if deny is selected and forwarded if permit is selected.

enable | disable Enable or disable Logging function for the ACL rule. If "enable " is selected, the times that the rule is matched will be logged every 5 minutes. With ACL Counter trap enabled, a related trap will be generated if the matching times changes.

source-mac Enter the source MAC address. The format is FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF.

411

source-mac-mask Enter the mask of the source MAC address. This is required if a source MAC address is entered. The format is FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF.

destination-mac Enter the destination MAC address. The format is FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF.

destination-mac-mask Enter the mask of the destination MAC address. This is required if a destination MAC address is entered. The format is FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF.

ether-type Specify an Ethernet-type with 4 hexadecimal numbers.

dot1p-priority: The user priority ranges from 0 to 7. The default is No Limit.

vlan-id The VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4094.

time-range-name The name of the time-range. The default is No Limit.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Create MAC ACL 50 and configure Rule 5 to permit packets with source MAC address 00:34:a2:d4:34:b5:

Switch (config)#access-list create 50

Switch (config-mac-acl)#access-list mac 50 rule 5 permit logging disable

smac 00:34:a2:d4:34:b5 smask ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff

47.5 access-list ip Description

The access-list ip command is used to add IP ACL rule. To delete the corresponding rule, please use no access-list ip command. IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions, which can be the source IP addresses and destination IP addresses carried in the packets.

Syntax access-list ip acl-id-or-name rule {auto | rule-id } {deny | permit} logging {enable | disable} [ sip sip-address sip-mask sip-address-mask ] [ dip dip-address dip-mask dip-address-mask ] [dscp dscp-value] [tos tos-value]

412

[pre pre-value] [frag enable | disable] [protocol protocol [s-port s-port-number] [s-port-mask s-port-mask] [d-port d-port-number] [d-port-mask d-port-mask] [tcpflag tcpflag]] [tseg time-range-name]

no access-list ip acl-id-or-name rule rule-id

Parameter acl-id-or-name Enter the ID or name of the ACL that you want to add a rule for.

auto The rule ID will be assigned automatically and the interval between rule IDs is 5.

rule-id Assign an ID to the rule.

deny | permit Specify the action to be taken with the packets that match the rule. By default, it is set to permit. The packets will be discarded if deny is selected and forwarded if permit is selected.

logging {enable | disable} Enable or disable Logging function for the ACL rule. If "enable " is selected, the times that the rule is matched will be logged every 5 minutes. With ACL Counter trap enabled, a related trap will be generated if the matching times changes.

sip-address Enter the source IP address.

sip-address-mask Enter the mask of the source IP address. This is required if a source IP address is entered.

dip-address Enter the destination IP address.

dip-address-mask Enter the mask of the destination IP address. This is required if a destination IP address is entered.

dscp-value Specify the DSCP value between 0 and 63.

tos-value Specify an IP ToS value to be matched between 0 and 15.

pre-value Specify an IP Precedence value to be matched between 0 and 7.

frag {enable | disable} Enable or disable matching of fragmented packets. The default is disable. When enabled, the rule will apply to all fragmented packets and always permit to forward the last fragment of a packet.

Note: frag {enable | disable} is only available on certain devices.

protocol Specify a protocol type.

s-port-number Specify the source port number.

s-port-mask Specify the source port mask with 4 hexadecimal numbers.

d-port-number Specify the destination port number.

413

d-port-mask Specify the destination port mask with 4 hexadacimal numbers.

tcpflag For TCP protocol, specify the flag value using either binary numbers or * (for example, 01*010*). The default is *, which indicates that the flag will not be matched. The flags are URG (Urgent flag), ACK (acknowledge flag), PSH(push flag), RST(reset flag),SYN(synchronize flag), and FIN(finish flag).

time-range-name The name of the time-range. The default is No Limit.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Create IP ACL 600, and configure Rule 1 to permit packets with source IP address 192.168.1.100:

Switch (config)#access-list create 600

Switch (config)#access-list ip 600 rule 1permit logging disable sip

192.168.1.100 sip-mask 255.255.255.255

47.6 access-list combined Description

The access-list combined command is used to add Combined ACL rule. To delete the corresponding rule, please use no access-list extended command.

Syntax access-list combined acl-id-or-name rule {auto | rule-id } {deny | permit} logging {enable | disable} [smac source-mac-address smask source-mac-mask] [dmac dest-mac-address dmask dest-mac-mask] [vid vlan-id] [type ether-type] [pri priority] [sip source-ip-address sip-mask source-ip-mask]] [dip destination-ip-address dip-mask destination-ip-mask] [dscp dscp-value] [tos tos-value] [pre pre-value] [protocol protocol [s-port s-port-number s-port-mask s-port-mask] [d-port d-port-number d-port-mask d-port-mask] [tcpflag tcpflag]] [tseg time-range-name]

no access-list combined acl-id-or-name rule rule-id

414

Parameter acl-id-or-name Enter the ID or name of the ACL that you want to add a rule for.

auto The rule ID will be assigned automatically and the interval between rule IDs is 5.

rule-id Assign an ID to the rule.

deny | permit Specify the action to be taken with the packets that match the rule. By default, it is set to permit. The packets will be discarded if deny is selected and forwarded if permit is selected.

logging {enable | disable} Enable or disable Logging function for the ACL rule. If "enable " is selected, the times that the rule is matched will be logged every 5 minutes. With ACL Counter trap enabled, a related trap will be generated if the matching times changes.

source-mac-address Enter the source MAC address.

source-mac-mask Enter the source MAC address mask.

dest-mac-address Enter the destination MAC address.

dest-mac-mask Enter the destination MAC address mask. This is required if a destination MAC address is entered.

vlan-id: The VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4094.

ether-type Specify the Ethernet-type with 4 hexadecimal numbers.

priority The user priority ranges from 0 to 7. The default is No Limit.

source-ip: Enter the source IP address.

source-ip-mask Enter the mask of the source IP address. It is required if source IP address is entered.

destination-ip This is required if a source IP address is entered.

destination-ip-mask Enter the destination IP address mask. This is required if a destination IP address is entered.

dscp-value Specify the DSCP value between 0 and 63.

tos-value Specify an IP ToS value to be matched between 0 and 15.

pre-value Specify an IP Precedence value to be matched between 0 and 7.

protocol Specify a protocol type.

s-port-number Specify the source port number.

s-port-mask Specify the source port mask with 4 hexadecimal numbers.

d-port-number Specify the destination port number.

415

d-port-mask Specify the destination port mask with 4 hexadecimal numbers.

tcpflag For TCP protocol, specify the flag value using either binary numbers or * (for example, 01*010*). The default is *, which indicates that the flag will not be matched. The flags are URG (Urgent flag), ACK (acknowledge flag), PSH(push flag), RST(reset flag),SYN(synchronize flag), and FIN(finish flag).

time-range-name The name of the time-range. The default is No Limit.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Create Combined ACL 1100 and configure Rule 1 to deny packets with source IP address 192.168.3.100 in VLAN 2:

Switch(config)# access-list create 1100

Switch(config)# access-list combined 1100 logging disable rule 1permit

vid 2 sip 192.168.3.100 sip-mask 255.255.255.255

47.7 access-list ipv6 Description

The access-list ipv6 command is used to add IPv6 ACL rule. To delete the corresponding rule, please use no access-list ipv6 command. IPv6 ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions, which can be the source IP addresses and destination IP addresses carried in the packets, the DSCP and flow-label value, etc.

Syntax access-list ipv6 acl-id-or-name rule {auto | rule-id } {deny | permit} logging {enable | disable} [class class-value] [flow-label flow-label-value] [sip source-ip-address sip-mask source-ip-mask] [dip destination-ip-address dip-mask destination-ip-mask] [s-port source-port-number] [d-port destination-port-number] [tseg time-range-name]

no access-list ipv6 acl-id-or-name rule rule-id

416

Parameter acl-id-or-name Enter the ID or name of the ACL that you want to add a rule for.

auto The rule ID will be assigned automatically and the interval between rule IDs is 5.

rule-id Assign an ID to the rule.

deny | permit Specify the action to be taken with the packets that match the rule. By default, it is set to permit. The packets will be discarded if deny is selected and forwarded if permit is selected.

logging {enable | disable} Enable or disable Logging function for the ACL rule. If "enable " is selected, the times that the rule is matched will be logged every 5 minutes. With ACL Counter trap enabled, a related trap will be generated if the matching times changes.

class-value Specify a class value to be matched. It ranges from 0 to 63.

flow-label-value Specify a Flow Label value to be matched.

source-ip-address Enter the source IP address. Enter the destination IPv6 address to be matched. All types of IPv6 address will be checked. You may enter a complete 128-bit IPv6 address but only the first 64 bits will be valid.

source-ip-mask Enter the source IP address mask. The mask is required if the source IPv6 address is entered. Enter the mask in complete format (for example, ffff:ffff:0000:ffff). The mask specifies which bits in the source IPv6 address to match the rule.

destination-ip-address Enter the destination IPv6 address to be matched. All types of IPv6 address will be checked. You may enter a complete 128-bit IPv6 addresses but only the first 64 bits will be valid.

destination-ip-mask: Enter the source IP address mask. The mask is required if the source IPv6 address is entered. Enter the mask in complete format (for example, ffff:ffff:0000:ffff). The mask specifies which bits in the source IPv6 address to match the rule.

source-port-number Enter the TCP/UDP source port if TCP/UDP protocol is selected.

destination-port-number Enter the TCP/UDP destination port if TCP/UDP protocol is selected.

time-range-name The name of the time-range. The default is No Limit.

417

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines Before binding an IPv6 ACL to a VLAN or interface, you should configure the SDM template as enterpriseV6 and save your configurations.

Example Create IPv6 ACL 1600 and configure Rule 1 to deny packets with source IPv6 address CDCD:910A:2222:5498:8475:1111:3900:2020:

Switch(config)# access-list create 1600

Switch(config)# access-list ipv6 1600 rule 1 deny logging disable sip

CDCD:910A:2222:5498:8475:1111:3900:2020 sip-mask ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff

47.8 access-list packet-content config

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The access-list packet-content config command is used to add Packet Content ACL rule. To delete the corresponding rule, please use no access-list packet-content config command. Packet content ACLs analyze and process data packets based on 4 chunk match conditions, each chunk can specify a user-defined 4-byte segment carried in the packet's first 128 bytes.

Syntax access-list packet-content config acl-id-or-name rule {auto | rule-id } {deny | permit} logging {enable | disable} [chunk0 value mask0 mask] [chunk1 value mask1 mask] [chunk2 value mask2 mask] [chunk3 value mask3 mask] [tseg time-segment]

no access-list packet-content config acl-id-or-name rule rule-id

Parameter acl-id-or-name Enter the ID or name of the ACL that you want to add a rule for.

418

auto The rule ID will be assigned automatically and the interval between rule IDs is 5.

rule-id Assign an ID to the rule.

deny | permit Specify the action to be taken with the packets that match the rule. Deny means to discard; permit means to forward. By default, it is set to permit.

logging {enable | disable} Enable or disable Logging function for the ACL rule. If "enable" is selected, the times that the rule is matched will be logged every 5 minutes. With ACL Counter trap enabled, a related trap will be generated if the matching times changes.

value Specify the chunk value, ranging from 0-ffffffff.

mask Specify the chunk mask, ranging from 0-ffffffff. Chunk mask here must be written completely in 4-byte hex mode, like '0000ffff'.

time-segment The name of the time-range. The default is No Limit.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Create a packet-content ACL rule with all 4 chunks configured, the rule id is 1 and the default action is permit:

T2600-28TS(config)# access-list packet-content config rule 1permit

logging disable chunk0 45ea mask0 0000ffff chunk1 1111ffff mask1 ffffffff

chunk2 ee34 mask2 ffff0000 chunk3 7878 mask3 000ffae3

47.9 access-list action Description

The access-list action command is used to specify a rule to be configured with policies and enter Action Configuration mode. To delete the corresponding policies, please use no access-list action command.

Syntax access-list action acl-id-or-name rule rule-id

no access-list action acl-id-or-name rule rule-id

419

Parameter acl-id-or-name Enter the ID or name of the ACL.

rule-id Enter the ID of the ACL rule.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Specify the rule 1 of ACL 200 to be configured with policies:

Switch(config)# access-list action 200 rule 1

47.10 redirect Description

The redirect interface command is used to define the policy to redirect the matched packets to the desired port. To disable this policy, please use no redirect interface command.

Syntax redirect interface { fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port }

no redirect interface { fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port }

Parameter port The destination port to which the packets will be redirected. The default is All.

Command Mode Action Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Define the policy to redirect the matched packets to port 1/0/1 for rule 1 of ACL 6:

420

Switch(config)# access-list action 6 rule 1

Switch(config-action)# redirect interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

47.11 s-condition Description

The s-condition command is used to limit the rate of the matched packets. To restore the settings to the defaults, please use no s-condition.

Syntax s-condition rate rate burst burst-size osd { none | discard | remark dscp dscp }

no s-condition

Parameter rate Specify a rate, ranging from 0 to 1000000kbps.

burst-size Specify the number of bytes allowed in one second ranging from 1 to 128.

osd Select either none or discard as the action to be taken for the packets whose rate is beyond the specified rate. The default is None. When remark dscp is selected, you also need to specify the DSCP value for the matched packets. The DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63.

Note: Remark DSCP is only available on certain devices.

Command Mode Action Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure a policy for rule 1 of ACL 6: limit the transmission rate of the matched packets as 1000 Kbps and if the number of bytes per second is beyond 100, the packets will be discarded by the switch:

Switch(config)#access-list action 6 rule 1

Switch(config-action)# s-condition rate 1000 burst 100 osd discard

421

47.12 s-mirror Description

The s-mirror command is used to define the policy to mirror the matched packets to the desired port. To disable this policy, please use no s-mirror command.

Syntax s-mirror interface { fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port }

Parameter port The destination port to which the packets will be mirrored.

Command Mode Action Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure a policy for rule 1 of ACL 6: specify the mirror port as Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2 for the data packets matching this rule:

Switch(config)#access-list action 6 rule 1

Switch(config-action)#s-mirror interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

47.13 qos-remark Description

The qos-remark command is used to configure QoS Remark function of policy action. To restore the settings to the default, please use no qos-remark.

Syntax qos-remark [ dscp dscp ] [ priority pri ] [dot1p dot1p-pri]

no qos-remark

Parameter dscp DSCP of QoS Remark. Specify the DSCP region for the data packets matching the corresponding ACL. DSCP ranges from 0 to 63. By default, it is not limited.

422

pri Local Priority of QoS Remark. Specify the local priority for the data packets matching the corresponding ACL. Local Priority ranges from 0 to 7.

dot1p-pri 802.1P priority of QoS Remark. This remark configuration will change the data packet's 802.1P priority field to the dot1p-pri you set. 802.1P priority ranges from 0 to 7.

Note: The DSCP and dot1p cannot be configured at the same time.

Command Mode Action Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure a policy for rule 1 of ACL 6: specify the DSCP region as 30 and local priority 2 for the packets matching this rule:

Switch(config)#access-list action 6 rule 1

Switch(config-action)# qos-remark dscp 30 priority 2

47.14 access bind Description

The access-list policy name command is used to add Policy. To delete the corresponding Policy, please use no access-list policy name command. A Policy is used to control the data packets those match the corresponding ACL rules.

Syntax access-list bind acl-id-or-name interface { [ vlan vlan-list ] | [ fastEthernet port-list ] | [gigabitEthernet port-list ] | [ ten-gigabitEthernet port-list ] }

no access-list bind acl-id-or-name interface { [ vlan vlan-list ] | [ fastEthernet port-list ] | [gigabitEthernet port-list ] | [ ten-gigabitEthernet port-list ] }

Parameter acl-id-or-name Enter the ID or name of the ACL that you want to add a rule for.

vlan-list Specify the ID or the ID list of the VLAN(s) that you want to bind the ACL to. The valid values are from 1 to 4094, for example, 2-3,5.

423

port-list Specify the number or the list of the Ethernet port that you want to bind the ACL to.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example Bind ACL 1 to port 3 and VLAN 4:

Switch(config)#access-list bind 1 interface vlan 4 gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

47.15 show access-list Description

The show access-list command is used to display configuration of ACL.

Syntax show access-list acl-id-or-name

Parameter acl-id-or-name The ID or name of the ACL selected to display the configuration.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the configuration of the MAC ACL whose ID is 20:

Switch(config)# show access-list 20

47.16 show access-list bind Description

The show access-list bind command is used to display the configuration of ACL binding.

Syntax show access-list bind

424

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the configuration of Policy bind:

Switch(config)# show access-list bind

47.17 show access-list status Description

The show access-list status command is used to display usage status of ACL entry resource.

Syntax show access-list status

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the usage status of ACL entry resource:

Switch(config)# show access-list status

47.18 show access-list counter Description

The show access-list counter command is used to display the packet counter of a specified ACL.

Syntax show access-list acl-id-or-name counter

Parameter acl-id-or-name The ID or name of the ACL to display.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

425

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the packet counter of ACL 100:

Switch(config)# show access-list 100 counter

47.19 clear access-list Description

The clear access-list command is used to clear the counter of matched packets of a specified ACL or rule.

Syntax clear access-list acl-id-or-name [rule rule-id]

Parameter acl-id-or-name The ID or name of the ACL.

rule-id The ID of the rule.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Clear the packet counter of ACL 100:

Switch(config)# clear access-list 100

426

Chapter 48 IPv4 IMPB Commands

You can bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host together, which can be the condition for the ARP Inspection and IP verify source to filter the packets.

48.1 ip source binding Description

The ip source binding command is used to bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port number together manually.You can manually bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port number together in the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN. To delete the IP-MACVID-PORT entry from the binding table, please use no ip source binding index command.

Syntax

ip source binding hostname ip-addr mac-addr vlan vlan-id interface { fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id } { none | arp-detection | ip-verify-source | both }

no ip source binding index ip-addr

Parameter

hostname The Host Name, which contains 20 characters at most.

ip-addr The IP address of the Host.

mac-addr The MAC address of the Host.

vlan-id The VLAN ID needed to be bound, ranging from 1 to 4094.

port The number of port connected to the Host.

none | arp-detection | ip-verify-source | both The protect type for the entry. arp-detection indicates ARP detection; ip-verify-source indicates IP source filter; none indicates applying none; both indicates applying both.

ip-addr The IP address of the entry to be deleted.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

427

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Bind an ACL entry with the IP 192.168.0.1, MAC 00:00:00:00:00:01, VLAN ID 2 and the Port number 5 manually. And then enable the entry for the ARP detection:

Switch(config)#ip source binding host1 192.168.0.1 00:00:00:00:00:01 vlan

2 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 arp-detection

Delete the IP-MACVID-PORT entry with the index 5:

Switch(config)#no ip source binding index 5

48.2 ip dhcp snooping Description

The ip dhcp snooping command is used to enable DHCP Snooping function globally. To disable DHCP Snooping function globally, please use no ip dhcp snooping command. DHCP Snooping functions to monitor the process of the Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server, and record the IP address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding.

Syntax

ip dhcp snooping

no ip dhcp snooping

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the DHCP Snooping function globally:

Switch(config)#ip dhcp snooping

428

48.3 ip dhcp snooping vlan Description

The ip dhcp snooping vlan command is used to enable DHCP Snooping function on a specified VLAN. To disable DHCP Snooping function on this VLAN, please use no ip dhcp snooping vlan command.

Syntax

ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-range

no ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-range

Parameter

vlan-range Specify the VLANs to enable the DHCP snooping function, in the format of 1-3, 5.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the DHCP Snooping function on VLAN 1,4,6-7:

Switch(config)#ip dhcp snooping vlan 1,4,6-7

48.4 ip dhcp snooping max-entries Description

The ip dhcp snooping max-entries command is used to configure the maximum number of entries that can be learned on a port via DHCP Snooping. To restore to the default setting, please use no ip dhcp snooping max-entries command.

Syntax

ip dhcp snooping max-entries value

no ip dhcp snooping max-entries

429

Syntax

value Enter the value of maximum number of entries that can be learned on the port via DHCP Snooping.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the maximum number of entries that can be learned on port 1 as 100:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping max-entries 100

48.5 show ip source binding Description

The show ip source binding command is used to display the IP-MAC-VID- PORT binding table.

Syntax

show ip source binding

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the IP-MAC-VID-PORT binding table:

Switch(config)#show ip source binding

430

48.6 show ip dhcp snooping Description

The show ip dhcp snooping command is used to display the running status of DHCP Snooping.

Syntax

show ip dhcp snooping

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the running status of DHCP Snooping:

Switch#show ip dhcp snooping

48.7 show ip dhcp snooping interface Description

The show ip dhcp snooping interface command is used to display the DHCP Snooping configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port/port channel or of all Ethernet ports/port channels.

Syntax

show ip dhcp snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameters

port The Ethernet port number.

port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

431

Example

Display the DHCP Snooping configuration of all Ethernet ports and port channels:

Switch#show ip dhcp snooping interface

Display the DHCP Snooping configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5:

Switch#show ip dhcp snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

432

Chapter 49 IPv6 IMPB Commands

You can bind the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host together, which can be the condition for the ARP Inspection and IP verify source to filter the packets.

49.1 ipv6 source binding Description

The ipv6 source binding command is used to bind the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port number together manually.You can manually bind the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port number together in the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN. To delete the IPv6-MACVID-PORT entry from the binding table, please use no ipv6 source binding index command.

Syntax

ipv6 source binding hostname ipv6-addr mac-addr vlan vlan-id interface { fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id } { none | nd-detection | ipv6-verify-source | both }

no ipv6 source binding index ipv6-addr

Parameter

hostname The Host Name, which contains 20 characters at most.

Ipv6-addr The IP address of the Host.

mac-addr The MAC address of the Host.

vlan-id The VLAN ID needed to be bound, ranging from 1 to 4094.

port The number of port connected to the Host.

none | nd-detection | ipv6-verify-source | both The protect type for the entry. nd-detection indicates ND detection; ipv6-verify-source indicates IPv6 source filter; none indicates applying none; both indicates applying both.

Ipv6-addr The IPv6 address of the entry to be deleted.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

433

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

The following example shows how to bind an entry with the hostname host1, IPv6 address 2001:0:9d38:90d5::34, MAC address AA-BB-CC-DD-EE-FF, VLAN ID 10, port number 1/0/5, and enable this entry for ND Detection.

Switch(config)# ipv6 source binding host1 2001:0:9d38:90d5::34

aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff vlan 10 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 nd-detection

49.2 ipv6 dhcp snooping Description

The ipv6 dhcp snooping command is used to enable DHCPv6 Snooping function globally. To disable DHCPv6 Snooping function globally, please use no ipv6 dhcp snooping command. DHCPv6 Snooping functions to monitor the process of the Host obtaining the IP address from DHCPv6 server, and record the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding.

Syntax

ipv6 dhcp snooping

no ipv6 dhcp snooping

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the DHCPv6 Snooping function globally:

Switch(config)#ipv6 dhcp snooping

434

49.3 ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan Description

The ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan command is used to enable DHCP Snooping function on a specified VLAN. To disable DHCP Snooping function on this VLAN, please use no ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan command.

Syntax

ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan vlan-range

no ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan vlan-range

Parameter

vlan-range Specify the VLANs to enable the DHCP snooping function, in the format of 1-3, 5.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the DHCPv6 Snooping function on VLAN 1,4,6-7:

Switch(config)#ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan 1,4,6-7

49.4 ipv6 dhcp snooping max-entries Description

The ipv6 dhcp snooping max-entries command is used to configure the maximum number of entries that can be learned on a port via DHCPv6 Snooping. To restore to the default setting, please use no ipv6 dhcp snooping max-entries command.

Syntax

Ipv6 dhcp snooping max-entries value

no ipv6 dhcp snooping max-entries

435

Syntax

value: Enter the value of maximum number of entries that can be learned on the port via DHCPv6 Snooping.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the maximum number of entries that can be learned on port 1 as 100:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(config-if)#ipv6 dhcp snooping max-entries 100

49.5 ipv6 nd snooping Description

The ipv6 nd snooping command is used to enable ND snooping function globally. To disable ND Snooping function globally, please use no ipv6 nd snooping command. ND Snooping functions to monitor the process of the duplication address detection, and record the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding.

Syntax

ipv6 nd snooping

no ipv6 nd snooping

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

436

Example

Enable the ND snooping function globally:

T160G-28TS(config)#ipv6 nd snooping

49.6 ipv6 nd snooping vlan Description

The ipv6 nd snooping vlan command is used to enable ND snooping function on a specified VLAN. To disable ND Snooping function on this VLAN, please use no ipv6 nd snooping vlan command.

Syntax

ipv6 nd snooping vlan vlan-range

no ipv6 nd snooping vlan vlan-range

Parameter

vlan-range Specify the VLANs to enable the ND snooping function, in the format of 1-3, 5.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the ND snooping function on VLAN 1,4,6-7:

Switch(config)#ipv6 nd snooping vlan 1,4,6-7

49.7 ipv6 nd snooping max-entries Description

The ipv6 nd snooping max-entries command is used to specify the maximum number of binding entries that are allow to be bound to a port. To return the default, please use no ipv6 nd snooping max-entries command.

437

Syntax

ipv6 nd snooping max-entries value

no ipv6 nd snooping max-entries

Parameter

value Specify the maximum number of ND snooping entries on this interface.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the maximum number of binding entries from ND Snooping of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2 is 100:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)#ipv6 nd snooping max-entries 100

49.8 show ipv6 source binding Description

The show ipv6 source binding command is used to display the IPv6-MAC-VID- PORT binding table.

Syntax

show ipv6 source binding

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the IPv6-MAC-VID-PORT binding table:

438

Switch(config)#show ipv6 source binding

49.9 show ipv6 dhcp snooping Description

The show ipv6 dhcp snooping command is used to display the running status of DHCPv6 Snooping.

Syntax

show ipv6 dhcp snooping

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the running status of DHCPv6 Snooping:

Switch#show ipv6 dhcp snooping

49.10 show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface Description

The show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface command is used to display the DHCPv6 Snooping configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port/port channel or of all Ethernet ports/port channels.

Syntax

show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameters

port The Ethernet port number.

port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

439

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the DHCPv6 Snooping configuration of all Ethernet ports and port channels:

Switch#show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface

Display the DHCPv6 Snooping configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5:

Switch#show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

49.11 show ipv6 nd snooping Description

The show ipv6 nd snooping command is used to display the running status of ND Snooping.

Syntax

show ipv6 nd snooping

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the running status of ND Snooping:

Switch#show ipv6 nd snooping

49.12 show ipv6 nd snooping interface

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description

The show ipv6 nd snooping interface command is used to display the ND Snooping configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port/port channel or of all Ethernet ports/port channels.

440

Syntax

show ipv6 nd snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameters

port The Ethernet port number.

port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the ND Snooping configuration of all Ethernet ports and port channels:

T2600G-28TS#show ipv6 nd snooping interface

Display the ND Snooping configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5:

T2600G-28TS#show ipv6 nd snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

441

Chapter 50 IP Verify Source Commands

IP Verify Source is to filter the IP packets based on the IP-MAC Binding entries. Only the packets matched to the IP-MAC Binding rules can be processed, which can enhance the bandwidth utility.

50.1 ip verify source Description

The ip verify source command is used to configure the IP Verify Source mode for a specified port. To disable the IP Verify Source function, please use no ip verify source command.

Syntax

ip verify source { sip+mac | sip }

no ip verify source

Parameter

sip+mac Security type. sip+mac indicates that only the packets with its source IP address, source MAC address and port number matched to the IP-MAC binding rules can be processed.

sip Security type. sip indicates that only the packets with its source IP address and port number matched to the IP-MAC binding rules can be processed.

Note: sip is only available on certain devices.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the IP Verify Source function for Gigabit Ethernet ports 5-10. Configure that only the packets with its source IP address, source MAC

442

address and port number matched to the IP-MAC binding rules can be processed:

Switch(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/5-10

Switch(config-if-range)#ip verify source sip+mac

50.2 ip verify source logging Description

The ip verify source logging command is used to enable the log feature. With this feature enabled, the switch will generate a log when illegal packets are received. To disable the log feature, please use no ip verify source logging command.

Syntax

ip verify source logging

no ip verify source logging

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the log feature to make the switch generate logs when receiving illegal packets:

Switch(config)#ip verify source logging

50.3 show ip verify source

Description

The show ip verify source command is used to display the IP Verify Source configuration information.

Syntax

show ip verify source

443

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the IP Verify Source configuration information:

Switch(config)#show ip verify source

50.4 show ip verify source interface Description

The show ip verify source interface command is used to display the IP verify source configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port.

Syntax

show ip verify source interface [fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameters

port The Ethernet port number.

port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the IP verify source configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5:

Switch#show ip verify source interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

444

Chapter 51 IPv6 Verify Source Commands

IPv6 Verify Source is to filter the IPv6 packets based on the IPv6-MAC Binding entries. Only the packets matched to the IPv6-MAC Binding rules can be processed, which can enhance the bandwidth utility.

Before configuring IPv6 Verify Source feature, you should configure the SDM template as enterpriseV6 and save your configurations.

51.1 ipv6 verify source Description

The ipv6 verify source command is used to configure the IPv6 Verify Source mode for a specified port. To disable the IPv6 Verify Source function, please use no ipv6 verify source command.

Syntax

ipv6 verify source { sipv6+mac | sipv6 }

no ipv6 verify source

Parameter

sipv6+mac Security type. sipv6+mac indicates that only the packets with its source IPv6 address, source MAC address and port number matched to the IPv6-MAC binding rules can be processed.

sipv6 Security type. sipv6 indicates that only the packets with its source IPv6 address and port number matched to the IPv6-MAC binding rules can be processed.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet )

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the IPv6 Verify Source function for Gigabit Ethernet ports 5-10. Configure that only the packets with its source IPv6 address, source MAC

445

address and port number matched to the IPv6-MAC binding rules can be processed:

Switch(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/5-10

Switch(config-if-range)#ipv6 verify source sipv6+mac

51.2 show ipv6 verify source Description

The show ipv6 verify source command is used to display the IPv6 Verify Source configuration information.

Syntax

show ipv6 verify source

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the IPv6 Verify Source configuration information:

Switch(config)#show ipv6 verify source

51.3 show ipv6 verify source interface Description

The show ipv6 verify source interface command is used to display the IPv6 verify source configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port.

Syntax

show ipv6 verify source interface gigabitEthernet port

Parameters

port The Ethernet port number.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

446

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the IPv6 verify source configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5:

Switch#show ipv6 verify source interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

447

Chapter 52 DHCPv4 Filter Commands

DHCPv4 Filter function allows the user to not only to restrict all DHCP Server packets but also to receive any specified DHCP server packet by any specified DHCP client, it is useful when one or more DHCP servers are present on the network and both provide DHCP services to different distinct groups of clients.

52.1 ip dhcp filter Description

The ip dhcp filter command is used to enable DHCP Filter function globally. To disable DHCP Filter function globally, please use no ip dhcp filter command.

Syntax

ip dhcp filter

no ip dhcp filter

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the DHCP Filter function globally:

Switch(config)#ip dhcp filter

52.2 ip dhcp filter (interface) Description

The ip dhcp filter (interface) command is used to enable DHCP Filter function on a specified port. To disable DHCP Filter function on this port, please use no ip dhcp filter (interface) command.

448

Syntax

ip dhcp filter

no ip dhcp filter

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the DHCP Filter on port 1/0/1

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(Config-if)#ip dhcp filter

52.3 ip dhcp filter mac-verify Description

The ip dhcp filter mac-verify command is used to enable the MAC Verify feature. To disable the MAC Verify feature, please use no ip dhcp filter mac-verify command. There are two fields of the DHCP packet containing the MAC address of the Host. The MAC Verify feature is to compare the two fields and discard the packet if the two fields are different.

Syntax

ip dhcp filter mac-verify

no ip dhcp filter mac-verify

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

449

Example

Enable the MAC Verify feature for the Gigabit Ethernet port 10/2:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)#ip dhcp filter mac-verify

52.4 ip dhcp filter limit rate Description

The ip dhcp filter limit rate command is used to enable the Flow Control feature for the DHCP packets. The excessive DHCP packets will be discarded. To restore to the default configuration, please use no ip dhcp filter limit rate command.

Syntax

ip dhcp filter limit rate value

no ip dhcp filter limit rate

Parameter

value The value of Flow Control. The options are 5/10/15/20/25/30 (packet/second). The default value is 0, which stands for disable.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Set the Flow Control of GigabitEthernet port 2 as 20 pps:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)#ip dhcp filter limit rate 20

450

52.5 ip dhcp filter decline rate Description

The ip dhcp filter decline rate command is used to enable the Decline Protect feature and configure the rate limit on DHCP Decine packets. The excessive DHCP Decline packets will be discarded. To disable the Decline Protect feature, please use no ip dhcp filter decline rate command.

Syntax

ip dhcp filter decline rate value

no ip dhcp filter decline rate

Parameter

value Specify the rate limit of DHCP Decline packets, and the optional values are 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30 (units:packet/second). It default value is 0, which stands for disable.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the rate limit of DHCP Decline packets as 20 packets per second on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)#ip dhcp filter decline 20

52.6 ip dhcp filter server permit-entry Description

The ip dhcp filter server permit-entry command is used to add entry for the legal DHCP server. To restore to the default option, please use no ip dhcp snooping information strategy command.

451

Syntax

ip dhcp filter server permit-entry server-ip ipAddr client-mac macAddr interface { fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | interface port-channel port-channel-id }

no ip dhcp filter server permit-entry server-ip ipAddr client-mac macAddr interface { fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | interface port-channel port-channel-id }

Parameter

ipAddr Specify the IP address of the legal DHCPv4 server.

macAddr Specify the MAC address of the DHCP Client. The value all means all client mac addresses.

port-list | port-channel-id Specify the port that the legal DHCPv4 server is connected to.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create an entry for the legal DHCPv4 server whose IP address is 192.168.0.100 and connected port number is 1/0/1 without client MAC address restricted:

Switch(config)#ip dhcp filter server permit-entry server-ip 192.168.0.100

client-mac all interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

52.7 show ip dhcp filter Description

The show ip dhcp filter command is used to display the configuration of DHCP Filter.

Syntax

show ip dhcp filter

452

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the DHCP Filter configuration:

Switch#show ip dhcp filter

52.8 show ip dhcp filter interface Description

The show ip dhcp filter interface command is used to display the configuration of DHCP Filter on ports.

Syntax

show ip dhcp filter interface [fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the DHCP Filter configuration on port 1/0/3:

Switch#show ip dhcp filter interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

52.9 show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry Description

The show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry command is used to display the legal server configuration.

Syntax

show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry

453

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the legal DHCP server configuration:

Switch#show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry

454

Chapter 53 DHCPv6 Filter Commands

DHCPv6 Filter function allows the user to not only to restrict all DHCPv6 Server packets but also to receive any specified DHCPv6 server packet by any specified DHCPv6 client, it is useful when one or more DHCPv6 servers are present on the network and both provide DHCPv6 services to different distinct groups of clients.

53.1 ipv6 dhcp filter Description

The ipv6 dhcp filter command is used to enable DHCP Filter function globally. To disable DHCPv6 Filter function globally, please use no ipv6 dhcp filter command.

Syntax

Ipv6 dhcp filter

no ipv6 dhcp filter

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the DHCPv6 Filter function globally:

Switch(config)#ipv6 dhcp filter

53.2 ipv6 dhcp filter (interface) Description

The ipv6 dhcp filter (interface) command is used to enable DHCPv6 Filter function on a specified port. To disable DHCPv6v Filter function on this port, please use no ipv6 dhcp filter (interface) command.

455

Syntax

ipv6 dhcp filter

no ipv6 dhcp filter

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the DHCPv6 Filter on port 1/0/1

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Switch(Config-if)#ipv6 dhcp filter

53.3 ipv6 dhcp filter limit rate Description

The ipv6 dhcp filter limit rate command is used to enable the Flow Control feature for the DHCPv6 packets. The excessive DHCPv6 packets will be discarded. To restore to the default configuration, please use no ipv6 dhcp filter limit rate command.

Syntax

Ipv6 dhcp filter limit rate value

no ipv6 dhcp filter limit rate

Parameter

value The value of Flow Control. The options are 5/10/15/20/25/30 (packet/second). The default value is 0, which stands for disable.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

456

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Set the Flow Control of GigabitEthernet port 2 as 20 pps:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)#ipv6 dhcp filter limit rate 20

53.4 ipv6 dhcp filter decline rate Description

The ipv6 dhcp filter decline rate command is used to enable the Decline Protect feature and configure the rate limit on DHCP Decine packets. The excessive DHCPv6 Decline packets will be discarded. To disable the Decline Protect feature, please use no ipv6 dhcp filter decline rate command.

Syntax

Ipv6 dhcp filter decline rate value

no ipv6 dhcp filter decline rate

Parameter

value Specify the rate limit of DHCPv6 Decline packets, and the optional values are 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30 (units:packet/second). It default value is 0, which stands for disable.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

457

Example

Configure the rate limit of DHCPv6 Decline packets as 20 packets per second on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)#ipv6 dhcp filter decline 20

53.5 ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry Description

The ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry command is used to add entry for the legal DHCPv6 server. To restore to the default option, please use no ipv6 dhcp snooping information strategy command.

Syntax

Ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry server-ip ipAddr interface { fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | interface port-channel port-channel-id }

no ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry server-ip ipAddr interface { fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | interface port-channel port-channel-id }

Parameter

ipAddr Specify the IPv6 address of the legal DHCPv6 server.

port-list | port-channel-id Specify the port that the legal DHCPv6 server is connected to.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Create an entry for the legal DHCPv6 server whose IP address is 192.168.0.100 and connected port number is 1/0/1:

Switch(config)#ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry server-ip 2003::1

interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

458

53.6 show ipv6 dhcp filter Description

The show ipv6 dhcp filter command is used to display the configuration of DHCPv6 Filter.

Syntax

show ipv6 dhcp filter

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the DHCPv6 Filter configuration:

Switch#show ipv6 dhcp filter

53.7 show ipv6 dhcp filter interface Description

The show ipv6 dhcp filter interface command is used to display the configuration of DHCPv6 Filter on ports.

Syntax

show ipv6 dhcp filter interface [fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the DHCPv6 Filter configuration on port 1/0/3:

Switch#show ipv6 dhcp filter interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

459

53.8 show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry Description

The show ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry command is used to display the legal server configuration.

Syntax

show ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the legal DHCPv6 server configuration:

Switch#show ipv6 dhcp filter server permit-entry

460

Chapter 54 DoS Defend Commands

DoS (Denial of Service) Attack is to occupy the network bandwidth maliciously by the network attackers or the evil programs sending a lot of service requests to the Host. With the DoS Defend enabled, the switch can analyze the specific field of the received packets and provide the defend measures to ensure the normal working of the local network.

54.1 ip dos-prevent Description

The ip dos-prevent command is used to enable the DoS defend function globally. To disable the DoS defend function, please use no ip dos-prevent command.

Syntax

ip dos-prevent

no ip dos-prevent

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the DoS defend function globally:

Switch(config)#ip dos-prevent

54.2 ip dos-prevent type Description

The ip dos-prevent type command is used to select the DoS Defend Type. To disable the corresponding Defend Type, please use no ip dos-prevent type command.

461

Syntax

ip dos-prevent type { land | scan-synfin | xma-scan | null-scan | port-less-1024 | blat | ping-flood | syn-flood | win-nuke | ping-of-death | smurf }

no ip dos-prevent type { land | scan-synfin | xma-scan | null-scan | port-less-1024 | blat | ping-flood | syn-flood | win-nuke | ping-of-death | smurf }

Parameter

land The attacker sends a specific fake SYN (synchronous) packet to the destination host. Because both of the source IP address and the destination IP address of the SYN packet are set to be the IP address of the host, the host will be trapped in an endless circle of building the initial connection.

scan-synfin The attacker sends the packet with its SYN field and the FIN field set to 1. The SYN field is used to request initial connection whereas the FIN field is used to request disconnection. Therefore, the packet of this type is illegal.

xma-scan The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index, FIN, URG and PSH field set to 1.

null-scan The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index and all the control fields set to 0. During the TCP connection and data transmission, the packets with all control fields set to 0 are considered illegal.

port-less-1024 The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP SYN field set to 1 and source port smaller than 1024.

blat The attacker sends the illegal packet with the same source port and destination port on Layer 4 and with its URG field set to 1. Similar to the Land Attack, the system performance of the attacked host is reduced because the Host circularly attempts to build a connection with the attacker.

ping-flood The attacker floods the destination system with Ping packets, creating a broadcast storm that makes it impossible for the system to respond to legal communication.

syn-flood The attacker uses a fake IP address to send TCP request packets to the server. Upon receiving the request packets, the server responds with SYN-ACK packets. Since the IP address is fake, no response will be returned. The server will keep on sending SYN-ACK packets. If the attacker sends overflowing fake request packets, the network resource will be occupied maliciously and the requests of the legal clients will be denied.

win-nuke Because the Operation System with bugs cannot correctly process the URG (Urgent Pointer) of TCP packets, the attacker sends this

462

type of packets to the TCP port139 (NetBIOS) of the host with the Operation System bugs, which will cause the host with a blue screen.

ping-of-death Ping of Death attack means that the attacker sends abnormal ping packets larger than 65535 bytes to cause system crash on the target computer.

Note: ping-of-death is only available on certain devices.

smurf Smurf attack is a distributed denial-of-service attack in which large numbers of Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packets with the intended victims spoofed source IP are broadcast to a computer network using an IP broadcast address. Most devices on a network will, by default, respond to this by sending a reply to the source IP address. If the number of machines on the network that receive and respond to these packets is very large, the victims computer will be flooded with traffic.

Note: smurf is only available on certain devices.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the DoS Defend Type named Land attack:

Switch(config)#ip dos-prevent type land

54.3 show ip dos-prevent Description

The show ip dos-prevent command is used to display the DoS information of the detected DoS attack, including enable/disable status, the DoS Defend Type,the count of the attack, etc.

Syntax

show ip dos-prevent

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

463

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the DoS information of the detected DoS attack globally:

Switch(config)#show ip dos-prevent

464

Chapter 55 sFlow Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Note: sFlow commands are only available on certain devices.

sFlow (Sampled Flow) is a technology for accurately monitoring network traffic at high speeds. The sFlow monitoring system consists of a sFlow agent (embedded in a switch or router or in a standalone probe) and a central sFlow collector. The sFlow agent is a virtual entity using sampling technology to capture traffic statistics from the device it is monitoring. The sFlow collector can be a host receiving sFlow datagrams from the sFlow agent. The sFlow feature is implemented as follows: the sFlow sampler take samples of traffic statistics and send sFlow datagrams to the sFlow agent for processing. The sFlow agent will forward sFlow datagrams to the sFlow collector for analysis. The analytic results can be displayed on the sFlow collector.

55.1 sflow address Description

The sflow address command is used to configure the sFlow agents IP address.To delete the configured address, please use no sflow address command.

Syntax sflow address { ipv4-addr }

no sflow address { ipv4-addr }

Parameter ipv4-addr The IP address of the sFlow agent. The type of the IP address should be IPv4. For example, you can set the switchs management IP as the IP address of the sFlow agent.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the sFlow agent with the IP address as 192.168.0.1:

T2600G-28TS(config)#sflow address 192.168.0.1

465

55.2 sflow enable Description

The sflow enable command is used to enable sFlow function. To disable the sFlow function, please use no sflow enable command.

Syntax sflow enable

no sflow enable

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

User Guidelines A valid agent address should be assigned to the sFlow agent embedded in the switch before you enable the sFlow function.

Example Enable sFlow function globally:

T2600G-28TS(config)#sflow enable

55.3 sflow collector collector-ID Description

The sflow collector collector-ID command is used to configure the parameters about the sFlow collector.

Syntax sflow collector collector-ID value { [descript descript ] | [ ip ip ] | [ port port ] | [ maxData maxData ] | [ timeout timeout ] }

Parameter value The ID of the sFlow collector you desire to configure. The value ranges from 1 to 4.

descript Give a Description to the sFlow collector, which contains 16 characters at most.

ip The IP address of the sFlow collector. The type of the IP address should be IPv4, for example 192.168.0.100.

466

port The number of the udp port which is selected for the sFlow collector.

maxData Specify the maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single sample datagram. The value ranges from 300 to 1400 and the default value is 300 bytes.

timeout Specify the aging time of the sFlow collector, ranging from 0 to 2000000 seconds. When the timeout is set to 0, it means the life cycle of the collector is infinite.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Specify the ip of the sFlow collector 1 as 192.168.0.100, the port as 3000:

T2600G-28TS(config)# sflow collector collector-ID 1 ip 192.168.0.100

T2600G-28TS(config)# sflow collector collector-ID 1 port 3000

55.4 sflow sampler Description

The sflow sampler command is used to configure the parameters about the sFlow sampler.

Syntax sflow sampler { [ collector-ID value ] | [ ingRate ingress-rate ] [ egRate egress-rate ] | [ maxHeader maxHeader ] }

Parameter value The ID of the sFlow collector which the sFlow sampler will send sFlow datagrams to. The value ranges from 0 to 4. When the value is zero, it means no collector is selected.

ingress-rate Specify the ingress sampling frequency of the sFlow sampler. When a sample is taken, the value indicates how many packets to skip before the next sample is taken. The value ranges from 1024 to 65535 and the default value is 0 which means no packets will be sampled.

egress-rate Specify the egress sampling frequency of the sFlow sampler. When a sample is taken, the value indicates how many packets to skip before

467

the next sample is taken. The value ranges from 1024 to 65535 and the default value is 0 which means no packets will be sampled.

maxHeader Specify the maximum number of bytes that should be copied from a sampled packet. The value ranges from 18 to 256 and the default value is 128 bytes.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure Gigabit Ethernet port 1 as the sFlow sampler: specify the Collector-ID as 1, the ingress rate as 1024:

T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#sflow sampler collector-ID 1

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#sflow sampler ingRate 1024

55.5 show sflow global Description

The show sflow global command is used to display the global configuration of sFlow.

Syntax show sflow global

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement None.

Example Display the global configuration of sFlow:

T2600G-28TS#show sflow global

468

55.6 show sflow collector Description

The show sflow collector command is used to display the global configuration of the sFlow collector.

Syntax show sflow collector

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement None.

Example Display the global configuration of the sFlow collector:

T2600G-28TS#show sflow collector

55.7 show sflow sampler Description

The show sflow sampler command is used to display the global configuration of the sFlow sampler.

Syntax show sflow sampler

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement None.

Example Display the global configuration of the sFlow sampler:

T2600G-28TS#show sflow sampler

469

Chapter 56 Ethernet OAM Commands (Only for Certain

Devices)

Note: Ethernet OAM commands are only available on certain devices.

Ethernet OAM (standing for Operation, Administration, and Maintenance) is Layer 2 protocol that is used for monitoring and troubleshooting Ethernet networks. It can report the network status to network administrators through the OAMPDUs exchanged between two OAM entities. The operation of OAM on an Ethernet interface does not adversely affect data traffic as OAM is a slow protocol with very limited bandwidth potential.

56.1 ethernet-oam

Description

The ethernet-oam command is used to enable the Ethernet OAM function for the desired port. To disable the Ethernet OAM function, please use no ethernet-oam command.

Syntax

ethernet-oam

no ethernet-oam

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the Ethernet OAM function for Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2:

T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ethernet-oam

470

56.2 ethernet-oam mode

Description

The ethernet-oam mode command is used to configure the OAM mode for the desired port. To return to the default configurations, please use no ethernet-oam mode command. The default mode is active.

Syntax

ethernet-oam mode { passive | active}

no ethernet-oam mode

Parameter

passive Specify the OAM mode as passive.

active Specify the OAM mode as active.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure Ethernet OAM client to operate in passive mode for Gigabit Ethernet port 2:

T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ethernet-oam mode passive

56.3 ethernet-oam link-monitor symbol-period

Description

The ethernet-oam link-monitor symbol-period command is used to configure the parameters about one of the link events, error symbol period event. To return to the default configurations, please use no ethernet-oam link-monitor symbol-period command.

471

Syntax

ethernet-oam link-monitor symbol-period { threshold threshold| window window| notify {disable | enable }}

no ethernet-oam link-monitor symbol-period { threshold | window | notify}

Parameter

threshold Configure the error threshold for generating error symbol-period event. The range is from 1 to 4294967295 and the default value is 1.

window Configure the error symbol-period event detection interval. The range is from 10 to 600, in terms of 100 ms intervals. The default value is 10.

notify Enable/Disable the event notification. By default, it is enabled.

threshold | window | notify The parameter that you want to return to the default configuration.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

For error symbol-period event, configure the error threshold as 5 and the event detection interval as 3 seconds on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2:

T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ethernet-oam link-monitor symbol-period

threshold 5 window 30

56.4 ethernet-oam link-monitor frame

Description

The ethernet-oam link-monitor frame command is used to configure the parameters about one of the link events, error frame event. To return to the default configurations, please use no ethernet-oam link-monitor frame command.

472

Syntax

ethernet-oam link-monitor frame { [threshold threshold] [ window window] [notify {disable | enable } ] }

no ethernet-oam link-monitor frame { threshold | window | notify}

Parameter

threshold Configure the error threshold for generating error frame event. The range is from 1 to 4294967295 and the default value is 1.

window Configure the error symbol-period event detection interval. The range is from 10 to 600, in terms of 100 ms intervals. The default value is 10.

notify Enable/Disable the event notification. By default, it is enabled.

threshold | window | notify The parameter that you want to return to the default configuration.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

For error frame event, configure the error threshold as 6 and the event detection interval as 9 seconds on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3:

T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ethernet-oam link-monitor frame threshold 6

window 90

56.5 ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-period

Description

The ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-period command is used to configure the parameters about one of the link events, error frame period event. To return to the default configurations, please use no ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-period command.

473

Syntax

ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-period { [threshold threshold] [ window window] [notify {disable | enable } ] }

no ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-period { threshold | window | notify}

Parameter

threshold Configure the error threshold for generating error frame period event. The range is from 1 to 4294967295 and the default value is 1.

window Configure the error frame period event detection interval. The range is from 148810 to 89286000. The default value is 148810 for Fast Ethernet port and 1488100 for Gigabit Ethernet port.

notify Enable/Disable the event notification. By default, it is enabled.

threshold | window | notify The parameter that you want to return to the default configuration.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

For error frame period event, configure the error threshold as 6 and the event detection interval as 150000 frames on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/4:

T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4

T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-period

threshold 6 window 150000

56.6 ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-seconds

Description

The ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-seconds command is used to configure the parameters about one of the link events, error frame seconds event. To return to the default configurations, please use no ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-seconds command.

474

Syntax

ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-seconds { [threshold threshold] [ window window] [notify {disable | enable } ] }

no ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-seconds { threshold | window | notify}

Parameter

threshold Configure the error threshold for generating error frame seconds event. The range is from 1 to 900 and the default value is 1.

window Configure the error frame seconds event detection interval. The range is from 100 to 9000, in terms of 100 ms intervals. The default value is 600.

notify Enable/Disable the event notification. By default, it is enabled.

threshold | window | notify The parameter that you want to return to the default configuration.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

For error frame seconds event, configure the error threshold as 8 and the event detection interval as 30 seconds on Gigabit Ethernet port 5:

T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-seconds

threshold 8 window 300

56.7 ethernet-oam remote-failure

Description

The ethernet-oam remote-failure command is used to configure whether to notify the link faults or not. The link faults include dying gasp and critical event. To return to the default configurations, please use no ethernet-oam remote-failure command.

475

Syntax

ethernet-oam remote-failure {dying-gasp | critical-event} notify {disable | enable }

no ethernet-oam remote-failure {dying-gasp | critical-event} notify

Parameter

dying-gasp Dying Gasp link event. Dying gasp means an unrecoverable fault, such as power failure, occurs.

critical-event Critical Event. Critical-event means unspecified critical event occurs.

notify Enable/Disable the event notification. By default, it is enabled.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Disable the Dying Gasp link event notification on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/7:

T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/7

T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ethernet-oam remote-failure dying-gasp notify

disable

56.8 ethernet-oam remote-loopback

received-remote- loopback

Description

The ethernet-oam remote-loopback received-remote-loopback command is used to configure the client to process or to ignore the received remote loopback request. To return to the default configurations, please use no ethernet-oam remote-loopback received-remote-loopback command.

Syntax

ethernet-oam remote-loopback received-remote-loopback {process | ignore }

476

no ethernet-oam remote-loopback received-remote-loopback

Parameter

process Process the received remote loopback request.

ignore Ignore the received remote loopback request.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the client to process the received remote loopback request on Gigabit Ethernet port 1:

T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ethernet-oam remote-loopback received

-remote-loopback process

56.9 ethernet-oam remote-loopback

Description

The ethernet-oam remote-loopback command is used to request the remote peer to start or stop the Ethernet OAM remote loopback mode.

Syntax

ethernet-oam remote-loopback { start | stop }

Parameter

start Request the remote peer to start the Ethernet OAM remote loopback mode.

stop Request the remote peer to stop the Ethernet OAM remote loopback mode.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

477

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Request the remote peer to start the Ethernet OAM remote loopback mode on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3:

T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ethernet-oam remote-loopback start

56.10 clear ethernet-oam statistics

Description

The clear ethernet-oam statistics command is used to clear Ethernet OAM statistics.

Syntax

clear ethernet-oam statistics [ interface gigabitEthernet port]

Parameter

port The Gigabit Ethernet port number. By default, the Ethernet OAM statistics of all ports are cleared.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Clear Ethernet OAM statistics of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3:

T2600G-28TS(config)# clear ethernet-oam statistics interface gigabit

Ethernet 1/0/3

478

56.11 clear ethernet-oam event-log

Description

The clear ethernet-oam event-log command is used to clear the Ethernet OAM event log.

Syntax

clear ethernet-oam event-log [ interface gigabitEthernet port ]

Parameter

port The Gigabit Ethernet port number. By default, the Ethernet OAM event logs of all ports are cleared.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Clear Ethernet OAM event log of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3:

T2600G-28TS(config)# clear ethernet-oam event-log interface

gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

56.12 show ethernet-oam configuration

Description

The show ethernet-oam configuration command is used to display Ethernet OAM configuration information.

Syntax

show ethernet-oam configuration [ interface gigabitEthernet port]

Parameter

port The Gigabit Ethernet port number. By default, the Ethernet OAM configuration information of all ports is displayed.

479

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display Ethernet OAM configuration information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2:

T2600G-28TS(config)# show ethernet-oam configuration interface

gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

56.13 show ethernet-oam event-log

Description

The show ethernet-oam event-log command is used to display the Ethernet OAM event log.

Syntax

show ethernet-oam event-log [ interface gigabitEthernet port]

Parameter

port The Gigabit Ethernet port number. By default, the Ethernet OAM event logs of all ports are displayed.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display Ethernet OAM event log of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2:

T2600G-28TS(config)# show ethernet-oam event-log interface

gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

480

56.14 show ethernet-oam statistics

Description

The show ethernet-oam statistics command is used to display the Ethernet OAM statistics.

Syntax

show ethernet-oam statistics [ interface gigabitEthernet port]

Parameter

port The Gigabit Ethernet port number. By default, the Ethernet OAM statistics of all ports are displayed.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display Ethernet OAM statistics of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2:

T2600G-28TS(config)# show ethernet-oam statistics interface

gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

56.15 show ethernet-oam status

Description

The show ethernet-oam status command is used to display the Ethernet OAM status of both the local and the remote client.

Syntax

show ethernet-oam status [ interface gigabitEthernet port]

Parameter

port The Gigabit Ethernet port number. By default, the Ethernet OAM status of all ports is displayed.

481

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Display Ethernet OAM status of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2:

T2600G-28TS(config)# show ethernet-oam status interface

gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

482

Chapter 57 DLDP Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

DLDP (Device Link Detection Protocol) is used to monitor the link state of fiber-optic or twisted-pair Ethernet cables. When a unidirectional link is detected, the corresponding port will be shut down automatically or manually (depending on the shut mode configured).

57.1 dldp (global) Description

The dldp command is used to enable the DLDP function globally. To disable it, please use no dldp command.

Syntax

dldp

no dldp

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the DLDP function globally:

Switch(config)# dldp

57.2 dldp interval Description

The dldp interval command is used to define the interval of sending advertisement packets on ports that are in the advertisement state.

Syntax

dldp interval interval-time

Parameter

interval-time The interval of sending advertisement packets. It ranges from 1 to 30 seconds. By default, it is 5 seconds.

483

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the interval of sending advertisement packets as 10 seconds:

Switch(config)# dldp interval 10

57.3 dldp shut-mode Description

The dldp shut-mode command is used to configure the shutdown mode when a unidirectional link is detected.

Syntax

dldp shut-mode { auto | manual }

Parameter

auto The switch automatically shuts down ports when a unidirectional link is detected. By default, the shut-mode is auto.

manual The switch displays an alert when a unidirectional link is detected. The operation to shut down the unidirectional link ports is accomplished by the users.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the shut-mode as manual:

Switch(config)# dldp shut-mode manual

484

57.4 dldp reset (global)

Note: This command is only available on certain devices

Description

The dldp reset command is used to reset all the unidirectional links and restart the link detect process.

Syntax

dldp reset

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Reset the DLDP function globally:

T2600G-28TS(config)# dldp reset

57.5 dldp(interface) Description

The dldp command is used to enable the DLDP function of the specified port. To disable it, please use no dldp command.

Syntax

dldp

no dldp

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

485

Example

Enable the DLDP function of ports 1/0/2-4:

Switch (config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-4

Switch (config-if-range)# dldp

57.6 dldp reset (interface)

Note: This command is only available on certain devices

Description

The dldp reset command is used to reset the specified port and restart the link detect process.

Syntax

dldp reset

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Reset the DLDP function of ports 2-4:

T2600G-28TS (config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-4

T2600G-28TS (config-if-range)# dldp reset

57.7 show dldp Description

The show dldp command is used to display the global configuration of DLDP function such as DLDP global state, DLDP interval and shut mode.

Syntax

show dldp

486

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the global configuration of DLDP function:

Switch# show dldp

57.8 show dldp interface Description

The show dldp interface command is used to display the configuration and state of the specified Ethernet port. By default, the configuration and state of all the ports will be displayed.

Syntax

show dldp interface [gigabitEthernet port ]

Parameter

port The Gigabit Ethernet port number.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the configuration and state of all ports:

Switch# show dldp interface

Display the configuration and state of port 1/0/5:

Switch# show dldp interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

487

Chapter 58 SNMP Commands

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) functions are used to manage the network devices for a smooth communication, which can facilitate the network administrators to monitor the network nodes and implement the proper operation.

58.1 snmp-server Description

The snmp-server command is used to enable the SNMP function. By default, it is disabled. To return to the default configuration, please use no snmp-server command.

Syntax snmp-server

no snmp-server

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the SNMP function:

Switch(config)# snmp-server

58.2 snmp-server view Description

The snmp-server view command is used to add View. To delete the corresponding View, please use no snmp-server view command. The OID (Object Identifier) of the SNMP packets is used to describe the managed objects of the switch, and the MIB (Management Information Base) is the set of the OIDs. The SNMP View is created for the SNMP management station to manage MIB objects.

Syntax snmp-server view name mib-oid { include | exclude }

no snmp-server view name mib-oid

488

Parameter name The entry name of View, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. Each View includes several entries with the same name.

mib-oid MIB Object ID. It is the Object Identifier (OID) for the entry of View, ranging from 1 to 61 characters.

include | exclude View Type, with include and exclude options. They represent the view entry can/cannot be managed by the SNMP management station individually.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Add a View named view1, configuring the OID as 1.3.6.1.6.3.20, and this OID can be managed by the SNMP management station:

Switch(config)# snmp-server view view1 1.3.6.1.6.3.20 include

58.3 snmp-server group Description

The snmp-server group command is used to manage and configure the SNMP group. To delete the corresponding SNMP group, please use no snmp-server group command. SNMP v3 provides the VACM (View-based Access Control Model) and USM (User-Based Security Model) mechanisms for authentication. The users in the SNMP Group can manage the device via the Read View, Write View and Notify View. And the authentication mode and the privacy mode guarantee the high security for the communication between the management station and the managed device.

Syntax snmp-server group name [ smode v3 ] [ slev { noAuthNoPriv | authNoPriv | authPriv }] [ read read-view ] [ write write-view ] [ notify notify-view ]

no snmp-server group name smode v3 slev { noAuthNoPriv | authNoPriv | authPriv }

Parameter name The SNMP Group name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. The Group Name, Security Model and Security Level compose the identifier of the

489

SNMP Group. These three items of the Users in one group should be the same.

v3 The security mode for the group, v3 indicates SNMPv3, the most secure level.

slev The Security Level of SNMP v3 Group. There are three options, including noAuthNoPriv (No authentication algorithm but a user name match is applied to check packets, and no privacy algorithm is applied to encrypt them), authNoPriv (An authentication algorithm is applied to check packets, but no privacy algorithm is applied to encrypt them) and authPriv (An authentication algorithm and a privacy algorithm are applied to check and encrypt packets). By default, the Security Level is noAuthNoPriv. There is no need to configure this in SNMP v1 Mode and SNMP v2c Mode.

read-view Select the View to be the Read View. The management access is restricted to read-only, and changes cannot be made to the assigned SNMP View.

write-view Select the View to be the Write View. The management access is writing only and changes can be made to the assigned SNMP View. The View defined both as the Read View and the Write View can be read and modified.

notify-view Select the View to be the Notify View. The management station can receive notification messages of the assigned SNMP view generated by the switch's SNMP agent.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Add a group, and configure the name as group 1, the Security Model as SNMP v3, the security level as authNoPriv, the management access to the assigned View viewDefault as read-write, besides the notification messages sent by View viewDefault can be received by Management station:

Switch(config)# snmp-server group group1 smode v3 slev authNoPriv read

viewDefault write viewDefault notify viewDefault

Delete group 1:

Switch(config)# no snmp-server group group1 smode v3 slev authNoPriv

490

58.4 snmp-server user Description

The snmp-server user command is used to add User. To delete the corresponding User, please use no snmp-server user command. The User in an SNMP Group can manage the switch via the management station software. The User and its Group have the same security level and access right.

Syntax

snmp-server user name { local | remote } group-name [ smode v3 ] [ slev noAuthNoPriv ] [ cmode none ] [ cpwd confirm-pwd ] [ emode none ] [ epwd encrypt-pwd ]

snmp-server user name { local | remote } group-name [ smode v3 ] slev authNoPriv cmode { MD5 | SHA } cpwd confirm-pwd [ emode none] [ epwd encrypt-pwd ]

snmp-server user name { local | remote } group-name [ smode v3 ] slev authPriv cmode { MD5 | SHA } cpwd confirm-pwd emode DES epwd encrypt-pwd

no snmp-server user name

Parameter name User Name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.

local | remote User Type, with local and remote options. Local indicates that the user is connected to a local SNMP engine, while remote means that the user is connected to a remote SNMP engine. As the remote engine ID and user password are used to compute the authentication and privacy digests, before configuring a remote user, you need to set the remote engine ID first.

group-name The Group Name of the User. The User is classified to the corresponding Group according to its Group Name, Security Model and Security Level.

v3 The security mode for the user. v3 indicates SNMPv3, the most secure model.

slev The Security Level of SNMP v3 User. There are three options, including noAuthNoPriv (No authentication algorithm but a user name match is applied to check packets, and no privacy algorithm is applied to encrypt them), authNoPriv (An authentication algorithm is applied to check packets, but no privacy algorithm is applied to encrypt them) and authPriv (An authentication algorithm and a privacy algorithm are applied to check and

491

encrypt packets). The security level from lowest to highest is: noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv, authPriv, and the default is noAuthNoPriv. The security level of the user should not be lower than the group it belongs to.

cmode The Authentication Mode of the SNMP v3 User, with none, MD5 and SHA options. None indicates no authentication method is used, MD5 indicates the port authentication is performed via HMAC-MD5 algorithm and SHA indicates the port authentication is performed via SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm). SHA authentication mode has a higher security than MD5 mode. By default, the Authentication Mode is none.

confirm-pwd Authentication Password, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. The question marks and spaces are not allowed. This password in the configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric encrypted form.

emode The Privacy Mode of the SNMP v3 User, with none and DES options. None indicates no privacy method is used, and DES indicates DES encryption method is used. By default, the Privacy Mode is none.

encrypt-pwd Privacy Password, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. The question marks and spaces are not allowed. This password in the configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric encrypted form.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Add Local User admin to Group group2, and configure the Security Model of the user as v3, the Security Level of the group as authPriv, the Authentication Mode of the user as MD5, the Authentication Password as 11111, the Privacy Mode as DES, and the Privacy Password as 22222:

Switch(config)# snmp-server user admin local group2 smode v3 slev

authPriv cmode MD5 cpwd 11111 emode DES epwd 22222

58.5 snmp-server community Description

The snmp-server community command is used to add Community. To delete the corresponding Community, please use no snmp-server community command. SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c adopt community name

492

authentication. The community name can limit access to the SNMP agent from SNMP network management station, functioning as a password.

Syntax snmp-server community name { read-only | read-write } mib-view

no snmp-server community name

Parameter name Community Name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters.

read-only | read-write The access rights of the community, with read-only and read-write options.

mib-view The MIB View for the community to access.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Add community public, and the community has read-write management right to View viewDefault:

Switch(config)# snmp-server community public read-write viewDefault

58.6 snmp-server host Description

The snmp-server host command is used to add Notification. To delete the corresponding Notification, please use no snmp-server host command.

Syntax snmp-server host ip udp-port user-name [ smode { v1 | v2c | v3 }] [ slev { noAuthNoPriv | authNoPriv | authPriv }] [ type { trap | inform }] [ retries retries ] [ timeout timeout ]

no snmp-server host ip user-name

Parameter ip The IP Address of the management Host. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.100 or fe80::1234.

udp-port UDP port, which is used to send notifications. The UDP port functions with the IP address for the notification sending. It ranges from 1 to 65535.

493

user-name The User name of the management station.

smode The Security Model of the management station, with v1, v2c and v3 options. By default, the option is v1.

slev The Security Level of SNMP v3 User. There are three options, including noAuthNoPriv (No authentication algorithm but a user name match is applied to check packets, and no privacy algorithm is applied to encrypt them), authNoPriv (An authentication algorithm is applied to check packets, but no privacy algorithm is applied to encrypt them) and authPriv (An authentication algorithm and a privacy algorithm are applied to check and encrypt packets). By default, the Security Level is noAuthNoPriv.

type The type of the notifications, with trap and inform options. Trap indicates traps are sent, while inform indicates informs are sent. The inform type has a higher security than the trap type and resend and timeout need to be configured if you select this option. You can only select the trap type in Security Model v1. By default, the type of the notifications is trap.

retries The amount of times the switch retries an inform request, ranging from 1 to 255. The switch will resend the inform request if it doesnt get the response from the management station during the Timeout interval, and it will terminate resending the inform request if the resending times reach the specified Retry times.

timeout The maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from the management station before resending a request, ranging from 1 to 3600 in seconds.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Add a Notification entry, and configure the IP address of the management Host as 192.168.0.146, the UDP port as 162, the User name of the management station as admin, the Security Model of the management station as v2c, the type of the notifications as inform, the maximum time for the switch to wait as 1000 seconds, and the retries time as 100:

Switch(config)# snmp-server host 192.168.0.146 162 admin smode v2c

type inform retries 100 timeout 1000

494

Add a Notification entry, and configure the IP Address of the management Host as fe80::1234, the UDP port as 162, the User name of the management station as admin, the Security Model of the management station as v2c, the type of the notifications as inform, the maximum time for the switch to wait as 1000 seconds, and the retries time as 100:

Switch(config)# snmp-server host fe80::1234 162 admin smode v2c type

inform retries 100 timeout 1000

58.7 snmp-server engineID Description

The snmp-server engineID command is used to configure the local and remote engineID of the switch. To restore to the default setting, please use no snmp-server engineID command.

Syntax snmp-server engineID { [ local local-engineID ] [ remote remote-engineID ] }

no snmp-server engineID

Parameter local-engineID Local Engine ID for local clients. The Engine ID is a unique alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the switch. Its length ranges from 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters, which must be even number meanwhile.

remote-engineID Remote Engine ID for the switch. The Engine ID is a unique alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the remote device which receives informs from the switch. Its length ranges from 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters, which must be even number meanwhile. The snmp-server engineID will be disabled if the local and remote are both not configured.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Specify the local engineID as 1234567890, and the remote engineID as abcdef123456:

495

Switch(config)# snmp-server engineID local 1234567890 remote

abcdef123456

58.8 snmp-server traps snmp Description

The snmp-server traps snmp command is used to enable SNMP standard traps which include four types: linkup, linkdown, warmstart and coldstart. The command without parameter enables all SNMP standard traps. All SNMP standard traps are enabled by default. To disable the sending of SNMP standard traps, please use no snmp-server traps snmp command.

Syntax snmp-server traps snmp [ linkup | linkdown | warmstart | coldstart | auth-failure ]

no snmp-server traps snmp [ linkup | linkdown | warmstart | coldstart | auth-failure ]

Parameter linkup Indicates a port status changes from linkdown to linkup, and can be triggered when you connect a device to a port.

linkdown Indicates a port status changes from linkup to linkdown, and can be triggered when you disconnect a device to a port.

warmstart Indicates the SNMP feature on the switch is reinitialized with the physical configuration unchanged. The trap can be triggered if you disable and then enable SNMP after the SNMP is completely configured and enabled.

coldstart Indicates an SNMP initialization caused by the reinitialization of the switch system. The trap can be triggered when you reboot the switch.

auth-failure Triggered when a received SNMP request fails the authentication.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable SNMP standard linkup trap for the switch:

496

Switch(config)# snmp-server traps snmp linkup

58.9 snmp-server traps Description

The snmp-server traps command is used to enable SNMP extended traps. To disable the sending of SNMP extended traps, please use no snmp-server traps command. All SNMP extended traps are disabled by default.

Syntax snmp-server traps { rate-limit | cpu | flash | lldp remtableschange | lldp topologychange | loopback-detection | storm-control | spanning-tree | memory }

no snmp-server traps { bandwidth-control | cpu | flash | lldp remtableschange | lldp topologychange | loopback-detection | storm-control | spanning-tree | memory }

Parameter rate-limit Monitors whether the bandwidth has reached the limit you have set. The trap can be triggered when the Rate Limit feature is enabled and packets are sent to the port with a rate higher than what you have set.

cpu Monitors the load status of the switch CPU. The trap can be triggered when the utilization rate of the CPU has exceeded the limit that you have set. The limit of CPU utilization rate for the switch is 80% by default.

flash Triggered when flash is modified during operations such as backup, reset, firmware upgrade, configuration import, and so on.

lldp remtableschange An lldp RemTablesChange notification is sent when the value of lldp StatsRemTableLastChangeTime changes. It can be utilized by an NMS host to trigger LLDP remote systems table maintenance polls.

lldp topologychange A notification generated by the local device to sense the change in the topology that indicates a new remote device attached to a local port, or a remote device disconnected or moved from one port to another.

loopback-detection The feature is used to detect loopbacks. And the trap is disabled by default. The system will generate the trap when a loopback is detected or cleared.

497

storm-control The feature is used to monitor network storms. And the trap is disabled by default. The system will generate the trap when the rate of broadcast or multicast reaches the limit of storm control.

spanning-tree The feature is used to monitor the spanning tree status. And the trap is disabled by default. The system will generate the trap in the following situations: a port changes from non-forwarding state to forwarding state or the other way round; a port receives a packet with TC flag or a TCN packet.

memory The feature is used to monitor the memory. And the trap is disabled by default. The system will generate the trap when the memory utilization exceeds 80%.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable SNMP extended bandwidth-control trap for the switch:

Switch(config)# snmp-server traps bandwidth-control

58.10 snmp-server traps ddm

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description The snmp-server traps ddm command is used to enable the corresponding DDM traps. DDM function is used to monitor the status of the SFP modules inserted into the SFP ports on the switch. The command without parameter enables all SNMP DDM traps. To disable the sending of SNMP DDM traps, use no snmp-server traps ddm command. All DDM traps are disabled by default.

Syntax snmp-server traps ddm [ temperature | voltage | bias_current | tx_power | rx_power ]

no snmp-server traps ddm [ temperature | voltage | bias_current | tx_power | rx_power ]

498

Parameter temperature Monitors the temperature of SFP modules inserted into the SFP ports on the switch. The trap can be triggered when the temperature of any SFP module has reached the warning or alarm threshold.

voltage Monitors the voltage of SFP modules inserted into the SFP ports on the switch. The trap can be triggered when the voltage of any SFP module has reached the warning or alarm threshold.

bias_current Monitors the bias current of SFP modules inserted into the SFP ports on the switch. The trap can be triggered when the bias current of any SFP module has reached the warning or alarm threshold.

tx_power Monitors the TX Power of SFP modules inserted into the SFP ports on the switch. The trap can be triggered when the TX Power of any SFP module has reached the warning or alarm threshold.

rx_power Monitors the RX Power of SFP modules inserted into the SFP ports on the switch. The trap can be triggered when the RX Power of any SFP module has reached the warning or alarm threshold.

User guidelines The snmp-server traps ddm command without any parameter is used to enable all the types of DDM traps. And the no snmp-server traps ddm command without any parameter is used to disable all the types of DDM traps.

For more instructions about the alarm threshold or warning threshold, refer to Chapter 11 DDM Commands.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Example Enable all the SNMP DDM traps for the switch:

T2600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server traps ddm

58.11 snmp-server traps vlan Description

The snmp-server traps vlan command is used to enable the corresponding VLAN traps. The command without parameter enables all SNMP VLAN traps. To disable this function, please use no snmp-server traps vlan command. All VLAN traps are disabled by default.

499

Syntax snmp-server traps vlan [ create | delete ]

no snmp-server traps vlan [create | delete ]

Parameter create Triggered when certain VLANs are created successfully.

delete Triggered when certain VLANs are deleted successfully.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable all SNMP extended VLAN-related traps for the switch:

Switch(config)# snmp-server traps vlan

Enable VLAN-created trap only for the switch:

Switch(config)# snmp-server traps vlan create

58.12 snmp-server traps security Description

The snmp-server traps security command is used to enable the corresponding security traps. To disable this feature, please use no snmp-server traps security command. All security traps are disabled by default.

Syntax snmp-server traps security { dhcp-filter | ip-mac-binding | acl }

no snmp-server traps security { dhcp-filter | ip-mac-binding }

Parameter dhcp-filter Triggered when the DHCPv4 Filter feature is enabled and the switch receives DHCP packets from an illegal DHCP server.

ip-mac-binding Triggered when the ARP Inspection feature is enabled and the switch receives an illegal ARP packet, or the IPv4 Source Guard feature is enabled and the switch receives an illegal IP packet.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

500

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the DHCP filter trap for the switch:

Switch(config)# snmp-server traps security dhcp-filter

58.13 snmp-server traps acl Description

The snmp-server traps acl command is used to enable the ACL trap. To disable this feature, please use no snmp-server traps acl command. It is disabled by default. The trap monitors matched ACL information, including the matched ACL ID, rule ID and the number of the matched packets. With both this trap and the Logging feature in ACL rule settings enabled, the switch will check the matched ACL information every five minutes and send SNMP traps if there is any updated information.

Syntax snmp-server traps acl

no snmp-server traps acl

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the ACL trap for the switch:

Switch(config)# snmp-server traps acl

58.14 snmp-server traps ip Description

The snmp-server traps ip command is used to enable IP traps. To disable this feature, please use no snmp-server traps ip command. All IP traps are disabled by default.

Syntax snmp-server traps ip { change | duplicate }

no snmp-server traps ip { change | duplicate }

501

Parameter change Enable SNMP IP change traps. The trap monitors the IP changed of each interface. The trap can be triggered when the IP address of any interface is changed.

duplicate Enable SNMP IP duplicate traps. The trap can be triggered when the switch detects an IP conflict event.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable the IP-Change trap for the switch:

Switch(config)# snmp-server traps ip change

58.15 snmp-server traps power (Only for Certain Devices)

Note: This command is only available on certain devices

Description The snmp-server traps power command is used to enable PoE traps. The command without parameter enables all PoE traps. To disable this feature, please use no snmp-server traps power command. All PoE traps are disabled by default.

Syntax snmp-server traps power [over-max-pwr-budget | port-pwr-change | port-pwr-deny | port-pwr-over-30w | port-pwr-overload | port-short-circuit | thermal-shutdown ]

no snmp-server traps power [over-max-pwr-budget | port-pwr-change | port-pwr-deny | port-pwr-over-30w | port-pwr-overload | port-short-circuit | thermal-shutdown ]

Parameter over-max-pwr-budget Triggered when the total power required by the connected PDs exceeds the maximum power the PoE switch can supply.

port-pwr-change Triggered when the total power required by the connected PDs exceeds the maximum power the PoE switch can supply.

502

port-pwr-deny Triggered when the switch powers off PDs on low-priority PoE ports. When the total power required by the connected PDs exceeds the system power limit, the switch will power off PDs on low-priority PoE ports to ensure stable running of the other PDs.

port-pwr-over-30w Triggered when the power required by the connected PD exceeds 30 watts.

port-pwr-overload Triggered when the power required by the connected PD exceeds the maximum power the port can supply.

port-short-circuit Triggered when a short circuit is detected on a port.

thermal-shutdown Triggered when the PSE chip overheats. The switch will stop supplying power in this case.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Enable all PoE traps for the switch:

T1600G-28MPS(config)# snmp-server traps power

58.16 snmp-server traps link-status Description

The snmp-server traps link-status command is used to enable SNMP link status trap for the specified port. To disable the sending of SNMP link status trap, please use no snmp-server traps link-status command. By default, it is disabled.

Syntax snmp-server traps link-status

no snmp-server traps link-status

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

503

Example Enable SNMP link status trap for port 3:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3

Switch(config-if)# snmp-server traps link-status

58.17 rmon history Description

The rmon history command is used to configure the history sample entry. To return to the default configuration, please use no rmon history command. RMON (Remote Monitoring), basing on SNMP architecture, functions to monitor the network. History Group is one of the commonly used RMON Groups. After a history group is configured, the switch collects network statistics information periodically, based on which the management station can monitor network effectively.

Syntax rmon history index interface gigabitEthernet port [ interval interval ] [ owner owner-name ] [ buckets number]

no rmon history index

Parameter index The index number of the entry, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3,5.

port The Ethernet port number.

interval The interval to take samplings from the port, ranging from 10 to 3600 in seconds. By default, it is 1800.

owner-name The owner of the history sample entry, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. By default, it is monitor.

number The maximum number of buckets desired for the RMON history group of statistics, ranging from 1 to 130. The default is 50 buckets.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

504

Example Configure the sample port as Gi1/0/2 and the sample interval as 100 seconds for the entry 1-3:

Switch(config)# rmon history 1-3 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 interval

100 owner owner1

58.18 rmon event Description

The rmon event command is used to configure the entries of SNMP-RMON Event. To return to the default configuration, please use no rmon event command. Event Group, as one of the commonly used RMON Groups, is used to define RMON events. Alarms occur when an event is detected.

Syntax rmon event index [ user user-name ] [ description descript ] [ type { none | log | notify | log-notify }] [ owner owner-name ]

no rmon event index

Parameter index The index number of the event entry, ranging from 1 to 12. You can only select one entry for each command.

user-name The name of the User to which the event belongs, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. By default, it is public.

descript The description of the event, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. By default, it is empty.

type The event type, with none, log, notify and both options. None indicates no processing, log indicates logging the event, notify indicates sending trap messages to the management station, and both indicates logging the event and sending trap messages to the management station.

owner-name The owner of the event entry, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. By default, it is monitor.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

505

Example Configure the user name of entry 1, 2, 3 and 4 as user1, the description of the event as description1, the type of event as log and the owner of the event as owner1:

Switch(config)# rmon event 1-4 user user1 description description1 type

log owner owner1

58.19 rmon alarm Description

The rmon alarm command is used to configure SNMP-RMON Alarm Management. To return to the default configuration, please use no rmon alarm command. Alarm Group is one of the commonly used RMON Groups. RMON alarm management allows monitoring the specific alarm variables. When the value of a monitored variable exceeds the threshold, an alarm event is generated, which triggers the switch to act in the set way.

Syntax rmon alarm index { stats-index sindex } [ alarm-variable { revbyte | revpkt | bpkt | mpkt | crc-lign | undersize | oversize | jabber | collision | 64 | 65-127 | 128-511 | 512-1023 | 1024-10240 }] [ s-type { absolute | delta} ] [ rising-threshold r-hold ] [ rising-event-index r-event] [ falling-threshold f-hold] [ falling-event-index f-event] [ a-type {rise | fall | all} ] [ owner owner-name ] [ interval interval]

no rmon alarm index

Parameter index The index number of the Alarm Management entry, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3,5.

sindex Specify the statistics index.

alarm-variable The alarm variable. By default, the option is revbyte.

s-type Sample Type, which is the sampling method for the selected variable and comparing the value against the thresholds. There are two options, absolute and delta. Absolute indicates comparing the values directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval. Delta indicates subtracting the last sampled value from the current value, and then comparing the difference in the values with the threshold. By default, the Sample Type is absolute.

506

r-hold The rising counter value that triggers the Rising Threshold alarm, ranging from 1 to 2147483647. By default, it is 100.

r-event Rise Event, which is the index of the corresponding event which will be triggered if the sampled value is larger than the Rising Threshold. It ranges from 1 to 12.

f-hold The falling counter value that triggers the Falling Threshold alarm, ranging from 1 to 2147483647. By default, it is 100.

f-event Fall Event, which is the index of the corresponding event which will be triggered if the sampled value is lower than the Falling Threshold. It ranges from 1 to 12.

a-type Alarm Type, with rise, fall and all options. Rise indicates that the alarm event will be triggered when the sampled value exceeds the Rising

Threshold, fall indicates that the alarm event will be triggered when the sampled value is under the Falling Threshold, and all indicates that the alarm event will be triggered either the sampled value exceeds the Rising Threshold or is under the Falling Threshold. By default, the Alarm Type is all.

owner-name The owner of the entry, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. By default, it is monitor.

interval The alarm interval time, ranging from 10 to 3600 in seconds. By default, it is 1800.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure rmon alarm entries 1-3 binding with statistics entry 2, the owners as owner1 and the alarm intervals as 100 seconds:

Switch(config)#rmon alarm 1-3 stats-index 2 owner owner1 interval 100

58.20 rmon statistics Description

The rmon statistics command is used to configure the entries of SNMP-RMON statistics. To delete the corresponding entry, please use no rmon statistics command. The maximum supported entries are 1000.

507

Syntax rmon statistics index interface gigabitEthernet port [ owner owner-name] [ status { underCreation | valid }]

no rmon statistics index

Parameter index The index number of the statistics entry, ranging from 1 to 65535, in the format of 1-3,5.

port The statistics port number, in the format of 1/0/1.

owner-name The creator of the event entry, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. By default, it is monitor.

status The status of the statistics entry, either underCreation or valid. underCreation means this entry wont take effect until it is modified to valid; valid means this entry takes effect immediately after it is created.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Configure the statistics entries 1-3 with the statistics port as 1/0/1, owner as owner1 and status as valid:

Switch(config)#rmon statistics 1-3 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 owner

owner1 status valid

58.21 show snmp-server Description

The show snmp-server command is used to display SNMP configuration globally.

Syntax show snmp-server

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

508

Example Display SNMP configuration globally:

Switch# show snmp-server

58.22 show snmp-server view Description

The show snmp-server view command is used to display the View table.

Syntax show snmp-server view

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Display the View table:

Switch# show snmp-server view

58.23 show snmp-server group Description

The show snmp-server group command is used to display the Group table.

Syntax show snmp-server group

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Display the Group table:

Switch# show snmp-server group

509

58.24 show snmp-server user Description

The show snmp-server user command is used to display the User table.

Syntax show snmp-server user

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Display the User table:

Switch# show snmp-server user

58.25 show snmp-server community Description

The show snmp-server community command is used to display the Community table.

Syntax show snmp-server community

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Display the Community table:

Switch# show snmp-server community

58.26 show snmp-server host Description

The show snmp-server host command is used to display the Host table.

510

Syntax show snmp-server host

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Display the Host table:

Switch# show snmp-server host

58.27 show snmp-server engineID Description

The show snmp-server engineID command is used to display the engineID of the SNMP.

Syntax show snmp-server engineID

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Display the engineID:

Switch# show snmp-server engineID

58.28 show rmon history Description

The show rmon history command is used to display the configuration of the history sample entry.

Syntax show rmon history [ index ]

511

Parameter index The index number of the entry selected to display the configuration, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3, 5. You can select more than one entry for each command. By default, the configuration of all history sample entries is displayed.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Display the configuration of all history sample entries:

Switch# show rmon history

58.29 show rmon event Description

The show rmon event command is used to display the configuration of SNMP-RMON Event.

Syntax show rmon event [ index ]

Parameter index The index number of the entry selected to display the configuration, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3, 5. You can select more than one entry for each command. By default, the configuration of all SNMP-RMON enabled entries is displayed.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Display the Event configuration of entry1-4:

Switch# show rmon event 1-4

512

58.30 show rmon alarm Description

The show rmon alarm command is used to display the configuration of the Alarm Management entry.

Syntax show rmon alarm [ index ]

Parameter index The index number of the entry selected to display the configuration, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3, 5. You can select more than one entry for each command. By default, the configuration of all Alarm Management entries is displayed.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

Example Display the configuration of the Alarm Management entry 1-2:

Switch# show rmon alarm 1-2

58.31 show rmon statistics Description

The show rmon statistics command is used to display the configuration of the specified statistics entry.

Syntax show rmon statistics [ index ]

Parameter index The index number of the statistics entry selected to display the configuration, ranging from 1 to 65535. By default, the configuration of all statistics entries is displayed.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands.

513

Example Display the configuration of the statistics entry 1:

Switch#show rmon statistics 1

514

Chapter 59 PoE Commands (Only for Certain Devices)

Note: PoE commands are only available on certain devices.

PoE (Power over Ethernet) technology describes a system to transmit electrical power along with data to remote devices over standard twisted-pair cable in an Ethernet network. It is especially useful for supplying power to IP telephones, wireless LAN access points, cameras and so on.

59.1 power inline consumption (global) Description

The power inline consumption command is used to configure the max power the PoE switch can supply globally.

Syntax power inline consumption power-limit

Parameter power-limit The max power the PoE switch can supply.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Configure the max power the PoE switch can supply as 160 W:

Switch(config)# power inline consumption 160

59.2 power profile Description

The power profile command is used to create a PoE profile for the switch. To delete the configured PoE profile configuration, please use no power profile command. PoE Profile is a short cut for the configuration of the PoE port. In a PoE profile, the PoE status, PoE priority and power limit are configured. You can specify a PoE profile for each PoE port individually.

515

Syntax power profile name [supply {enable | disable} [priority {low | middle | high} [consumption { power-limit | auto | class1 | class2 | class3 | class4 } ] ] ]

no power profile name

Parameter name The PoE profile name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. If the name being assigned contains spaces then put it inside double quotes.

supply The PoE status of the port in the profile. By default, the PoE status is enable.

priority The PoE priority of the port in the profile. The priority levels include high, middle and low in descending order. When the supply power exceeds the system power limit, the PD linked to the port with lower priority will be disconnected. By default, the PoE priority is low.

consumption The max power the port in the profile can supply, with five options: power-limit, auto, class1, class2, class3 and class4. Power-limit indicates you can manually enter a value ranging from 1 to 300. The value is in the unit of 0.1 watt. For instance, if you want to configure the max power as 5w, you should enter 50. Auto indicates the value is assigned automatically by the PoE switch. Class1 represents 4w. Class2 represents 7w. Class3 represents 15.4w. Class4 represents 30w.

Command Mode Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Create a PoE profile named IP Camera whose PoE status is enable, PoE priority is low and the power limit is 5w:

Switch(config)# power profile IP Camera supply enable priority low

consumption 50

59.3 power inline consumption (interface) Description

The power inline consumption command is used to configure the power limit the corresponding port can supply.

516

Syntax power inline consumption { power-limit | auto | class1 | class2 | class3 | class4 }

Parameter power-limit The max power the port in the profile can supply, with five options: power-limit, auto, class1, class2, class3 and class4. Power-limit indicates you can manually enter a value ranging from 1 to 300. The value is in the unit of 0.1 watt. For instance, if you want to configure the max power as 5w, you should enter 50. Auto indicates the value is assigned automatically by the PoE switch. Class1 represents 4w. Class2 represents 7w. Class3 represents 15.4w. Class4 represents 30w.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Configure the power limit as 5w for port 2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# power inline consumption 50

59.4 power inline priority Description

The power inline priority command is used to configure the PoE priority for the corresponding port

Syntax power inline priority { low | middle | high }

Parameter priority The PoE priority of the port. The priority levels include high, middle and low in descending order. When the supply power exceeds the system power limit, the PD linked to the port with lower priority will be disconnected. By default, the priority level is low.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range

517

gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Configure the PoE priority as low for port 2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# power inline priority low

59.5 power inline supply Description

The power inline supply command is used to configure the PoE status of the corresponding port.

Syntax power inline supply { enable | disable }

Parameter enable | disable The PoE status of the port. By default, the PoE status is enable.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Enable the PoE feature for port 2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# power inline supply enable

59.6 power inline profile Description

The power inline profile command is used to bind a PoE profile to the corresponding port. To cancel the bind relation, please use no power inline profile command.

518

Syntax power inline profile name

no power inline profile

Parameter name The name of the PoE profile to be bound to the port. If the name being assigned contains spaces then put it inside double quotes.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Bind the PoE profile named IP Camera to port 2:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# power inline profile IP Camera

59.7 power inline time-range Description

The power inline time-range command is used to bind a PoE time-range to the corresponding port. To cancel the bind relation, please use no power inline time-range command.

Syntax power inline time-range name

no power inline time-range

Parameter name The name of the PoE time-range to be bound to the port.

Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Bind the PoE time-range named tRange2" to port 2:

519

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# power inline time-range tRange2

59.8 show power inline Description

The show power inline command is used to display the global PoE information of the system.

Syntax show power inline

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the PoE information of the system:

Switch# show power inline

59.9 show power inline configuration interface Description

The show power inline configuration interface command is used to display the PoE configuration of the certain port.

Syntax show power inline configuration interface [ fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port ]

Parameter port The Ethernet port number.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

520

Example Display the PoE configuration of all ports:

Switch# show power inline configuration interface

59.10 show power inline information interface Description

The show power inline information command is used to display the PoE information of the certain port.

Syntax show power inline information interface [ fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port ]

Parameter port The Ethernet port number.

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example Display the PoE information of all ports:

Switch# show power inline information interface

59.11 show power profile Description

The show power profile command is used to display the defined PoE profile.

Syntax show power profile

Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

521

Example Display the defined PoE profile:

Switch# show power profile

522

Chapter 60 ARP Inspection Commands

ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) Detect function is to protect the switch from the ARP cheating, such as the Network Gateway Spoofing and Man-In-The-Middle Attack, etc.

60.1 ip arp inspection Description

The ip arp inspection command is used to enable the ARP Detection function globally. To disable the ARP Detection function, please use no ip arp detection command.

Syntax

ip arp inspection

no ip arp inspection

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the ARP Detection function globally:

Switch(config)#ip arp inspection

60.2 ip arp inspection validate Description

The ip arp inspection validate command is used to enable the switch to check whether the reveided ARP packet is illegal. To disable,the feature please use no ip arp detection validate command.

Syntax

ip arp inspection validate { src-mac | dst-mac | ip }

no ip arp inspection validate { src-mac | dst-mac | ip }

523

Syntax

src-mac Enable the switch to check whether the source MAC address and the sender MAC address are the same when receiving an ARP packet. If not, the ARP packet will be discarded.

dst-mac Enable the switch to check whether the sender IP address of all ARP packets and the target IP address of ARP reply packets are legal. The illegal packets will be discarded.

ip Enable or disable the switch to check whether the sender IP address of all ARP packets and the target IP address of ARP reply packets are legal. The illegal packets will be discarded.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the switch to check whether the source MAC address and the sender MAC address are the same when receiving an ARP packet

Switch(config)#ip arp inspection validate src-mac

60.3 ip arp inspection vlan Description

The ip arp inspection vlan command is used to enable the ARP Detection function on VLANs. To disable the ARP Detection function on VLANs, please use no ip arp detection vlan command.

Syntax

ip arp inspection vlan vlan-list

no ip arp inspection vlan vlan-list

Syntax

vlan-list Enter the VLAN ID. The format is 1,5-9.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

524

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the ARP Detection function on VLAN 2:

Switch(config)#ip arp inspection vlan 2

60.4 ip arp inspection vlan logging Description

The ip arp inspection vlan logging command is used to enable the Log function on the specific VLAN. To disable the Log function on the VLAN, please use no ip arp detection vlan logging command.

Syntax

ip arp inspection vlan vlan-list logging

no ip arp inspection vlan vlan-list logging

Syntax

vlan-list Enter the VLAN ID. The format is 1,5-9.

logging Enable the Log feature to make the switch generate a log when an ARP packet is discarded.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the log feature on VLAN 2:

Switch(config)#ip arp inspection vlan 2 logging

525

60.5 ip arp inspection trust Description

The ip arp inspection trust command is used to configure the port for which the ARP Detect function is unnecessary as the Trusted Port. To clear the Trusted Port list, please use no ip arp detection trust command .The specific ports, such as up-linked port and routing port and LAG port, should be set as Trusted Port. To ensure the normal communication of the switch, please configure the ARP Trusted Port before enabling the ARP Detect function.

Syntax

ip arp inspection trust

no ip arp inspection trust

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/2-5 as the Trusted Port:

Switch(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-5

Switch(config-if-range)#ip arp inspection trust

60.6 ip arp inspection limit-rate Description

The ip arp inspection limit-rate command is used to configure the ARP speed of a specified port. To restore to the default speed, please use no ip arp inspection limit-rate command.

Syntax

ip arp inspection limit-rate value

no ip arp inspection limit-rate

526

Parameter

value The value to specify the maximum amount of the received ARP packets per second, ranging from 1 to 300 in pps(packet/second). By default, the value is 100.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the maximum amount of the received ARP packets per second as 50 pps for Gigabit Ethernet port 5:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

Switch(config-if)#ip arp inspection limit-rate 50

60.7 ip arp inspection burst-interval Description

The ip arp inspection burst-interval command is used to configure the burst interval of a specified port. To restore to the default speed, please use no ip arp inspection burst-interval command.

Syntax

ip arp inspection burst-interval value

no ip arp inspection burst-interval

Parameter

value Specify a time range. If the speed of received ARP packets in this time range reaches the limit for this time range, the port will be shut down. The valid values are from 1 to 15 seconds, and the default value is 1 second.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

527

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Configure the burst interval as 2 seconds for Gigabit Ethernet port 5:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

Switch(config-if)#ip arp inspection burst-interval 2

60.8 ip arp inspection recover Description

The ip arp inspection recover command is used to restore a port to the ARP transmit status from the ARP filter status.

Syntax

ip arp inspection recover

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet)

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Restore Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5 to the ARP transmit status:

Switch(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5

Switch(config-if)#ip arp inspection recover

60.9 show ip arp inspection Description

The show ip arp inspection command is used to display the ARP detection global configuration including the enable/disable status and the Trusted Port list.

528

Syntax

show ip arp inspection

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the ARP detection configuration globally:

Switch(config)#show ip arp inspection

60.10 show ip arp inspection interface Description

The show ip arp inspection interface command is used to display the interface configuration of ARP detection.

Syntax

show ip arp inspection interface [ gigabitEthernet port ]

Parameter

port The Ethernet port number.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:

Switch(config)#show ip arp inspection interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Display the configuration of all Ethernet ports:

Switch(config)#show ip arp inspection interface

529

60.11 show ip arp inspection vlan Description

The show ip arp inspection vlan command is used to display the VLAN configuration of ARP detection.

Syntax

show ip arp inspection vlan

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the ARP Inspection configuration of VLAN:

Switch(config)#show ip arp inspection vlan

60.12 show ip arp inspection statistics Description

The show ip arp inspection statistics command is used to display the number of the illegal ARP packets received.

Syntax

show ip arp inspection statistics

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the number of the illegal ARP packets received:

Switch(config)#show ip arp inspection statistics

530

60.13 clear ip arp inspection statistics Description

The clear ip arp inspection statistics command is used to clear the statistic of the illegal ARP packets received.

Syntax

clear ip arp inspection statistics

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands.

Example

Clear the statistic of the illegal ARP packets received:

Switch(config)#clear ip arp inspection statistics

531

Chapter 61 ND Detection Commands

The ND Detection feature allows the switch to detect the ND packets based on the binding entries in the IPv6-MAC Binding Table and filter out the illegal ND packets. Before configuring ND Detection, complete IPv6-MAC Binding configuration. For details, refer to IPv6-MAC Binding Configurations.

61.1 ipv6 nd detection Description

The ipv6 nd detection command is used to enable the ND Detection function globally. To disable the ND Detection function, please use no ipv6 nd detection command.

Syntax

ipv6 nd detection

no ipv6 nd detection

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Example

Enable the ND Detection function globally:

Switch(config)#ipv6 nd detection

61.2 ipv6 nd detection vlan Description

The ipv6 nd detection vlan command is used to enable ND Detection function on a specified VLAN. To disable ND Detection function on this VLAN, please use no ipv6 nd detection vlan command.

Syntax

ipv6 nd detection vlan vlan-range

no ipv6 nd detection vlan vlan-range

532

Parameter

vlan-range Enter the vlan range in the format of 1-3, 5.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Example

Enable the ND Detection function on VLAN 1,4,6-7:

Switch(config)#ipv6 nd detection vlan 1,4,6-7

61.3 ipv6 nd detection vlan logging Description

The ipv6 nd detection vlan logging command is used to enable Log function on a specified VLAN. To disable Log function on this VLAN, please use no ipv6 nd detection vlan logging command.

Syntax

ipv6 nd detection vlan vlan-range logging

no ipv6 nd detection vlan vlan-range logging

Parameter

vlan-range Enter the vlan range in the format of 1-3, 5.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Example

Enable the Log function on VLAN 1,4,6-7:

Switch(config)#ipv6 nd detection vlan 1,4,6-7 logging

61.4 ipv6 nd detection trust Description

The ipv6 nd detection trust command is used to configure the port for which the ND Detection function is unnecessary as the Trusted Port. To clear the Trusted Port list, please use no ipv6 nd detection trust command .The specific port, such as up-linked port, routing port and LAG port, should be set

533

as Trusted Port. To ensure the normal communication of the switch, please configure the ND Detection Trusted Port before enabling the ND Detection function.

Syntax

Ipv6 nd detection trust

no ipv6 nd detection trust

Command Mode

Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet/ interface port-channel / interface range port-channel)

Example

Configure the Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/2-5 as the Trusted Port:

Switch(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-5

Switch(config-if-range)#ipv6 nd detection trust

61.5 show ipv6 nd detection Description

The show ipv6 nd detection command is used to display the ND detection global configuration including the enable/disable status.

Syntax

show ipv6 nd detection

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Example

Display the ND Detection configuration globally:

Switch(config)#show ipv6 nd detection

61.6 show ipv6 nd detection interface Description

The show ipv6 nd detection interface command is used to display the interface configuration of ND Detection.

534

Syntax

show ipv6 nd detection interface[ fastEthernet port | gigabitEthernet port | ten-gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ]

Parameter

port The Ethernet port number.

port-channel-id The ID of the port channel.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Example

Display the configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1:

Switch(config)#show ipv6 nd detection interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1

Display the configuration of all Ethernet ports:

Switch(config)#show ipv6 nd detection interface

61.7 show ipv6 nd detection statistics

Note: This command is only available on certain devices.

Description

The show ipv6 nd detection statistics command is used to display the ND statistics of each VLAN, including the number of forwarded and dropped ND packets.

Syntax

show ipv6 nd detection statistics

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Example

Display the ipv6 ND Detection statistics of each VLAN.

T2600G-28TS(config)#show ipv6 nd detection statistics

535

61.8 show ipv6 nd detection vlan Description

The show ipv6 nd detection vlan command is used to display the VLAN configuration of ND Detection.

Syntax

show ipv6 nd detection vlan

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Example

Display the ipv6 ND Detection configuration of VLAN.

Switch(config)#show ipv6 nd detection vlan

536

Chapter 62 System Log Commands

The log information will record the settings and operation of the switch respectively for you to monitor operation status and diagnose malfunction.

62.1 logging buffer Description

The logging buffer command is used to store the system log messages to an internal buffer. To disable the log buffer function, please use the no logging buffer command. Local Log is the system log information saved in the switch. It has two output channels, that is, it can be saved to two different positions, log buffer and log flash memory. The log buffer indicates the RAM for saving system log and the information in the log buffer can be got by show logging buffercommand. It will be lost when the switch is restarted.

Syntax

logging buffer

no logging buffer

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the system log buffer:

Switch(config)#logging buffer

62.2 logging buffer level Description

The logging buffer level command is used to configure the severity level and the status of the configuration input to the log buffer. To return to the default configuration, please use no logging buffer level command.

537

Syntax

logging buffer level level

no logging buffer level

Parameter

level Severity level of the log information output to each channel.There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be output. By default, it is 6 indicating that the log information with level 0-6 will be saved in the log buffer.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Set the severity level as 5:

Switch(config)#logging buffer level 5

62.3 logging file flash Description

The logging file flash command is used to store the log messages in a file in the flash on the switch. To disable the log file flash function, please use no logging file flash command. This function is disabled by default. The log file flash indicates the flash sector for saving system log. The information in the log file of the flash will not be lost after the switch is restarted and can be got by the show logging flashcommand.

Syntax

logging file flash

no logging file flash

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

538

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable the log file flash function:

Switch(config)#logging file flash

62.4 logging file flash frequency Description

The logging file flash frequency command is used to specify the frequency to synchronize the system log file in the log buffer to the flash. To resume the default synchronizing frequency, please use the no logging file flash frequency command.

Syntax

logging file flash frequency { periodic periodic | immediate }

no logging file flash frequency

Parameter

periodic The frequency to synchronize the system log file in the log buffer to the flash, ranging from 1 to 48 hours. By default, the synchronization process takes place every 24 hours.

immediate The system log file in the buffer will be synchronized to the flash immediately. This option will reduce the life of the flash and is not recommended.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Specify the log file synchronization frequency as 10 hours:

Switch(config)#logging file flash frequency periodic10

539

62.5 logging file flash level Description

The logging file flash level command is used to specify the system log message severity level. Messages will a severity level equal to or higher than this value will be stored to the flash. To restore to the default level, please use no logging file flash level command.

Syntax

logging file flash level level

no logging file flash level

Parameter

level Severity level of the log message.There are 8 severity levels marked with values 07. The smaller value has the higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be saved to the flash. By default, it is 3 indicating that the log message marked with 03 will be saved in the log flash.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Save the log messages with their severities equal or higher than 7 to the flash :

Switch(config)#logging file flash level 7

62.6 logging host index Description

The logging host index command is used to configure the Log Host. To clear the configuration of the specified Log Host, please use no logging host index command. Log Host is to receive the system log from other devices. You can remotely monitor the settings and operation status of other devices through the log host.

540

Syntax

logging host index idx host-ip level

no logging host index idx

Parameter

idx The index of the log host. The switch supports 4 log hosts at most.

host-ip The IP for the log host.

level The severity level of the log information sent to each log host. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be sent to the corresponding log host. By default, it is 6 indicating that the log information marked with 06 will be sent to the log host.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Enable log host 2 and set its IP address as 192.168.0.148, the level 5:

Switch(config)# logging host index 2 192.168.0.148 5

62.7 logging console Description

The logging console command is used to send the system logs to the console port. To disable logging to the console, please use no logging console command. This function is enabled by default.

Syntax

logging console

no logging console

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

541

Example

Enable logging to the console port:

Switch(config)# logging console

62.8 logging console level Description

The logging console level command is used to limit messages logged to the console port. System logs no higher than the set threshold level will be displayed on the console port. To restore the threshold level to default value, please use no logging console level command.

Syntax

logging console level level

no logging monitor level

Parameter

level Severity level of the log information output to the console port. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 07. The smaller value has the higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be output to the terminal devices. By default, it is 5 indicating that all the log information between level 05 will be output to the terminal devices.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Output the log information with severity levels between 07 to the console port:

Switch(config)# logging console level 7

542

62.9 logging monitor Description

The logging monitor command is used to display the system logs on the terminal devices. To disable logging to the terminal, please use no logging monitor command. This function is enabled by default.

Syntax

logging monitor

no logging monitor

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Disable logging to the terminal devices:

Switch(config)# no logging monitor

62.10 logging monitor level Description

The logging monitor level command is used to limit messages logged to the terminal devices. System logs no higher than the set threshold level will be displayed on the terminal devices. To restore the threshold level to default value, please use no logging monitor level command.

Syntax

logging monitor level level

no logging monitor level

Parameter

level Severity level of the log information output to the terminal devices. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 07. The smaller value has the higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will

543

be output to the terminal devices. By default, it is 5 indicating that all the log information between level 05 will be output to the terminal devices.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Output the log information with severity levels between 07 to the terminal devices:

Switch(config)# logging monitor level 7

62.11 clear logging Description

The clear logging command is used to clear the information in the log buffer and log file.

Syntax

clear logging [ buffer | flash ]

Parameter

buffer | flash The output channels: buffer and flash. Clear the information of the two channels, by default.

Command Mode

Global Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands.

Example

Clear the information in the log file:

Switch(config)# clear logging buffer

544

62.12 show logging local-config Description

The show logging local-config command is used to display the configuration of the Local Log output to the console, the terminal, the log buffer and the log file.

Syntax

show logging local-config

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the configuration of the Local Log:

Switch(config)# show logging local-config

62.13 show logging loghost Description

The show logging loghost command is used to display the configuration of the log host.

Syntax

show logging loghost [ index ]

Parameter

index The index of the log host whose configuration will be displayed, ranging from 1 to 4. Display the configuration of all the log hosts by default.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

545

Example

Display the configuration of the log host 2:

Switch(config)# show logging loghost 2

62.14 show logging buffer Description

The show logging buffer command is used to display the log information in the log buffer according to the severity level.

Syntax

show logging buffer [ level level ]

Parameter

level Severity level. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 07. The information of levels with priority not lower than the select level will display. Display all the log information in the log buffer by default.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode

Privilege Requirement

None.

Example

Display the log information from level 0 to level 5 in the log buffer:

Switch(config)# show logging buffer level 5

62.15 show logging flash Description

The show logging flash command is used to display the log information in the log file according to the severity level.

Syntax

show logging flash [ level level ]

546

Parameter

level Severity level. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 07. The information of levels with priority not lower than the select level will display. Display all the log information in the log file by default.

Command Mode

Privileged EXEC Mo

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the TL-SG2218 V1 TP-Link works, you can view and download the tp-link TL-SG2218 V1 Reference Guide on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Reference Guide for TP-Link TL-SG2218 V1 as well as other TP-Link manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Reference Guide should include all the details that are needed to use a TP-Link TL-SG2218 V1. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the tp-link TL-SG2218 V1 Reference Guide is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This tp-link TL-SG2218 V1 Reference Guide consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download tp-link TL-SG2218 V1 Reference Guide free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print tp-link TL-SG2218 V1 Reference Guide, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the tp-link TL-SG2218 V1 Reference Guide as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.